De Re BASIC! Version 1.91

Transcription

1 De Re BASIC! Version 1.91 March 14, 2017 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 1 De Re BASIC!

2 Table of Contents Changes in this Version About the Title, De Re BASIC! About the Cover Art Credits Technical Editor Getting BASIC! BASIC! Forum BASIC! Tutorial BASIC! Operation Permissions Editor Editing the Program Multiple Commands on a Line Line Continuation # - Format Line Menus Run Menu Crashes A BASIC! Program Command Description Syntax Upper and Lower Case <nexp>, <sexp> and <lexp> <nvar>, <svar> and <lvar> Array[] and Array$[] Array[{<start>,<length>}] and Array$[{<start>,<length>}] {something} { A B C } X, {,n} Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 2 De Re BASIC!

3 <statement> Optional Parameters Numbers Strings Variables Variable Names Variable Types Scalar and Array Variables Scalars Arrays Array Segments Array Commands Data Structures and Pointers in BASIC! What is a Pointer Lists List Commands Bundles Bundle Auto-Create Bundle Commands Stacks Stack Commands Queues Comments... 52! - Single Line Comment Rem - Single Line Comment (legacy)... 52!! - Block Comment % - Middle of Line Comment Expressions Numeric Expression <nexp> Numeric Operators <noperator> Numeric Expression Examples Pre- and Post-Increment Operators Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 3 De Re BASIC!

4 String Expression <sexp> Logical Expression <lexp> Logical Operators Examples of Logical Expressions Parentheses Assignment Operations Let OpEqual Assignment Operations Math Functions BOR(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) BAND(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) BXOR(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) BNOT(<nexp>) ABS(<nexp>) SGN(<nexp>) RANDOMIZE({<nexp>}) RND() MAX(<nexp>, <nexp>) MIN(<nexp>, <nexp>) CEIL(<nexp>) FLOOR(<nexp>) INT(<nexp>) FRAC(<nexp>) MOD(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) ROUND(<value_nexp>{, <count_nexp>{, <mode_sexp>}}) SQR(<nexp>) CBRT(<nexp>) LOG(<nexp>) LOG10(<nexp>) EXP(<nexp>) POW(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) HYPOT(<nexp_x>, <nexp_y) Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 4 De Re BASIC!

5 PI() SIN(<nexp>) COS(<nexp>) TAN(<nexp>) SINH(<nexp>) COSH(<nexp>) ASIN(<nexp>) ACOS(<nexp>) ATAN(<nexp>) ATAN2(<nexp_y>, <nexp_x>) TODEGREES(<nexp>) TORADIANS(<nexp>) VAL(<sexp>) IS_NUMBER(<sexp>) LEN(<sexp>) HEX(<sexp>) OCT(<sexp>) BIN(<sexp>) SHIFT(<value_nexp>, <bits_nexp>) ASCII(<sexp>{, <index_nexp>}) UCODE(<sexp>{, <index_nexp>}) IS_IN(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>{, <start_nexp>}) STARTS_WITH(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>{, <start_nexp>}) ENDS_WITH(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>) GR_COLLISION(<object_1_nvar>, <object_2_nvar>) BACKGROUND() Time Functions CLOCK() TIME() TIME(<year_exp>, <month_exp>, <day_exp>, <hour_exp>, <minute_exp>, <second_exp>) String Functions GETERROR$() Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 5 De Re BASIC!

6 CHR$(<nexp>,...) LEFT$(<sexp>, <count_nexp>) MID$(<sexp>, <start_nexp>{, <count_nexp>}) RIGHT$(<sexp>, <count_nexp>) REPLACE$(<sexp>, <argument_sexp>, <replace_sexp>) TRIM$(<sexp>{, <test_sexp>}) LTRIM$(<sexp>{, <test_sexp>}) RTRIM$(<sexp>{, <test_sexp>}) WORD$(<source_sexp>, <n_nexp> {, <test_sexp>}) ENCODE$(<type_sexp>, {<qualifier_sexp>}, <source_sexp>) DECODE$(<type_sexp>, {<qualifier_sexp>}, <source_sexp>) ENCODE$(<charset_sexp>, <source_sexp>) DECODE$(<charset_sexp>, <buffer_sexp>) STR$(<nexp>) LOWER$(<sexp>) UPPER$(<sexp>) VERSION$() INT$(<nexp>) HEX$(<nexp>) OCT$(<nexp>) BIN$(<nexp>) USING$({<locale_sexp>}, <format_sexp> {, <exp>}...) Locale expression Format expression Integer values FORMAT_USING$(<locale_sexp>, <format_sexp> {, <exp>}...) FORMAT$(<pattern_sexp>, <nexp>) Notes Examples User-Defined Functions Variable Scope Data Structures in User-Defined Functions Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 6 De Re BASIC!

7 Commands Fn.def name name$( {nvar} {svar} Array[] Array$[],... {nvar} {svar} Array[] Array$[]) Fn.rtn <sexp> <nexp> Fn.end Call <user_defined_function> Program Control Commands If / Then / Else / Elseif / Endif If / Then / Else For - To - Step / Next F_N.continue F_N.break While <lexp> / Repeat W_R.continue W_R.break Do / Until <lexp> D_U.continue D_U.break Labels, GOTO, GOSUB, and RETURN: Traditional BASIC Label GoTo <label> GoTo <index_nexp>, <label> GoSub <label> / Return GoSub <index_nexp>, <label>... / Return Using Source Code from Multiple Files Include FilePath Run <filename_sexp>{, <data_sexp>} Program.info <nexp> <nvar> Switch Commands Nesting Switch Operations Sw.begin <exp> Sw.case <exp>, Sw.case <op><exp> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 7 De Re BASIC!

8 Sw.break Sw.default Sw.end Interrupt Labels (Event Handlers) All Interrupt Labels OnError: OnConsoleTouch: ConsoleTouch.resume OnBackKey: Back.resume OnMenuKey: MenuKey.resume OnKeyPress: Key.resume OnLowMemory: LowMemory.resume End{ <msg_sexp>} Exit READ DATA RESTORE Commands Read.data <number> <string>{,<number> <string>...,<number> <string>} Read.next <var>, Read.from <nexp> Debug Commands Debug.on Debug.off Debug.echo.on Echo.on Debug.echo.off Echo.off Debug.print Debug.dump.scalars Debug.dump.array Array[] Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 8 De Re BASIC!

9 Debug.dump.bundle <bundleptr_nexp> Debug.dump.list <listptr_nexp> Debug.dump.stack <stackptr_nexp> Debug.show.scalars Debug.show.array Array[] Debug.show.bundle <bundleptr_nexp> Debug.show.list <listptr_nexp> Debug.show.stack <stackptr_nexp> Debug.watch var, Debug.show.watch Debug.show.program Debug.show Fonts Font.load <font_ptr_nvar>, <filename_sexp> Font.delete {<font_ptr_nexp>} Font.clear Console I/O Output Console Print {<exp> {, ;}} ? {<exp> {, ;}} Print with User-Defined Functions Cls Console.front Console.line.count <count_nvar> Console.line.text <line_nexp>, <text_svar> Console.line.touched <line_nvar> {, <press_lvar>} Console.save <filename_sexp> Console.title { <title_sexp>} User Input and Interaction Dialog.message {<title_sexp>}, {<message_sexp>}, <sel_nvar> {, <button1_sexp>{, <button2_sexp>{, <button3_sexp>}}} Dialog.select <sel_nvar>, <Array$[]> <list_nexp> {,<title_sexp>} Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 9 De Re BASIC!

10 Input {<prompt_sexp>}, <result_var>{, {<default_exp>}{, <canceled_nvar>}} Inkey$ <svar> Popup <message_sexp> {{, <x_nexp>}{, <y_nexp>}{, <duration_lexp>}} Select <sel_nvar>, <Array$[]> <list_nexp> {,<title_sexp> {, <message_sexp> } } {,<press_lvar> } Text.input <svar>{, { <text_sexp>}, <title_sexp> } TGet <result_svar>, <prompt_sexp> {, <title_sexp>} Kb.hide Kb.show Kb.toggle Kb.showing <lvar> OnKbChange: Kb.resume The Soft Keyboard and the BACK Key Working with Files Paths Explained a beginner s guide Paths in BASIC! Paths Outside of BASIC! Paths and Case-sensitivity Mark and Mark Limit File Commands File.delete <lvar>, <path_sexp> File.dir <path_sexp>, Array$[] {,<dirmark_sexp>} File.exists <lvar>, <path_sexp> File.mkdir <path_sexp> File.rename <old_path_sexp>, <new_path_sexp> File.root <svar> File.size <size_nvar>, <path_sexp> File.type <type_svar>, <path_sexp> Text File I/O Text.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp> Text.close <file_table_nexp> Text.readln <file_table_nexp> {,<svar>} Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 10 De Re BASIC!

11 Text.writeln <file_table_nexp>, <parms same as Print> Text.eof <file_table_nexp>, <lvar> Text.position.get <file_table_nexp>, <position_nvar> Text.position.set <file_table_nexp>, <position_nexp> Text.position.mark {{<file_table_nexp>}{, <marklimit_nexp>}} GrabURL <result_svar>, <url_sexp>{, <timeout_nexp>} GrabFile <result_svar>, <path_sexp>{, <unicode_flag_lexp>} Byte File I/O Byte.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp> Byte.close <file_table_nexp> Byte.read.byte <file_table_nexp> {,<nvar>} Byte.write.byte <file_table_nexp> {{,<nexp>}...{,<sexp>}} Byte.read.number <file_table_nexp> {,<nvar>...} Byte.write.number <file_table_nexp> {,<nexp>} Byte.read.buffer <file_table_nexp>, <count_nexp>, <buffer_svar> Byte.write.buffer <file_table_nexp>, <buffer_sexp> Byte.eof <file_table_nexp>, <lvar> Byte.position.get <file_table_nexp>, <position_nvar> Byte.position.set <file_table_nexp>, <position_nexp> Byte.position.mark {{<file_table_nexp>}{, <marklimit_nexp>}} Byte.truncate <file_table_nexp>,<length_nexp> Byte.copy <file_table_nexp>,<output_file_sexp> ZIP File I/O Zip.count <path_sexp>, <nvar> Zip.dir <path_sexp>, Array$[] {,<dirmark_sexp>} Zip.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp> Zip.close <file_table_nexp> Zip.read <file_table_nexp>,<buffer_svar>, <file_name_sexp> Zip.write <file_table_nexp>,<buffer_sexp>, <file_name_sexp> HTML Introduction HTML Commands Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 11 De Re BASIC!

12 Html.open {<ShowStatusBar_lexp> {, <Orientation_nexp>}} Html.orientation <nexp> Html.load.url <file_sexp> Html.load.string <html_sexp> Html.post <url_sexp>, <list_nexp> Html.get.datalink <data_svar> Html.go.back Html.go.forward Html.close Html.clear.cache Html.clear.history Related Commands Browse <url_sexp> Http.post <url_sexp>, <list_nexp>, <result_svar> TCP/IP Sockets TCP/IP Client Socket Commands Socket.client.connect <server_sexp>, <port_nexp> {, <wait_lexp> } Socket.client.status <status_nvar> Socket.client.server.ip <svar> Socket.client.read.line <line_svar> Socket.client.read.ready <nvar> Socket.client.read.file <file_nexp> Socket.client.write.line <line_sexp> Socket.client.write.bytes <sexp> Socket.client.write.file <file_nexp> Socket.client.close TCP/IP Server Socket Commands Socket.myIP <svar> Socket.myIP <array$[]>{, <nvar>} Socket.server.create <port_nexp> Socket.server.connect {<wait_lexp>} Socket.server.status <status_nvar> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 12 De Re BASIC!

13 Socket.server.read.line <svar> Socket.server.read.ready <nvar> Socket.server.write.line <line_sexp> Socket.server.write.bytes <sexp> Socket.server.write.file <file_nexp> Socket.server.read.file <file_nexp> Socket.server.disconnect Socket.server.close Socket.server.client.ip <nvar> FTP Client Ftp.open <url_sexp>, <port_nexp>, <user_sexp>, <pw_sexp> Ftp.close Ftp.put <source_sexp>, <destination_sexp> Ftp.get <source_sexp>, <destination_sexp> Ftp.dir <list_nvar> {,<dirmark_sexp>} Ftp.cd <new_directory_sexp> Ftp.rename <old_filename_sexp>, <new_filename_sexp> Ftp.delete <filename_sexp> Ftp.rmdir <directory_sexp> Ftp.mkdir <directory_sexp> Bluetooth Bt.open {0 1} Bt.close Bt.connect {0 1} Bt.disconnect Bt.reconnect Bt.status {{<connect_var>}{, <name_svar>}{, <address_svar>}} Bt.write {<exp> {, ;}} Bt.read.ready <nvar> OnBtReadReady: Bt.onReadReady.resume Bt.read.bytes <svar> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 13 De Re BASIC!

14 Bt.device.name <svar> Bt.set.UUID <sexp> Communication: Phone and Text send <recipient_sexp>, <subject_sexp>, <body_sexp> MyPhoneNumber <svar> Phone.call <sexp> Phone.dial <sexp> Phone.rcv.init Phone.rcv.next <state_nvar>, <number_svar> Sms.send <number_sexp>, <message_sexp> Sms.rcv.init Sms.rcv.next <svar> Time and Timers Time and TimeZone Commands Time {<time_nexp>,} Year$, Month$, Day$, Hour$, Minute$, Second$, WeekDay, isdst TimeZone.set { <tz_sexp> } TimeZone.get <tz_svar> TimeZone.list <tz_list_pointer_nexp> Timer Interrupt and Commands Timer.set <interval_nexp> OnTimer: Timer.resume Timer.clear Sample Code Clipboard Clipboard.get <svar> Clipboard.put <sexp> Encryption Encrypt {<pw_sexp>}, <source_sexp>, <encrypted_svar> Decrypt <pw_sexp>, <encrypted_sexp>, <decrypted_svar> Ringer Ringer.get.mode <nvar> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 14 De Re BASIC!

15 Ringer.set.mode <nexp> Ringer.get.volume <vol_nvar> {, <max_nvar> } Ringer.set.volume <nexp> String Operations Join <source_array$[]>, <result_svar> {, <separator_sexp>{, <wrapper_sexp}} Join.all <source_array$[]>, <result_svar> {, <separator_sexp>{, <wrapper_sexp}} Split <result_array$[]>, <sexp> {, <test_sexp>} Split.all <result_array$[]>, <sexp> {, <test_sexp>} Speech Conversion Text To Speech TTS.init TTS.speak <sexp> {, <wait_lexp>} TTS.speak.toFile <sexp> {, <path_sexp>} TTS.stop Speech To Text (Voice Recognition) STT.listen {<prompt_sexp>} STT.results <string_list_ptr_nexp> Information About Your Android Device Device Command Overview Device <svar> Device <nexp> <nvar> Device.Language <svar> Device. Locale <svar> Phone.info <nexp> <nvar> Screen rotation, size[], realsize[], density Screen.rotation <nvar> Screen.size, size[], realsize[], density WiFi.info {{<SSID_svar>}{, <BSSID_svar>}{, <MAC_svar>}{, <IP_var>}{, <speed_nvar>}} Running in the Background Home OnBackground: Background.resume Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 15 De Re BASIC!

16 WakeLock <code_nexp>{, <flags_nexp>} WifiLock <code_nexp> Miscellaneous Commands Headset <state_nvar>, <type_svar>, <mic_nvar> Notify <title_sexp>, <subtitle_sexp>, <alert_sexp>, <wait_lexp> Pause <ticks_nexp> Swap <nvar_a> <svar_a>, <nvar_b> <svar_b> Tone <frequency_nexp>, <duration_nexp> {, <duration_chk_lexp} Vibrate <pattern_array[{<start>,<length>}]>,<nexp> VolKeys VolKeys.off VolKeys.on SQLITE Overview SQLITE Commands Sql.open <DB_pointer_nvar>, <DB_name_sexp> Sql.close <DB_pointer_nvar> Sql.new_table <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, C2$,...,CN$ Sql.drop_table <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp> Sql.insert <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, V1$, C2$, V2$,..., CN$, VN$ Sql.query <cursor_nvar>, <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, <columns_sexp> {, <where_sexp> {, <order_sexp>} } Sql.query.length <length_nvar>, <cursor_nvar> Sql.query.position <position_nvar>, <cursor_nvar> Sql.next <done_lvar>, <cursor_nvar>{, <cv_svars>} Sql.delete <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>{,<where_sexp>{,<count_nvar>} } Sql.update <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, V1$, C2$, V2$,...,CN$, VN${: <where_sexp>} Sql.exec <DB_pointer_nvar>, <command_sexp> Sql.raw_query <cursor_nvar>, <DB_pointer_nvar>, <query_sexp> Graphics Introduction Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 16 De Re BASIC!

17 The Graphics Screen and Graphics Mode Display Lists Drawing Coordinates Drawing into Bitmaps Colors Paints Style Hardware-accelerated Graphics Graphics Setup Commands Gr.open {{alpha}{, red}{, green}{, blue}{, <ShowStatusBar_lexp>}{, <Orientation_nexp>}} Gr.color {{alpha}{, red}{, green}{, blue}{, style}{, paint}} Gr.set.antialias {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.set.stroke {{<nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.orientation <nexp> Gr.statusbar {<height_nvar>} {, showing_lvar} Gr.statusbar.show <nexp> Gr.render Gr.screen width, height{, density } Gr.scale x_factor, y_factor Gr.cls Gr.close Gr.front flag Gr.brightness <nexp> Graphical Object Creation Commands Gr.point <obj_nvar>, x, y Gr.line <obj_nvar>, x1, y1, x2, y Gr.rect <ob_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom Gr.oval <obj_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom Gr.arc <obj_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom, start_angle, sweep_angle, fill_mode Gr.circle <obj_nvar>, x, y, radius Gr.set.pixels <obj_nvar>, pixels[{<start>,<length>}] {,x,y} Gr.poly <obj_nvar>, list_pointer {,x, y} Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 17 De Re BASIC!

18 Groups Gr.group <object_number_nvar>{, <obj_nexp>} Gr.group.list <object_number_nvar>, <list_ptr_nexp> Gr.group.getDL <object_number_nvar> Gr.group.newDL <object_number_nvar> Hide and Show Commands Gr.hide <object_number_nexp> Gr.show <object_number_nexp> Gr.show.toggle <object_number_nexp> Touch Query Commands Gr.touch touched, x, y Gr.bounded.touch touched, left, top, right, bottom Gr.touch2 touched, x, y Gr.bounded.touch2 touched, left, top, right, bottom OnGrTouch: Gr.onGrTouch.resume Text Commands Overview Gr.text.align {{<type_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.bold {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.size {{<size_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.skew {{<skew_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.strike {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.underline {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.setfont {{<font_ptr_nexp> <font_family_sexp>} {, <style_sexp>} {,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.typeface {{<font_nexp>} {, <style_nexp>} {,<paint_nexp>}} Gr.text.height {<height_nvar>} {, <up_nvar>} {, <down_nvar>} Gr.text.width <nvar>, <exp> Gr.get.textbounds <exp>, left, top, right, bottom Gr.text.draw <object_number_nvar>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp>, <text_object_sexp> Bitmap Commands Overview Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 18 De Re BASIC!

19 Gr.bitmap.create <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, width, height Gr.bitmap.load <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <file_name_sexp> Gr.bitmap.size <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, width, height Gr.bitmap.scale <new_bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, width, height {, <smoothing_lexp>} Gr.bitmap.delete <bitmap_ptr_nexp> Gr.bitmap.crop <new_bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <source_bitmap_ptr_nexp>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp>, <width_nexp>, <height_nexp> Gr.bitmap.save <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <filename_sexp>{, <quality_nexp>} Gr.bitmap.draw <object_ptr_nvar>, <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, x, y Gr.get.bmpixel <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, x, y, alpha, red, green, blue Gr.bitmap.fill <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp> Gr.bitmap.drawinto.start <bitmap_ptr_nexp> Gr.bitmap.drawinto.end Paint Commands Gr.paint.copy {{<src_nexp>}{, <dst_nexp>}} Gr.paint.get <object_ptr_nvar> Gr.paint.reset {<nexp>} Rotate Commands Gr.rotate.start angle, x, y{,<obj_nvar>} Gr.rotate.end {<obj_nvar>} Camera Commands Gr.camera.select Gr.camera.shoot <bm_ptr_nvar> Gr.camera.autoshoot <bm_ptr_nvar>{, <flash_ mode_nexp> {, focus_mode_nexp} } Gr.camera.manualShoot <bm_ptr_nvar>{, <flash_ mode_nexp> {, focus_mode_nexp} } Other Graphics Commands Gr.screen.to_bitmap <bm_ptr_nvar> Gr.get.pixel x, y, alpha, red, green, blue Gr.save <filename_sexp> {,<quality_nexp>} Gr.get.type <object_ptr_nexp>, <type_svar> Gr.get.params <object_ptr_nexp>, <param_array$[]> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 19 De Re BASIC!

20 Gr.get.position <object_ptr_nexp>, x, y Gr.move <object_ptr_nexp> {{, dx}{, dy}} Gr.get.value <object_ptr_nexp> {, <tag_sexp>, <value_nvar value_svar>} Gr.modify <object_ptr_nexp> {, <tag_sexp>, <value_nexp value_sexp>} GR_COLLISION(<object_1_nexp>, <object_2_nexp>) Gr.clip <object_ptr_nexp>, <left_nexp>, <top_nexp>, <right_nexp>, <bottom_nexp>{, <RO_nexp>} Gr.newDL <dl_array[{<start>,<length>}]> Gr.getDL <dl_array[]> {, <keep_all_objects_lexp> } Audio Interface Introduction The Audio Interface Audio File Types Commands Audio.load <aft_nvar>, <filename_sexp> Audio.play <aft_nexp> Audio.stop Audio.pause Audio.loop Audio.volume <left_nexp>, <right_nexp> Audio.position.current <nvar> Audio.position.seek <nexp> Audio.length <length_nvar>, <aft_nexp> Audio.release <aft_nexp> Audio.isdone <lvar> Audio.record.start <fn_svar> Audio.record.stop SoundPool Introduction Commands Soundpool.open <MaxStreams_nexp> Soundpool.load <soundid_nvar>, <file_path_sexp> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 20 De Re BASIC!

21 Soundpool.unload <soundid_nexp> Soundpool.play <streamid_nvar>, <soundid_nexp>, <rightvolume_nexp>, <leftvolume_nexp>, <priority_nexp>, <loop_nexp>, <rate_nexp> Soundpool.setvolume <streamid_nexp>, <leftvolume_nexp>, <rightvolume_nexp> Soundpool.setrate <streamid_nexp>, <rate_nexp> Soundpool.setpriority <streamid_nexp>, <priority_nexp> Soundpool.pause <streamid_nexp> Soundpool.resume <streamid_nexp> Soundpool.stop <streamid_nexp> Soundpool.release GPS GPS Control commands Gps.open {{<status_nvar>},{<time_nexp>},{<distance_nexp>}} Gps.close Gps.status {{<status_var>}, {<infix_nvar>},{inview_nvar}, {<sat_list_nexp>}} GPS Location commands Gps.location {{<time_nvar>}, {<prov_svar>}, {<count_nvar}, {<acc_nvar>}, {<lat_nvar>}, {<long_nvar>}, {<alt_nvar>}, {<bear_nvar>}, {<speed_nvar>}} Gps.time <nvar> Gps.provider <svar> Gps.satellites {{<count_nvar>}, {<sat_list_nexp>}} Gps.accuracy <nvar> Gps.latitude <nvar> Gps.longitude <nvar> Gps.altitude <nvar> Gps.bearing <nvar> Gps.speed <nvar> Sensors Introduction Sensor Commands Sensors.list <sensor_array$[]> Sensors.open <type_nexp>{:<delay_nexp>}{, <type_nexp>{:<delay_nexp>},...} Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 21 De Re BASIC!

22 Sensors.read sensor_type_nexp, p1_nvar, p2_nvar, p3_nvar Sensors.close System System Commands System.open System.write <sexp> System.read.ready <nvar> System.read.line <svar> System.close Superuser Commands Su.open Su.write <sexp> Su.read.ready <nvar> Su.read.line <svar> Su.close App Commands App.broadcast <action_sexp>, <data_uri_sexp>, <package_sexp>, <component_sexp>, <mime_type_sexp>, <categories_sexp>, <extras_bptr_nexp>, <flags_nexp> App.start <action_sexp>, <data_uri_sexp>, <package_sexp>, <component_sexp>, <mime_type_sexp>, <categories_sexp>, <extras_bptr_nexp>, <flags_nexp> Appendix A Command List Appendix B Sample Programs Appendix C Launcher Shortcut Tutorial Introduction How to Make a Shortcut Application (older versions of Android prior to Android 4.0) How to Make a Shortcut Application (newer versions of Android Android 4.0 and later) What you need to know Appendix D Building a Standalone Application Introduction License Information Before You Start Setting Up the Development Environment Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 22 De Re BASIC!

23 Download the BASIC! Source Code from the GitHub Repository Download the BASIC! Source Code from the Legacy Archive Create a New Project in Eclipse Rename the Package In Eclipse Other IDEs Renaming complete Modifications to setup.xml Advanced Customization with setup.xml Files and Resources Testing the APK Installing a BASIC! Program into the Application Application Icons Modifications to the AndroidManifest.xml File Setting the Version Number and Version Name Permissions Disable the Shortcut Launcher Launch at device boot Preferences Finished Appendix E BASIC! Distribution License Apache Commons Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 23 De Re BASIC!

24 Changes in this Version Clarifications and additional explanations: o Labels may not start with keywords. Variable names may, but this is not recommended. o Clarified precedence of logical and arithmetic operators. o A file may be Included only once in a program. o OnMenuKey: does not work on many devices, because they have no MENU key. o More complete explanation of how BASIC! paths differ from Android paths. o Better explanation of Array.Copy. o Copied description of file modes from Byte.open to Text.open. o Clarification of what is copied by Byte.Copy. o In Appendix D, described file-handling commands that cannot read res or assets. Corrected errors: o The "\n" metacharacter is not CR/LF, it is just LF. o Fixed code sample for computed Goto. New BASIC! functions and commands: o Device.language and Device.locale o Program.info o Six new ZIP commands: count, dir, open, close, read, write. Other changes in BASIC!: o Expanded the About option of the Editor Menu. Includes a link to BASIC! s Privacy Policy as required for distribution on Google Play. o Added "ENCRYPT_RAW" and "DECRYPT_RAW" types to ENCODE$() and DECODE$(). o Most ENCODE$(), DECODE$(), ENCRYPT, and DECRYPT errors do not stop your program. Instead, they write an error message you can read with GETERROR$(). o Added flags to Wake.lock to control screen behavior when lock is acquired or released. o Audio.load can take a URL as well as a file name. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 24 De Re BASIC!

25 About the Title, De Re BASIC! "De Re" is Latin for "of the thing" or "about". About the Cover Art Thanks to BASIC! collaborator Nicolas Mougin. The images are screenshots from real BASIC! programs available from the Google Play store, or from the excellent collection of shared BASIC! programs available at You can find more information on the BASIC! user forum at Credits Thanks to Paul Laughton, the original creator of BASIC! and of this document. The first edition was published in Mr. Laughton placed this document in the Public Domain in Thanks also to Mike Leavitt of Lansdowne, VA, USA, for his many contributions and long-time support. Technical Editor The current editor of this manual monitors and the BASIC! user forum at for corrections and suggestions. Getting BASIC! You can get BASIC! for your Android device from the Google Play store. If you prefer to download the installation file (Basic.apk) yourself, or to get a previous version, get it from Bintray at This manual is also available from Bintray, in PDF format. BASIC! collaborator Nicolas Mougin keeps the manual in HTML format on his BASIC! website: The document source is available from GitHub at BASIC! Forum Join the community of BASIC! users at where you are always welcome. BASIC! Tutorial A BASIC! user, Nick Antonaccio, has written a very nice tutorial for BASIC! You can find it at Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 25 De Re BASIC!

26 BASIC! Operation Permissions This application requests many permissions, permissions such as sending and receiving SMS messages, making phone calls, record audio, etc. BASIC! does not exercise any of these permissions (except writing to the SD card) on its own. These permissions get exercised by the BASIC! programmer, you. You and only you. You exercise these permissions by means of the programs that you write. If you write a program that uses the sms.send command then BASIC! will attempt to send an SMS message. BASIC! must have permission to send SMS messages for this command to work. If you never use the sms.send command then BASIC! will never send an SMS message. You are in control. The source code for BASIC! is available from the BASIC! web site ( and the BASIC! GitHub repository ( Please feel free to examine this source code if you have any doubt about the use of these permissions. Editor Editing the Program The Editor is where BASIC! programs are written and edited. The operation of the Editor is fairly simple. Tap the screen at the point where you want to edit the program. A cursor will appear. Use the keyboard to edit at the cursor location. When the Enter key is tapped, the new line will automatically indent to the indent level of the previous line. This feature will not work if the Preference, "Editor AutoIndent," is not checked. This feature also may not work if you are using a software keyboard. If the program that you are editing has been given a name via Save or Load then that program name will be shown in the title bar. Some Android devices are shipped with "Settings/Developer Option/Destroy Activities" checked and/or "Settings/Energy/Quick Restart" checked. Both of these setting create problems with loading files into the Editor. It appears as if you have gone through the process of loading the file but nothing appears in the editor. The solution to the problem is to uncheck both of these options. Even better, completely turn off Developer Options unless you know that you have a legitimate development need. If your Android device does not have a physical keyboard, you will see a virtual keyboard. If you see the virtual keyboard, then you will see different things depending upon the way you are holding the device. If the device is in landscape mode then you will see a dialog box with a chunk of the program in a small text input area. You can scroll the small chunk of text up and down in this area but you will not be able to see very much of the program at any one time. It is probably best not to try to edit a program in landscape mode; hold your device in portrait mode while editing. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 26 De Re BASIC!

27 On some devices, if you do a long touch on the screen, a dialog box will appear. You can use the selections in the box for selecting, copying, cutting and pasting of text, among other things. Other devices have different procedures for invoking the cut and paste functions. Multiple Commands on a Line More than one BASIC! source code statement may be written on one physical line. Separate commands with a colon character ":". For example, the following line uses three separate commands to initialize some variables: name$="basic!" : ver=1.86 : array.load reviews$[], "Great!", "Wow!", "Fantastic!" Note: two commands, Sensors.open and SQL.update, use the colon as a sub-parameter separator. If you use multiple-command lines, be careful when using these two commands. Line Continuation A BASIC! source code statement may be written on more than one physical line using the line continuation character "~". If "~" is the last thing on a line, except for optional spaces, tabs, or a '%' comment, the line will be merged with the next line. This behavior is slightly different in the Array.load and List.add commands; see the descriptions of those commands for details. Note: this operation is implemented by a preprocessor that merges the source code lines with continuation characters before the source code is executed. If you have a syntax error in the merged line, it will show as one line in the error message, but it will still be multiple lines in the editor. Only the first physical line will be highlighted, regardless of which line the error is in. For example, the code line: s$ = "The quick brown fox " + verb$ + " over " + count$ + " lazy dogs" could be written as: s$ = "The quick brown fox " +~ verb$ + ~ % what the fox did " over " + ~ count$ + ~ % how many lazy dogs " lazy dogs" # - Format Line If a line has the # character at the end of the line, the keywords in that line will be capitalized and the # will be removed. This feature may not work if you are using a virtual keyboard. This feature will not work if the Preference option "Editor AutoIndent" is not checked. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 27 De Re BASIC!

28 Menus Press the MENU key or touch the Menu icon to access the following menus. On some versions of Android, you will not see all of the menu options. Instead, you will see the first five options and a More options. Select the More option to see all of the options listed. Run Run the current program. If the program has been changed since it was last saved, you will be given an opportunity to save the program before the run is started. If a run-time error occurs then the offending line will be shown as selected in the editor. Load Load a program file into the editor. The first time you open BASIC! after installing it, if you select Load it displays the sample programs in the directory rfo-basic/source/sample_programs. (See Paths Explained, later in this manual.) Otherwise, when you open BASIC! and select Load it starts in the default source directory rfo-basic/source. Program files must have the extension.bas. BASIC! checks to see if the current program in the Editor has been changed when Load is tapped. You will be offered the opportunity to save the program if it has been changed. If you choose to save the program, Load will restart after the save is done. The "BASIC! Load File" screen shows the path to your current directory followed by sorted lists of the subdirectories and program files in it. Directories are denoted by the (d) appended to the name. BASIC! programs are shown with the.bas extension. If there are files in the directory that do not have the.bas extension, they do not appear in the list. Tap on a.bas file to load it into the Editor. You can navigate to any directory on your device for which you have read permission. Tap on a directory to display its contents. Tap on the ".." at the top of list to move up one directory level. The tap has no effect if the current directory is the device root directory "/". You can exit the Load option without loading a program by tapping the BACK key. BASIC! remembers the path to the directory you are in when you load a program. Next time you select Load, it starts in that directory. If you select Save or Save and Run, the file is saved in the remembered directory (unless it is Sample_Programs). Save Saves the program currently in the editor. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 28 De Re BASIC!

29 A dialog box displays the path to the directory where you will save the file and an input area where you can enter the file name. If the current program has a name because it was previously loaded or saved then that name will be in the text input area. Type in the name you want the file saved as and tap OK. The extension.bas will be added to file name if is not already there. If you do not enter a file name, BASIC! uses a default filename, default.bas. BASIC! remembers the path to the directory you were in when you last loaded or saved a program. When you Save, the file name you type is saved in the remembered directory. If the name you type includes subdirectories, BASIC! remembers the new path. The name you type can include "../". Be careful if you are using a soft keyboard, as it may automatically insert spaces that you don t want. You cannot save programs in the sample program directory source/sample_programs. If you load a program from source/sample_programs, change it, and Save it, the program is saved in source. You can exit Save without saving a file by tapping the BACK key. Clear Clear the current program in the Editor. You will be offered the opportunity to save the current program if it has been changed. Search Search for strings in the program being edited. Found strings may be replaced with a different string. The Search view shows a Text Window with the text from the Editor, a Search For field and a Replace With field. If there is a block of text currently selected in the Editor, then that text will be placed into the Search For field. The initial location of the search cursor will be at the start of the text regardless of where the cursor was in the Editor text. Note: The search ignores case. For example, searching for "basic" will find "BASIC" This is because BASIC! converts the whole program to lower case (except characters within quotes) when the program is run. NEXT BUTTON Start the search for the string in the Search For field. The search is started at the current cursor location. If the string is found then it will be selected in Text Window. If the Done button is tapped at this point then the Editor will returned to with the found text selected. If the Replace button is tapped then the selected text will be replaced. Pressing the Next button again will start a new search starting at the end of the selected or replaced text. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 29 De Re BASIC!

30 If no matching text is found then a "string not found" message is shown. Tapping the Done button returns to the Editor with the cursor at the end of the program. Alternatively, you could change the Search For text and start a new search. REPLACE BUTTON If Next has found and selected some text then that text is replaced by the contents of the Replace With field. If no text has been found then the message, "Nothing found to replace" will be shown. REPLACE ALL BUTTON All occurrences of the Search For text are replaced with the Replace With text. Replace All always starts at the start of the text. The last replaced item will be shown selected in the Text Window. The number of items replaced will be shown in a message. DONE BUTTON Returns to the Editor with the changed text. If there is selected text in the Text Window then that text will be shown selected in the Editor. BACK KEY Returns to the Editor with the original text unchanged. All changes made during the Search will be undone. Think of the BACK key as UNDO ALL. Load and Run Selecting this option is exactly the same as first selecting Load and then selecting Run. The selected program is loaded into the Editor and is run immediately. Save and Run Selecting this option is a fast way to save and then run. Any changes you have made are saved, overwriting your file, and your program is run immediately. A brief popup notifies you that your file has been changed. If the program you are editing has no name (not previously loaded or saved), the Editor will ask you what name to use. Format Format the program currently in the Editor. The keywords are capitalized. Program lines are indented as appropriate for the program structure. Left- and right-double quotation marks ( and ) are replaced by simple ASCII quotation marks ("). When copying program text from the Forum or another web site, "non-breaking space" characters, designated &nbsp in HTML, may be inserted into the program text. Except when they are enclosed in quoted strings, Format converts these characters to simple ASCII spaces. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 30 De Re BASIC!

31 Delete Delete files and directories. The command should be used for maintaining files and directories that are used in BASIC! but it can also be used to delete any file or directory on the SD card for which you have the required permissions. Delete starts in the rfo-basic directory. Tapping Delete presents the "BASIC! Delete File" screen. The screen shows the path to your current directory followed by sorted lists of the directories and files in it. Directories are marked with (d) appended to the name and appear at the top of the list. Tapping a file name displays the "Confirm Delete" dialog box. Tap the Delete button to delete the file. Tap the No button to dismiss the dialog box and not delete the file. Tapping a directory name displays the contents of the directory. If the directory is empty the "Confirm Delete" dialog box is shown. Tap the Delete button to delete the directory. Tap the No button to dismiss the dialog box and not delete the directory. Tap the ".." at the top of the screen to move up one directory level. Tapping the ".." has no effect if you are in the root directory "/". Exit Delete by tapping the BACK key. Preferences SCREEN COLORS Opens a sub-menu with options for setting the colors of the various screens in BASIC! COLOR SCHEME Sets the color scheme of the screens. The schemes are identified by their appearance with the default colors. Choose Black text on a White background, White text on a Black background or White text on a Blue background. CUSTOM COLORS Check the box to override the Color Scheme setting, allowing you to set your own colors. You can set the Text (foreground) Color, the Background Color, the Line Color, and the Highlight Color. Each color is specified as a single number with 16 hexadecimal digits: four fields of four digits each for Alpha (opacity), Red, Green, and Blue components. CONSOLE SETTINGS Opens a sub-menu with options for settings of the Console and various others screens in BASIC! FONT SIZE Sets the font size (Small, Medium, or Large) to be used with the various screens in BASIC!. TYPEFACE Choose the typeface to be used on the Output Console and some other screens: Monospace, Sans Serif, or Serif. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 31 De Re BASIC!

32 CONSOLE MENU Check the box if the Menu should be visible in the Output Console and TGet screen. CONSOLE LINES Check the box if the text lines in the Output Console should be underlined. EMPTY CONSOLE COLOR Choose the background color of the part of the Output Console that has not yet been written. It can match the background color of the text or the color of the lines separating text lines. This setting also applies to the Select (but not Dialog.select) command. EDITOR SETTINGS Opens a sub-menu with options for setting properties and features of the Program Editor. EDITOR LINES Check the box if the text lines in the Editor should be underlined. EDITOR LINE WRAP Check the box if long text lines in the Editor should wrap at the edge of the screen. If unchecked, long lines are not wrapped, and the Editor screen may be scrolled horizontally. EDITOR AUTOINDENT Check the box if you want the Editor to do auto indentation. Enabling auto indentation also enables the formatting of a line that ends with the "#" character. Some devices are not able to do auto indenting properly. In some of those devices the AutoIndent feature may cause the Editor to be unusable. If that happens, turn off AutoIndent. MENU ITEMS ON ACTION BAR Opens a sub-menu with options for moving some of the Editor menu items to the Action Bar, if there is room for them there. You can select as many as you like, but the number of items moved depends on the device and orientation. These options have no effect on Android devices before Honeycomb (3.0). RUN ON ACTION BAR If checked, the Editor will attempt to move the RUN item from the Menu to the Action Bar. LOAD ON ACTION BAR If checked, the Editor will attempt to move the LOAD item from the Menu to the Action Bar. SAVE ON ACTION BAR If checked, the Editor will attempt to move the SAVE item from the Menu to the Action Bar. EXIT ON ACTION BAR If checked, the Editor will attempt to move the EXIT item from the Menu to the Action Bar. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 32 De Re BASIC!

33 SCREEN ORIENTATION Choose to allow the Sensors to determine the orientation of the screens or to set a fixed orientation without regard to the Sensors. Note: The reverse orientations apply to Android 2.3 or newer. GRAPHIC ACCELERATION Check this box to enable GPU-assisted graphics acceleration on devices since 3.0 (Honeycomb) that support it. It is disabled by default. If you enable this option, test your program carefully. Hardware acceleration can make some of BASIC! s graphical operations fail. BASE DRIVE Some Android devices have several external storage devices (and some have no physical external storage devices). BASIC! will use the system-suggested device as its base drive. The base drive is the device where the BASIC! "rfo-basic" directory (base directory) is located. The base directory is where BASIC! s programs and data are stored. (See "Working with Files", later in this manual.) If your device does have more than one external storage device they will be listed here. If your device has no external storage devices, your one and only choice will be "No external storage". Tap the device you want to use as the base drive and press the BACK key. You will then be given the choice of either immediately restarting BASIC! with the new base drive or waiting and doing the restart yourself. In this manual, <pref base drive> means the base drive you selected when you set the Base Drive here. Note: If you have created a Launcher Shortcut (see Appendix C) with files in one base directory but try to execute that shortcut while using a different base directory, the shortcut will fail to execute. Commands The Commands command presents the list of the BASIC! commands and functions as copied from Appendix A of this document. Tapping an alpha key will cause the command list to scroll to commands that start with that character. There will be no scrolling if there is no command that starts with that character. Note: You can hide the virtual keyboard with the BACK key. If you do that, you will not be able to get it back until you invoke the Commands option again. Tapping on a particular command causes that command to be copied to the clipboard (not including the page number) and returning to the Editor. You can then paste the command into your BASIC! program. About The About option displays the version of BASIC! that you are using, followed by a set of buttons that connect you to various websites with information about BASIC!. Make sure that you have a connection to the Internet before selecting one of the About buttons. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 33 De Re BASIC!

34 BASIC! HOME PAGE Opens the BASIC! home page, BASIC! USER FORUM Opens the BASIC! user forum site, BASIC! USERS PROGRAMS Opens a repository of BASIC! programs written by members of the BASIC! user forum, hosted by the founder of BASIC, Paul Laughton. The programs are found at BASIC! ON BINTRAY Opens the BASIC! page of the binary hosting site Bintray, BASIC. At this site, you can download this manual in PDF format and the Android installable (.apk file). Both are available for recent versions of BASIC!. You can also read the release notes for each version. BASIC! ON GITHUB Opens the BASIC! page of the software development site GitHub, At this site you can download the source for every version of BASIC! since v You can also download the "source" for this manual, as a Microsoft Word document, for each version. BASIC! OPEN-SOURCE LICENSE Displays the GPLv3 license under which BASIC! is distributed. This copy of the license is hosted at This license is reproduced in Appendix E of this manual. BASIC! PRIVACY POLICY Displays the BASIC! Privacy Policy. Installing BASIC! requires several Android permissions, some of which Google considers sensitive. The BASIC! program interpreter does not use any of these permissions. Except for limited use by the Editor, these permissions are requested only to enable your BASIC! programs to use the full power of the Android platform. This is explained in the Privacy Policy, which is hosted at Exit The only way to cleanly exit BASIC! is to use the Exit option. Pressing the HOME key while in BASIC! leaves BASIC! in exactly the same state it was in when the HOME key was tapped. If a program was running, it will still be running when BASIC! is re-entered. If you were in the process of deleting, the Delete screen will be shown when BASIC! is re-entered. Run Selecting Run from the Editor s menu starts the program running. However, if the source in the Editor has been changed, then the Save dialog will be displayed. You may choose to save the changed source or continue without saving. The BASIC! Output Console will be presented as soon as the program starts to run. You will not see anything on this screen unless one of the following situations occur: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 34 De Re BASIC!

35 the program prints something the END statement is executed you are in Echo mode there is a run-time error If the program does not print anything then the only indication you would get that the program has finished is if the program ends with an End statement. If the program does not contain any executable statements then the message, "Nothing to execute" will be displayed. Tapping the BACK key will stop a running program. Tapping the BACK key when the program run has ended will restart the Editor. If the program ended with a run-time error, the line where the error occurred will be shown selected in the Editor. If the error occurred in an INCLUDE file then the INCLUDE statement will be shown selected. The Editor cursor will remain where it was when the Run was started if no run-time error occurred. Menu Pressing the MENU key or touching the Menu icon while a program is running or after the program is stopped will cause the Run Menu to be displayed. (Except when Graphics is running. See the Graphics section for details.) Stop If a program is running, the Stop menu item will be enabled. Tapping Stop will stop the running program. Stop will not be enabled if a program is not running. Editor Editor will not be enabled if a program is running. If the program has stopped and Editor is thus enabled then selecting Editor will cause the Editor to be re-entered. You could also use the BACK key to do this. Crashes BASIC! is a very large and complex program that is constantly under development. From time to time, it will crash. The best way to report a crash is to visit the BASIC! forum. A BASIC! Program A BASIC! program is made up of lines of text. With a few exceptions that will be explained later, each line of text is one or more statements. If a line has more than one statement they are separated by colon (":") characters. A statement always consists of a single command, usually followed by one or more parameters that are separated by commas. Here is a simple BASIC! program: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 35 De Re BASIC!

36 PRINT "Hello, World!" This program has one statement. The command is PRINT. It has one parameter, the string constant "Hello, World!". (A string constant, or string literal, is a set of characters enclosed in double quotation marks. This, too, will be explained later.) If you start the BASIC! app, so you are in the Editor, you can type in this one-line program. Then you can select Run from the Editor s menu. BASIC! will run your program. When the program is done running, you see the Console, BASIC! s, output screen, with Hello, World! printed at the top. Command Description Syntax Upper and Lower Case Commands are described using both upper and lower case for ease of reading. BASIC! converts every character (except those between double quotation marks) to lower case when the program is run. <nexp>, <sexp> and <lexp> These notations denote a numeric expression (<nexp>), a string expression (<sexp>), and a logical expression (<lexp>). An expression can be a variable, a number, a quoted string or a full expression such as (a*x^2 + bx + c). <nvar>, <svar> and <lvar> This notation is used when a variable, not an expression, must be used in the command. Arrays with indices (such as n[1,2] or s$[3,4]) are considered to be the same as <nvar>, <svar> and <lvar>. Array[] and Array$[] This notation implies that an array name without indices must be used. Array[{<start>,<length>}] and Array$[{<start>,<length>}] In most contexts, numeric expressions inside the brackets are indices specifying a single array element. In some commands, a pair of numeric expressions specifies a segment of the array. Both the start index and length are numeric expressions, and both are optional. This notation is shorthand for: Array [ { {<start_nexp>} {, <length_nexp>} } ] Array$ [ { {<start_nexp>} {, <length_nexp>} } ] {something} Indicates something optional. { A B C } This notation suggests that a choice of either A, B, or C, must be made. For example: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 36 De Re BASIC!

37 Text.open {r w a}, fn Indicate that either "r" or "w" or "a" must be chosen: X,... Text.open r, fn Text.open w, fn Text.open a, fn Indicates a variable-sized list of items separated by commas. At least one item is required. {,n}... Indicates an optional list with zero or more items separated by commas. <statement> Indicate an executable BASIC! statement. A <statement> is usually a line of code but may occur within other commands such as: IF <lexp> THEN <statement>. Optional Parameters Many statements have optional parameters. If an optional parameter is omitted, the statement assumes a default value or performs a default action. If an optional parameter is omitted, use a comma to mark its place, so following parameters are handled correctly. However, if there are no following parameters, omit the comma, too. With a few special exceptions (like Print), no statement can end with a comma. Numbers You can type decimal numbers in a BASIC! program: A leading sign ("+" or "-"), a decimal point ("." only), and an exponent (power of 10) are optional. An exponent is "e" or "E" followed by a number. The number may have a sign but no decimal point. If you use a decimal point, it MUST follow a digit is a valid number, but.15 is a syntax error. Numbers in BASIC! are double-precision floating point (64-bit IEEE 754). This means: A printed number will always have decimal point. For example, 99 will print as "99.0".You can print numbers without decimal points by using the INT$() or FORMAT$() functions. For example, either INT$(99) or FORMAT$("##", 99) will print "99". A number with more than 7 significant digits will be printed in floating point format. For example, the number will be printed as E7. INT$() or FORMAT$() can be used to print large numbers in other than floating point format. Mathematical operations on decimal values are imprecise. If you are working with currency you should multiply the number by 100 until you need to print it out. When you print it, divide by 100. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 37 De Re BASIC!

38 A logical value (false = 0, true <> 0) is a kind of number. You can use string functions to convert numbers to strings. STR$(), INT$(), HEX$() and a few others do simple conversions. FORMAT$() and USING$() can do more complex formatting. For the purposes of this documentation, numbers that appear in a BASIC! program are called Numeric Constants. Strings Strings in BASIC! are written as any set of characters enclosed in quote (") characters. The quote characters are not part of the string. For example, "This is a string" is a string of 16 characters. To include the quote character in a string, you must escape it with a backslash: \". For example: Print "His name is \"Jimbo\" Jim Giudice." prints: His name is "Jimbo" Jim Giudice. Newline characters may be inserted into a string with the escape sequence \n: prints: Print "Jim\nGiudice" Jim Giudice "\n" can mean different things on different systems. In BASIC!, it is the same as an ASCII LF (line feed) character. You can use another escape sequence, \t, to put a TAB character into a string. To embed a backslash, escape it with another backslash: \\. Other special characters can be inserted using the CHR$() function. Strings with numerical characters can be converted to BASIC! numbers using the VAL(<sexp>) function. For the purposes of this documentation, strings that appear within a BASIC! program are called String Constants. Variables A BASIC! variable is a container for some numeric or string value. Variable Names Variable names must start with the characters "a" through "z", "#", "@", or "_". The remaining characters in the variable name may also include the digits, "0" through "9". A variable name may be as long as needed. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 38 De Re BASIC!

39 Upper case characters can be used in variable names but they will be converted to lower case characters when the program is run. The variable name "glop" is the same as the name "glop" to BASIC! You should avoid using variable names that start with BASIC! command keywords. Such variables are valid under most conditions, as will be explained later in ths manual, but their use may cause confusion or errors. For example, Donut = 5 is interpreted as Do Nut=5. BASIC! thus expects this Do statement to be followed by an Until statement somewhere before the program ends. A list of BASIC! commands can be found in Appendix A. See also the Let command and the Expressions Parentheses section. BASIC! statement labels and the names of user-defined functions, both described later in this manual, follow the same naming rules as BASIC! variables. Variable Types There are two types of variables: Variables that hold numbers and variables that hold strings. Variables that hold strings end with the character "$". Variables that hold numbers do not end in "$". Age, amount and height are all numeric variable names. First_Name$, Street$ and A$ are all string variable names. If you use a numeric variable without assigning it a value, it has the value 0.0. If you use a string variable without assigning it a value, its value is the empty string, "". Scalar and Array Variables There are two classes of variables: Scalars and Arrays. Scalars A scalar is a variable that can hold only one value. When a scalar is created it is assigned a default value. Numeric scalars are initialized to 0.0. String scalars are initialized to an empty, zero-length string, "". You create a scalar variable just by using its name. You do not need to predeclare scalars. Arrays An array is variable that can hold many values organized in a systematically arranged way. The simplest array is the linear array. It can be thought of as a list of values. The array A[index] is a linear array. It can hold values that can accessed as A[1], A[2],...,A[n]. The number (variable or constant) inside the square brackets is called the index. If you wanted to keep a list of ten animals, you could use an array called Animals$[] that can be accessed with an index of 1 to 10. For example: Animals$[5] = "Cat" Arrays can have more than one index or dimension. An array with two dimensions can be thought of as a list of lists. Let s assume that we wanted to assign a list of three traits to every animal in the list of animals. Such a list for a "Cat" might be "Purrs", "Has four legs" and "Has Tail". We could set up the Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 39 De Re BASIC!

40 Traits array to have two dimensions such that Traits$[5,2] = "Has four legs". If someone asked what are the traits of cat, search Animals$[index] until "Cat" is found at index =5. Index=5 can then be used to access Traits[index,[ {1 2 3}]. BASIC! arrays can have any number of dimensions of any size. BASIC! arrays are "one-based". This means that the first element of an array has an index of "1". Attempting to access an array with an index of "0" (or less than 0) will generate a run-time error. Before an array can be used, it must be dimensioned using the DIM command. The DIM command tells BASIC! how many indices are going to be used and the sizes of the indices. Some BASIC! Commands automatically create a one-dimensional array. Auto-dimensioned array details will be seen in the description of those commands. Note: It is recommended that the List commands (see below) be used in place of one-dimensional arrays. The List commands provide more versatility than the Array commands. Array Segments Some BASIC! Commands take an array as an input parameter. If the array is specified with nothing in the brackets (for example, "Animals$[]"), then the command reads the entire array. Most of these commands allow you to limit their operation to a segment of the array, using the notation "Array[start, length]", where both "start" and "length" are numeric expressions. For example, you can write "Animals$[2,3]". Usually that means "the animal at row 2 and column 3 of a two dimensional array called Animals$". When used to specify an array segment, it has a different meaning: "read only the segment of the Animals$ array that starts at index 2 and includes 3 items". Notice that this notation applies only to one-dimensional arrays. In fact, it treats all arrays as onedimensional, regardless of how they are declared. Both of the expressions in the "[start, length]" pair are optional. If the "start" value is omitted, the default starting index is 1. If the "length" value is omitted, the default is the length from the starting index to the end of the array. If both are omitted, the default is to use the entire array. Array Commands These commands all operate on Arrays. Commands operate on both numeric and string arrays, unless otherwise indicated. Dim Array[<nexp>{, <nexp> }... ] {, Array[<nexp>{, <nexp> }... ] }... The Dim command tells BASIC! how many dimensions an array will have and how big those dimensions are. BASIC! creates the array, reserving and initializing memory for the array data. All elements of a numeric array are initialized to the value 0.0. String array elements are initialized to the empty string, "". If you Dim an array that already exists, the existing array is destroyed and a new one created. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 40 De Re BASIC!

41 Multiple arrays can be dimensioned with one Dim statement. String and numeric arrays can be dimensioned in a single Dim command. Examples: DIM A[15] DIM B$[2,6,8], C[3,1,7,3], D[8] UnDim Array[]{, Array[] }... Un-dimensions an array. The array is destroyed, releasing all of the memory it used. Multiple arrays can be destroyed with one UnDim statement. Each Array[] is specified without any index. This command is exactly the same as Array.delete. Array.average <Average_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}] Finds the average of the values in a numeric array (Array[]) or array segment (Array[start,length]), and places the result into <Average_nvar>. Array.copy SourceArray[{<start>,<length>}], DestinationArray[{{-}<start_or_extras>}] Copies elements of an existing SourceArray[] to the DestinationArray[]. If the Destination Array exists, some or all of the existing array is overwritten. If the Destination Array does not exist, a new array is created. The arrays may be either numeric or string arrays but they must both be of the same type. You may copy an entire array (SourceArray[]) or an array segment (SourceArray[<start>,<length>]). Copying stops without error if it reaches the end of either the SourceArray or the DestinationArray. If <start> is < 1 it is set to 1, the first element of the SourceArray. If <length> is < 0 it is set to 0. If the Destination Array already exists, the optional <start_or_extras> parameter specifies where to start copying into the Destination Array. If the Destination Array does not exist, the optional <start_or_extras> parameter specifies how many extra elements to add to the copy. If the parameter is a negative number, these elements are added to the start of the array, otherwise they are added to end of the array. The extra elements for a new numeric array are initialized to zero. The extra elements for a new string array are initialized to the empty string, "". See the Sample Program file, f26_array_copy.bas, for working examples of this command. Array.delete Array[]{, Array[]}... Does the same thing as UnDim Array[]. Array.dims Source[]{, {Dims[]}{, NumDims}} Provides information about the dimensions of the Source[] array parameter. The Source[] parameter may be a numeric or string array name with nothing in the brackets ("[]"). The array must already exist. The Source[] parameter is required, and both of the other parameters are optional. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 41 De Re BASIC!

42 The dimensions of the Source[] array are written to the Dims[] array, if you provide one. The Dims[] parameter must be a numeric array name with nothing in the brackets ("[]"). If the Dims[] array exists, it is overwritten. Otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a one-dimensional array. The number of dimensions of the Source[] array is written to the NumDims parameter, if you provide one. NumDims must be a numeric variable. This value is the length of the Dims[] array. Array.fill Array[{<start>,<length>}], <exp> Fills an existing array or array segment with a value. The types of the array and value must match. Array.length <length_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}] Places the number of elements in an entire array (Array[] or Array$[]) or an array segment (Array[start,length] or Array$[start,length]) into <Length_nvar>. Array.load Array[], <exp>,... Creates a new array, evaluates the list of expressions "<exp>,...", and loads values into the new array. Specify the array name with no index(es). The array has one dimension; its size is the same as the number of expressions in the list. If the named array already exists, it is overwritten. The array may be numeric (Array[]) or string (Array$[]), and the expressions must be the same type as the array. The list of expressions may be continued onto the next line by ending the line with the "~" character. The "~" character may be used between <exp> parameters, where a comma would normally appear. The "~" itself separates the parameters; the comma is optional. The "~" character may not be used to split a parameter across multiple lines. Examples: Array.load Numbers[], 2, 4, 8, n^2, 32 Array.load Hours[], 3, 4,7,0, 99, 3, 66~ % comma not required before ~ 37, 66, 43, 83,~ % comma is allowed before ~ 83, n*5, q/2 +j Array.load Letters$[], "a", "b","c",d$,"e" Array.max <Max_nvar> Array[{<start>,<length>}] Finds the maximum value in a numeric array (Array[]) or array segment (Array[start,length]), and places the result into the numeric variable <max_nvar>. Array.min <Min_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}] Finds the minimum value in a numeric array (Array[]) or array segment (Array[start,length]), and places the result into the numeric variable <min_nvar>. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 42 De Re BASIC!

43 Array.reverse Array[{<start>,<length>}] Reverses the order of values in a numeric or string array (Array[] or Array$[]) or array segement (Array[start,length] or Array$[start,length]). Array.search Array[{<start>,<length>}], <value_exp>, <result_nvar>{,<start_nexp>} Searches in the numeric or string array (Array[] or Array$[]) or array segment (Array[start,length] or Array$[start,length]) for the specified numeric or string value, which may be an expression. If the value is found in the array, its position will be returned in the result numeric variable <result_nvar>. If the value is not found the result will be zero. If the optional start expression parameter is present, the search will start at the specified element. The default value is 1. Array.shuffle Array[{<start>,<length>}]} Randomly shuffles the values of the specified array (Array[] or Array$[]) or array segment (Array[start,length] or Array$[start,length]). Array.sort Array[{<start>,<length>}]} Sorts the values of the specified array (Array[] or Array$[]) or array segment (Array[start,length] or Array$[start,length]) in ascending order. Array.std_dev <sd_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}]} Finds the standard deviation of the values in a numeric array (Array[]) or array segment (Array[start,length]), and places the result into the numeric variable <sd_nvar>. Array.sum <sum_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}] Finds the sum of the values in a numeric array (Array[]) or array segment (Array[start,length]), and then places the result into the numeric variable <sum_nvar>. Array.variance <v_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}] Finds the variance of the values in a numeric array (Array[]) or array segment (Array[start,length]), and places the result into the numeric variable <v_nvar>. Data Structures and Pointers in BASIC! BASIC! offers commands that facilitate working with Data Structures in ways that are not possible with traditional Basic implementations. These commands provide for the implementation of Lists, Bundles, Stacks and Queues. What is a Pointer The central concept behind the implementation of these commands (and many other BASIC! commands) is the pointer. A pointer is a numeric value that is an index into a list or table of things. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 43 De Re BASIC!

44 Do not confuse the pointer with the thing it points to. A pointer to a List is not a List; a pointer to a bitmap is not a bitmap. A pointer is just a number that represents something else. As an example of pointers think of a file cabinet drawer with folders in it. That file cabinet is maintained by your administrative assistant. You never see the file drawer itself. In the course of your work you will create a new folder into which you put some information. You then give the folder to your assistant to be place into the drawer. The assistant puts a unique number on the folder and gives you a slip of paper with that unique number on it. You can later retrieve that folder by asking your assistant to bring you the folder with that particular number on it. In BASIC! you create an information object (folder). You then give that information object to BASIC! to put into a virtual drawer. BASIC! will give you a unique number a pointer for that information object. You then use that pointer to retrieve that particular information object. Continuing with the folder analogy, let s assume that you have folders that contain information about customers. This information could be things such as name, address and phone number. The number that your assistant will give you when filing the folder will become the customer s customer number. You can retrieve this information about any customer by asking the assistant to bring you the folder with the unique customer number. In BASIC! you would use a Bundle to create that customer information object (folder). The pointer that BASIC! returns when you create the customer Bundle becomes the customer number. Now let s assume that a customer orders something. You will want to create a Bundle that contains all the order information. Such bundles are used by the order fulfillment department, the billing department and perhaps even the marketing department (to SPAM the customer about similar products). Each Bundle could contain the item ordered, the price, etc. The Bundle will also need to contain information about the customer. Rather than replicate the customer information you will just create a customer number field that contains the customer number (pointer). The pointer that gets returned when you create the order bundle becomes the Order Number. You can create different lists of bundles for use by different departments. It would also be nice to have a list of all orders made by a customer in the customer Bundle. You would do this by creating a List of all order numbers for that customer. When you create the customer bundle, you would ask BASIC! to create an empty List. BASIC! will return a pointer to this empty List. You would then place this pointer into the customer record. Later when the customer places an order, you will retrieve that list pointer and add the order number to the List. You may also want to create several other Lists of order Bundles for other purposes. You may, for example, have one List of orders to be filled, another List of filled orders, another List of returned orders, another List for billing, etc. All of these Lists would simply be lists of order numbers. Each order number would point to the order Bundle which would point to the Customer Bundle. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 44 De Re BASIC!

45 If you were to actually create such a database in BASIC!, you would probably want to save all these Bundles and Lists onto external storage. Getting that information from the internal data structures to external storage is an exercise left to the user for now. There are things besides List, Bundle, and Stack data structures that are accessed through pointers. These include bitmaps and graphical objects, described below in the Graphics section, audio clips, described in SoundPool, and other things. Lists A List is similar to a single-dimension array. The difference is in the way a List is built and used. An array must be dimensioned before being used. The number of elements to be placed in the array must be predetermined. A List starts out empty and grows as needed. Elements can be removed, replaced and inserted anywhere within the list. There is no fixed limit on the size or number of lists. You are limited only by the memory of your device. Another important difference is that a List is not a variable type. A numeric pointer is returned when a list is created. All further access to the List is by means of that numeric pointer. One implication of this is that it is easy to make a List of Lists. A List of Lists is nothing more than a numeric list containing numeric pointers to other lists. Lists may be copied into new Arrays. Arrays may be added to Lists. All of the List commands are demonstrated in the Sample Program file, f27_list.bas. List Commands List.create N S, <pointer_nvar> Creates a new, empty list of the type specified by the N or S parameter. A list of strings will be created if the parameter is S. A list of numbers will be created if the parameter is N. Do not put quotation marks around the N or S. The pointer to the new list will be returned in the <pointer_nvar> variable. The newly created list is empty. The size returned for a newly created list is zero. List.add <pointer_nexp>{, <exp>}... Adds the values of the expressions <exp>... to specified list. The expressions must all be the same type (numeric or string) as the list. The list of <exp>s may be continued onto the next line by ending the line with the "~" character. The "~" character may be used between <exp> parameters, where a comma would normally appear. The "~" itself separates the parameters; the comma is optional. The "~" character may not be used to split a parameter across multiple lines. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 45 De Re BASIC!

46 Examples: List.add Nlist, 2, 4, 8, n^2, 32 List.add Hours, 3, 4,7,0, 99, 3, 66~ % comma not required before ~ 37, 66, 43, 83,~ % comma is allowed before ~ 83, n*5, q/2 +j List.add Name~ "Bill", "Jones"~ "James", "Barnes"~ "Jill", "Hanson" List.add.list <destination_list_pointer_nexp>, <source_list_pointer_nexp> Appends the elements in the source list to the end of the destination list. The two lists must be of the same type (string or numeric). List.add.array <list_pointer_nexp>, Array[{<start>,<length>}] Appends the elements of the specified array (Array[]) or array segment (Array[start,length]) to the end of the specified list. The Array type must be the same as the list type (string or numeric). List.replace <pointer_nexp>, <index_nexp>, <sexp> <nexp> The List element specified by <index_nexp> in the list pointed to by <pointer_nexp> is replaced by the value of the string or numeric expression. The index is one-based. The first element of the list is 1. The replacement expression type (string or numeric) must match the list type. List.insert <pointer_nexp>, <index_nexp>, <sexp> <nexp> Inserts the <sexp> or <nexp> value into the list pointed to by <pointer_nexp> at the index point <index_nexp>. If the index point is one more than the current size of the list, the new item is added at the end of the list. The index is ones based. The first element of the list is 1. The inserted element type must match the list type (string or numeric). List.remove <pointer_nexp>,<index_nexp> Removes the list element specified by <index_nexp> from the list pointed to by <pointer_nexp>. The index is ones based. The first element of the list is 1. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 46 De Re BASIC!

47 List.get <pointer_nexp>, <index_nexp>, <var> The list element specified by <index_nexp> in the list pointed to by <pointer_nexp> is returned in the specified string or numeric variable <var>. The index is one-based. The first element of the list is 1. The return element variable type must match the list type (string or numeric). List.type <pointer_nexp>, <svar> The type of list pointed to by the list pointer is returned in the string variable <svar>. Returns the upper case character "S" if the list is a list of strings. Returns the upper case character "N" if the list is a list of numbers. List.size <pointer_nexp>, <nvar> The size of the list pointed to by the list pointer is returned in the numeric variable <nvar>. List.clear <pointer_nexp> Clears the list pointed to by the list pointer and sets the list s size to zero. List.search <pointer_nexp>, value value$, <result_nvar>{,<start_nexp>} Searches the specified list for the specified string or numeric value. The position of the first (left-most) occurrence is returned in the numeric variable <result_nvar>. If the value is not found in the list then the result is zero. If the optional start expression parameter is present, the search starts at the specified element. The default start position is 1. List.toArray <pointer_nexp>, Array$[] Array[] Copies the list pointed to by the list pointer into an array. The array type (string or numeric) must be the same as the list type. If the array exists, it is overwritten, otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a one-dimensional array. Bundles A Bundle is a group of values collected together into a single object. A bundle object may contain any number of string and numeric values. There is no fixed limit on the size or number of bundles. You are limited only by the memory of your device. The values are set and accessed by keys. A key is string that identifies the value. For example, a bundle might contain a person s first name and last name. The keys for accessing those name strings could be "first_name" and "last_name". An age numeric value could also be placed in the Bundle using an "age" key. A new, empty bundle is created by using the Bundle.create command. The command returns a pointer to the empty bundle. Because the bundle is represented by a pointer, bundles can be placed in lists and Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 47 De Re BASIC!

48 arrays. Bundles can also be contained in other bundles. This means that the combination of lists and bundles can be used to create arbitrarily complex data structures. After a bundle is created, keys and values can be added to the bundle using the Bundle.put command. Those values can be retrieved using the keys in the Bundle.get command. There are other bundle commands to facilitate the use of bundles. Bundle Auto-Create Every bundle command except Bundle.create has a parameter, the <pointer_nexp>, which can point to a bundle. If the expression value points to a bundle, the existing bundle is used. If it does not, and the expression consists only of a single numeric variable, then a new, empty bundle is created, and the variable value is set to point to the new bundle. That may seem complex, but it isn't, really. If there is a bundle, use it. If there is not, try to create a new one but BASIC! can't create a new bundle if you don't give it a variable name. BASIC! uses the variable to tell you how to find the new bundle. BUNDLE.PUT b,"key1", 1.2 BUNDLE.PUT 10, key2$, value2 BUNDLE.REMOVE c + d, key$[3], % try to put a value in the bundle pointed to by b % try to put a value in the 10th bundle created % try to remove a key/value pair from a bundle % pointed to by c + d In the first example, if the value of b points to a bundle, the Bundle.put puts "key1" and the value 1.2 into that bundle. If b is a new variable, its value is 0.0, so it does not point to a bundle. In that case, the Bundle.put creates a new bundle, puts "key1" and the value 1.2 into the new bundle, and sets b to point to the new bundle. In the second example, if there are at least ten bundles, then the Bundle.put tries to put the key named in the variable key2$ and the value of the variable value2 into bundle 10. If there is no bundle 10, then the command does nothing. It can't create a new variable because you did not provide a variable to return the bundle pointer. In the third example, the bundle pointer is the value of the expression c + d. If there is no such bundle, the command does nothing. To create a new bundle, the bundle pointer expression must be a single numeric variable. Bundle Commands Bundle.create <pointer_nvar> A new, empty bundle is created. The bundle pointer is returned in <pointer_nvar>. Example: BUNDLE.CREATE bptr Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 48 De Re BASIC!

49 Bundle.put <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <value_nexp> <value_sexp> The value expression will be placed into the specified bundle using the specified key. If the bundle does not exist, a new one may be created. The type of the value will be determined by the type of the value expression. Example: BUNDLE.PUT bptr, "first_name", "Frank" BUNDLE.PUT bptr,"age", 44 Bundle.get <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <nvar> <svar> Places the value specified by the key string expression into the specified numeric or string variable. The type (string or numeric) of the destination variable must match the type stored with the key. If the bundle does not exist or does not contain the requested key, the command generates a run-time error. Example: BUNDLE.GET bptr,"first_name", first_name$ BUNDLE.GET bptr,"age", age Bundle.keys <bundle_ptr_nexp>, <list_ptr_nexp> Returns a list of the keys currently in the specified bundle. The bundle pointer parameter <bundle_ptr_nexp> specifies the bundle from which to get the keys. If the bundle does not exist, a new one may be created. The list pointer parameter <list_ptr_next> specifies the list into which to write the keys. The previous contents of the list are discarded. If the parameter does not specify a valid string list to reuse, and the parameter is a string variable, a new list is created and a pointer to the list is written to the variable. The key names in the returned list may be extracted using the various list commands. Example: BUNDLE.KEYS bptr, list LIST.SIZE list, size FOR i = 1 TO size LIST.GET list, i, key$ BUNDLE.TYPE bptr, key$, type$ IF type$ = "S" BUNDLE.GET bptr, key$, value$ PRINT key$, value$ ELSE BUNDLE.GET bptr, key$, value PRINT key$, value ENDIF NEXT i Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 49 De Re BASIC!

50 Bundle.contain <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <contains_nvar> If the key specified in the key string expression is contained in the bundle's keys then the "contains" numeric variable will be returned with a non-zero value. The value returned will be zero if the key is not in the bundle. If the bundle does not exist, a new one may be created. Bundle.type <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <type_svar> Returns the value type (string or numeric) of the specified key in the specified string variable. The <type_svar> will contain an uppercase "N" if the type is numeric. The <type_svar> will contain an uppercase "S" if the type is a string. If the bundle does not exist or does not contain the requested key, the command generates a run-time error. Example: BUNDLE.TYPE bptr, "age", type$ PRINT type$ % will print N Bundle.remove <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp> Removes the key named by the string expression <key_sexp>, along with the associated value, from the bundle pointed to by the numeric expression <pointer_nexp>. If the bundle does not contain the key, nothing happens. If the bundle does not exist, a new one may be created. Bundle.clear <pointer_nexp> The bundle pointed to by <pointer_nexp> will be cleared of all tags. It will become an empty bundle. If the bundle does not exist, a new one may be created. Stacks Stacks are like a magazine for a gun. The last bullet into the magazine is the first bullet out of the magazine. This is also what is true about stacks. The last object placed into the stack is the first object out of the stack. This is called LIFO (Last In First Out). An example of the use of a stack is the BASIC! Gosub command. When a Gosub command is executed the line number to return to is "pushed" onto a stack. When a return is executed the return line number is "popped" off of the stack. This methodology allows Gosubs to be nested to any level. Any return statement will always return to the line after the last Gosub executed. A running example of Stacks can be found in the Sample Program file, f29_stack.bas. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 50 De Re BASIC!

51 There is no fixed limit on the size or number of stacks. You are limited only by the memory of your device. Stack Commands Stack.create N S, <ptr_nvar> Creates a new stack of the designated type (N=Number, S=String). The stack pointer is in <ptr_nvar>. Stack.push <ptr_nexp>, <nexp> <sexp> Pushes the <nexp> or <sexp> onto the top of the stack designated by <ptr_nexp>. The type of value expression pushed must match the type of the created stack. Stack.pop <ptr_nexp>, <nvar> <svar> Pops the top-of-the-stack value designated by <ptr_nexp> and places it into the <nvar> or <svar>. The type of the value variable must match the type of the created stack. Stack.peek <ptr_nexp>, <nvar> <svar> Returns the top-of-stack value of the stack designated by <ptr_nexp> into the <nvar> or <svar>. The value will remain on the top of the stack. The type of the value variable must match the type of the created stack. Stack.type <ptr_nexp>, <svar> The type (numeric or string) of the stack designated by <ptr_nexp> will be returned in <svar>. If the stack is numeric, the upper case character "N" will be returned. If the stack is a string stack, the upper case character "S" will be returned. Stack.isEmpty <ptr_nexp>, <nvar> If the stack designated by <ptr_nexp> is empty the value returned in <nvar> will be 1. If the stack is not empty the value will be 0. Stack.clear <ptr_nexp> The stack designated by <ptr_nexp> will be cleared. Queues A Queue is like the line that forms at your bank. When you arrive, you get in the back of the line or queue. When a teller becomes available the person at the head of the line or queue is removed from the queue to be serviced by the teller. The whole line moves forward by one person. Eventually, you get to the head of the line and will be serviced by the next available teller. A queue is something like a stack except the processing order is First In First Out (FIFO) rather than LIFO. Using our customer order processing analogy, you could create a queue of order bundles for the order processing department. New order bundles would be placed at the end of the queue. The top-of-the- Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 51 De Re BASIC!

52 queue bundle would be removed by the order processing department when it was ready to service a new order. There are no special commands in BASIC! for Queue operations. If you want to make a queue, create a list. Use List.add to add new elements to the end of the queue. Use List.get to get the element at the top of the queue and use List.remove to remove that top of queue element. You should, of course, use List.size before using List.get to ensure that there is a queued element remaining Comments! - Single Line Comment If the first character in a line is the "!" character, BASIC! considers the entire line a comment and ignores it. If the "!" appears elsewhere in the line it does not indicate a comment. Rem - Single Line Comment (legacy) If the first three characters in a line are "Rem", "REM", or even "rem", BASIC! considers the entire line a comment and ignores it. If "Rem" appears elsewhere in the line it does not indicate a comment.!! - Block Comment When a line begins with the "!!" characters, all lines that follow are considered comments and are ignored by BASIC! The Block Comment section ends at the next line that starts with "!!" % - Middle of Line Comment If the "%" character appears in a line (except within a quoted string) then rest of the line is a comment. Expressions Numeric Expression <nexp> A numeric expression consists of one or more numeric variables or numeric constants separated by binary operators and optionally preceded by unary operators. The definition can be stated more completely using this standard formal notation: <nexp> := {<numeric variable> <numeric constant} {<noperator> <nexp>} The next few sections define all of the terms. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 52 De Re BASIC!

53 Numeric Operators <noperator> The numeric operators are listed by precedence. Higher precedence operators are executed before lower precedence operators. Precedence can be changed by using parentheses. 1. Unary +, Unary 2. Exponent ^ 3. Multiply *, Divide / 4. Add +, Subtract Note that the comma (',') is not an operator in BASIC!. It is sometimes uses as a separator between expressions; for example, see the PRINT command. Numeric Expression Examples a a*b + 4/d 2*(d^2) a + b + d + RND() b + CEIL(d/25) + 5 Pre- and Post-Increment Operators ++x Increments the value of x by 1 before the x value is used --y Decrements the value of y by 1 before the y value is used x++ Increments the value of x by 1 after the x value is used y-- Decrements the value of y by 1 after the y value is used a = 5 % creates the variable a and sets it to 5 PRINT --a % sets a to 4 and prints 4 PRINT a-- % prints 4 and sets a to 3 These operations work only on numeric variables. Their action is performed as part of evaluating the variable, so they do not follow normal precedence rules. Using these operators on a variable makes the variable unavailable for other operations that require a variable. For example, you cannot pass a variable by reference (see User-Defined functions) if you preor post-increment or -decrement it, because you cannot pass an expression by reference. An exception is made to allow implicit assignment (actual or implied LET). String Expression <sexp> A string expression consists of one or more string variables or string constants separated by '+' operators. The definition can be stated more completely using this standard formal notation: <sexp> := {<string variable> <string constant>} { + <sexp>} There is only one string operator: +. This is the concatenation operator. It is used to join two strings: PRINT "abc" + "def" % prints abcdef Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 53 De Re BASIC!

54 Logical Expression <lexp> Logical expressions, or Boolean expressions, produce only two results: false or true. False is represented in BASIC! by the numeric value of zero. Anything that is not zero is true. False = 0. True = not 0. There are two types of logical expressions: Numeric logical expressions and string logical expressions. Both types produce a numerically-represented values of true or false. Each type consists of one or more variables or constants separated by binary logical operators, formally defined like this: <slexp> := {<string variable> <string constant>} <logical operator> {<string variable> <string constant>} <nlexp> := {<numeric variable> <numeric constant>} <logical operator> {<numeric variable> <numeric constant>} There is also the unique unary NOT (!) operator. NOT inverts the truth of a logical expression. Logical Operators Most of the logical operators are used for comparison. You can compare strings or numbers (<, =, etc.). You can use the other Boolean operators (!, &, ) on numbers but not on strings. This table shows all of the logical operators. They are listed by precedence with the highest precedence first. All of these operators have lower precedence than any of the numeric operators or the one string operator. Precedence may be modified by using parentheses. Precedence Operator Meaning Operands 1 < Less Than Two <nlexp> or two <slexp> > <= >= = <> Greater Than Less Than or Equal Greater Than or Equal Equal Not Equal 2! Unary Not One <nlexp> only 3 & And Two <nlexp> only 4 Or Two <nlexp> only Examples of Logical Expressions 1 < 2 (true) 3 <> 4 (true) "a" < "bcd" (true) 1 & 0 (false)!(1 & 0) (true) Parentheses Parentheses can be used to override operator precendence. a = b * c + d a = b * (c + d) % the multiplication is done first % the addition is done first Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 54 De Re BASIC!

55 Parentheses can also be placed around a variable, anywhere except to the left of an = sign. This can be useful in places where BASIC! may mistake part of a variable for a special keyword. For an example, see Program Control Commands For - To - Step / Next, below. Assignment Operations Variables get values by means of assignment statements. Simple assignment statements are of the form: <nvar> = <nexp> <svar> = <sexp> The special form of the statement allows BASIC! to infer the command. The implied command is LET. Let The original Basic language used the command, LET, to denote an assignment operation as in: LET <nvar> = <nexp> BASIC! also has the LET command but it is optional. If you use other programming languages, it may look strange to you, but there are two reasons you might use LET. First, you must use LET if you want to have a variable name start with a BASIC! keyword. Such keywords may not appear at the beginning of a new line. The statement: Letter$ = "B" is seen by BASIC! as LET ter$ = "B" If you really want to use Letter$ as a variable, you can safely use it by putting it in a LET statement: LET Letter$ = "B" If you do the assignment in a single-line IF statement, you must also use the LET command: IF 1 < 2 THEN LET letter$ = "B" Second, assignment is faster with the LET command than without it. OpEqual Assignment Operations All of the binary arithmetic and logical operators (+, -, *, /, ^, &, ) may be used with the equals sign (=) to make a single "OpEqual" operator. The combined operator works like this: var op= expression is the same as var = var op (expression) Here are some examples: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 55 De Re BASIC!

56 a += 1 is the same as a = a + 1 a$ += "xyz" is the same as a$ = a$ + "xyz" b /= is the same as b = b / (5 + 3) c ^= log(37) + 1 is the same as c = c ^ (log(37) + 1) d *= --d + d-- is the same as d = d * (--d + d--) m &= (x$ = y$) (x$!= z$) is the same as m = m & ((x$ = y$) (x$!= z$)) Math Functions Math functions act like numeric variables in a <nexp> (or <lexp>). BOR(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) Returns the logical bitwise value of <nexp1> OR <nexp2>. The double-precision floating-point values are converted to 64-bit integers before the operation. BOR(1,2) is 3 BAND(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) Returns the logical bitwise value of <nexp1> AND <nexp2>. The double-precision floating-point values are converted to 64-bit integers before the operation. BAND(3,1) is 1 BXOR(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) Returns the logical bitwise value of <nexp1> XOR <nexp2>. The double-precision floating-point values are converted to 64-bit integers before the operation. BXOR(7,1) is 6 BNOT(<nexp>) Returns the bitwise complement value of <nexp>. The double-precision floating-point value is converted to a 64-bit integer before the operation. BNOT(7) is -8 HEX$(BNOT(HEX("1234"))) is ffffffffffffedcb ABS(<nexp>) Returns the absolute value of <nexp>. SGN(<nexp>) Returns the signum function of the numerical value of <nexp>, representing its sign. When the value is: Return: > 0 1 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 56 De Re BASIC!

57 RANDOMIZE({<nexp>}) = 0 0 < 0-1 Creates a pseudo-random number generator for use with the RND() function. The optional seed parameter <nexp> initializes the generator. Omitting the parameter is the same as specifying 0. If you call RND() without first calling RANDOMIZE(), it is the same as if you had executed RANDOMIZE(0). A non-zero seed initializes a predictable series of pseudo-random numbers. That is, for a given non-zero seed value, subsequent RND() calls will always return the same series of values. If the seed is 0, the sequence of numbers from RND() is unpredictable and not reproducible. However, repeated RANDOMIZE(0) calls do not produce "more random" sequences. The RANDOMIZE() function always returns zero. RND() Returns a random number generated by the pseudorandom number generator. If a RANDOMIZE(n) has not been previously executed then a new random generator will be created using RANDOMIZE(0). The random number will be greater than or equal to zero and less than one. (0 <= n < 1). d = FLOOR(6 * RND() + 1) % roll a six-sided die MAX(<nexp>, <nexp>) Returns the maximum of two numbers as an <nvar>. MIN(<nexp>, <nexp>) Returns the minimum of two numbers as an <nvar>. CEIL(<nexp>) Rounds up towards positive infinity. 3.X becomes 4 and -3.X becomes -3. FLOOR(<nexp>) Rounds down towards negative infinity. 3.X becomes 3 and -3.X becomes -4. INT(<nexp>) Returns the integer part of <nexp>. 3.X becomes 3 and -3.X becomes -3. This operation may also be called truncation, rounding down, or rounding toward zero. FRAC(<nexp>) Returns the fractional part of <nexp>. 3.4 becomes 0.4 and -3.4 becomes Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 57 De Re BASIC!

58 FRAC(n) is equivalent to "n - INT(n)". MOD(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) Returns the remainder of <nexp1> divided by <nexp2>. If <nexp2> is 0, the function generates a runtime error. ROUND(<value_nexp>{, <count_nexp>{, <mode_sexp>}}) In it simplest form, ROUND(<value_nexp>), this function returns the closest whole number to <nexp>. You can use the optional parameters to specify more complex operations. The <count_nexp> is an optional decimal place count. It sets the number of places to the right of the decimal point. The last digit is rounded. The decimal place count must be >= 0. Omitting the parameter is the same as setting it to zero. The <mode_sexp> is an optional rounding mode. It is a one- or two-character mnemonic code that tells ROUND() what kind of rounding to do. It is not case-sensitive. There are seven rounding modes: Mode: Meaning: "HD" Half-down "HE" Half-even "HU" Half-up "D" Down "U" Up "F" Floor "C" Ceiling In this table, "down" means "toward zero" and "up" means "away from zero" (toward ± ) "Half" refers to behavior when a value is half-way between rounding up and rounding down(x.5 or -x.5). "Half-down" rounds x.5 towards zero and "half-up" rounds x.5 away from zero. "Half-even" is either "half-down" or "half-up", whichever would make the result even. 4.5 and 3.5 both round to 4.0. "Half-even" is also called "banker s rounding", because it tends to average out rounding errors. If you do not provide a <mode_sexp>, ROUND() adds +0.5 and rounds down (toward zero). This is legacy behavior, copied from earlier versions of BASIC!. ROUND(n) is NOT the same as ROUND(n, 0). ROUND() generates a runtime error if <count_nexp> < 0 or <mode_sexp> is not valid. Examples: pi = ROUND( ) % pi is 3.0 pi = ROUND( , 2) % pi is 3.14 pi = ROUND( ,, "U") % pi is 4.0 pi = ROUND( , 4, "F") % pi is negpi = ROUND( , 4, "D") % negpi is Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 58 De Re BASIC!

59 Note that FLOOR(n) is exactly the same as ROUND(n, 0, "F"), but FLOOR(n) is a little faster. In the same way, CEIL(n) is the same as ROUND(n, 0, "C"), and INT(n) is the same as ROUND(n, 0, "D"). SQR(<nexp>) Returns the closest double-precision floating-point approximation of the positive square root of <nexp>. If the value of <nexp> is negative, the function generates a runtime error. CBRT(<nexp>) Returns the closest double-precision floating-point approximation of the cube root of <nexp>. LOG(<nexp>) Returns the natural logarithm (base e) of <nexp>. LOG10(<nexp>) Returns the base 10 logarithm of the <nexp>. EXP(<nexp>) Returns e raised to the <nexp> power. POW(<nexp1>, <nexp2>) Returns <nexp1> raised to the <nexp2> power. HYPOT(<nexp_x>, <nexp_y) Returns SQR(x 2 +y 2 ) without intermediate overflow or underflow. PI() Returns the double-precision floating-point value closest to pi. SIN(<nexp>) Returns the trigonometric sine of angle <nexp>. The units of the angle are radians. COS(<nexp>) Returns the trigonometric cosine of angle <nexp>. The units of the angle are radians. TAN(<nexp>) Returns the trigonometric tangent of angle <nexp>. The units of the angle are radians. SINH(<nexp>) Returns the trigonometric hyperbolic sine of angle <nexp>. The units of the angle are radians. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 59 De Re BASIC!

60 COSH(<nexp>) Returns the trigonometric hyperbolic cosine of angle <nexp>. The units of the angle are radians. ASIN(<nexp>) Returns the arc sine of the angle <nexp>, in the range of -pi/2 through pi/2. The units of the angle are radians. If the value of <nexp> is less than -1 or greater than 1, the function generates a runtime error. ACOS(<nexp>) Returns the arc cosine of the angle <nexp>, in the range of 0.0 through pi.the units of the angle are radians. If the value of <nexp> is less than -1 or greater than 1, the function generates a runtime error. ATAN(<nexp>) Returns the arc tangent of the angle <nexp>, in the range of -pi/2 through pi/2. The units of the angle are radians. ATAN2(<nexp_y>, <nexp_x>) Returns the angle theta from the conversion of rectangular coordinates (x, y) to polar coordinates (r,theta). (Please note the order of the parameters in this function.) TODEGREES(<nexp>) Converts <nexp> angle measured in radians to an approximately equivalent angle measured in degrees. TORADIANS(<nexp>) Converts <nexp> angle measured in degrees to an approximately equivalent angle measured in radians. VAL(<sexp>) Returns the numerical value of the string expression <sexp> interpreted as a signed decimal number. If the string is empty ("") or does not represent a number, the function generates a runtime error. A sign ("+" or "-"), a decimal point ("." only), and an exponent (power of 10) are optional. An exponent is "e" or "E" followed by a number. The number may have a sign but no decimal point. The string may have leading and/or trailing spaces, but no spaces between any other characters. IS_NUMBER(<sexp>) Tests a string expression <sexp> in the same way as VAL() and returns a logical value: TRUE (non-zero) if VAL() would successfully convert the string to a number FALSE (0) if VAL() would generate a run-time error. For example, VAL("name") generates a run-time error, but IS_NUMBER("name") returns FALSE. If VAL() would report a syntax error, IS_NUMBER() reports a syntax error. For example, IS_NUMBER(), IS_NUMBER(num), and IS_NUMBER(5) are syntax errors. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 60 De Re BASIC!

61 LEN(<sexp>) Returns the length of the <sexp>. HEX(<sexp>) Returns the numerical value of the string expression <sexp> interpreted as a hexadecimal integer. The characters of the string can be only hexadecimal digits (0-9, a-h, or A-H), with an optional leading sign ("+" or "-"), or the function generates a runtime error. OCT(<sexp>) Returns the numerical value of the string expression <sexp> interpreted as an octal integer. The characters of the string can be only octal digits (0-7), with an optional leading sign ("+" or "-"), or the function generates a runtime error. BIN(<sexp>) Returns the numerical value of the string expression <sexp> interpreted as a binary integer. The characters of the string can be only binary digits (0 or 1), with an optional leading sign ("+" or "-"), or the function generates a runtime error. SHIFT(<value_nexp>, <bits_nexp>) Shifts the value <value_nexp> by the bit count <bits_nexp>. If the bit count is < 0, the value will be shifted left. If the bit count is > 0, the bits will be shifted right. The right shift will replicate the sign bit. The double-precision floating-point value are truncated to 64-bit integers before the operation. ASCII(<sexp>{, <index_nexp>}) Returns the ASCII value of one character of <sexp>. By default, it is the value of the first character. You can use the optional <index_nexp> to select any character. The index of the first character is 1. A valid ASCII value is between 0 and 255. If <sexp> is an empty string ("") the value returned will be 256 (one more than the largest 8-bit ASCII value). For non-ascii Unicode characters, ASCII() returns invalid values; use UCODE() instead. UCODE(<sexp>{, <index_nexp>}) Returns the Unicode value of one character of <sexp>. By default, it is the value of the first character. You can use the optional <index_nexp> to select any character. The index of the first character is 1. If <sexp> is an empty string ("") the value returned will be (one more than the largest 16-bit Unicode value). If the selected character of <sexp> is a valid ASCII character, this function returns the same value as ASCII(). IS_IN(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>{, <start_nexp>}) Returns the position of an occurrence of the substring <sub_sexp> in the base string <base_sexp>. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 61 De Re BASIC!

62 If the optional start parameter <start_nexp> is not present then the function starts at the first character and searches forward. If the start parameter is >= 0, then it is the starting position of a forward (left-to-right) search. The leftmost character is position 1. If the parameter is negative, it is the starting position of a reverse (right-toleft) search. The right-most character is position -1. If the substring is not in the base string, the function returns 0. It can not return a value larger than the length of the base string. STARTS_WITH(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>{, <start_nexp>}) Determines if the substring <sub_sexp> exactly matches the part of the base string <base_sexp> that starts at the position <start_nexp>. The <start_nexp> parameter is optional; if it is not present then the default starting position is 1, the first character, so the base string must start with the substring. If present, <start_nexp> must be >= 1. The function returns the length of the matching substring. If no match is found, the function returns 0. ENDS_WITH(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>) Determines if the substring <sub_sexp> exactly matches the end of the base string <base_sexp>. If the base string ends with the substring, the function returns the index into the base string where the substring starts. The value will always be >= 1. If no match is found, the function returns 0. GR_COLLISION(<object_1_nvar>, <object_2_nvar>) The variables <object_1_nvar> and <object_2_nvar> are the object pointers returned when the objects were created. If the boundary boxes of the two objects overlap then the function will return true (not zero). If they do not overlap then the function will return false (zero). Objects that may be tested for collision are: point, rectangle, bitmap, circle, arc, oval, and text. In the case of a circle, an arc, an oval, or text, the object s rectangular boundary box is used for collision testing, not the actual drawn object. BACKGROUND() A running BASIC! program continues to run when the HOME key is tapped. This is called running in the Background. When not in the Background mode, BASIC! is in the Foreground mode. BASIC! exits the Background mode and enters the Foreground mode when the BASIC! icon on the home screen is tapped. Sometimes a BASIC! programmer wants to know if the program is running in the Background. One reason for this might be to stop music playing while in the Background mode. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 62 De Re BASIC!

63 The BACKGROUND() function returns true (1) if the program is running in the background. It returns false (0) if the program is not running in the background. If you want to be able to detect Background mode while Graphics is open, you must not call Gr.render while in the Background mode. Doing so will cause the program to stop running until the Foreground mode is re-entered. Use the following code line for all Gr.render commands: IF!BACKGROUND() THEN GR.RENDER Time Functions CLOCK() Returns the time in milliseconds since the last boot. TIME() Returns the time in milliseconds since 12:00:00 AM, January 1, 1970, UTC (the "epoch"). The time interval is the same everywhere in the world, so the value is not affected by the TimeZone command. TIME(<year_exp>, <month_exp>, <day_exp>, <hour_exp>, <minute_exp>, <second_exp>) Like TIME(), except the parameters specify a moment in time. The specification is not complete, as it does not include the timezone. You may specify a timezone with the TimeZone command. If you do not specify a timezone, your local timezone is used. The parameter expressions may be either numeric expressions or string expressions. This is an unusual aspect as it isn't allowed anywhere else in BASIC!. If a parameter is a string, then it must evaluate to a number: digits only, one optional decimal point somewhere, optional leading sign, no embedded spaces. If the string parameter does not follow the rules, BASIC! reports a syntax error, like using a string in a place that expects a numeric expression. TIME( ) (the function) and Time (the command) are inverse operations. TIME( ) can take the first six return parameters of the Time command directly as input parameters. With the USING$() or FORMAT_USING$() functions, you can express a moment in time as a string in many different ways, formatted for your locale. String Functions GETERROR$() Return information about a possible error condition. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 63 De Re BASIC!

64 An error that stops your program writes an error message to the Console. If you trap the error with the OnError: interrupt label, your program does not stop and the error is not printed. You can use GETERROR$() to retrieve the error message. Certain commands can report errors without stopping your program. These commands include App.broadcast, App.start, Audio.load, Byte.open, Text.open, Zip.Open, Encrypt, Decrypt, Font.load, GPS.open, GrabFile, GrabURL, Gr.get.type, the ENCODE$() and DECODE$() functions, and any command that can create a bitmap. When you run one of these commands, you can call GETERROR$() to retrieve information about the error state. For example, if Text.open cannot open a file, it sets the file pointer to -1, and writes a GETERROR$() message such as "<filename> not found". If no error occurred, GETERROR$() returns the string "No error". Because there are commands that clear the error message, you should not expect GETERROR$() to retain its message. Capture the message in a variable as soon as possible, and do not call GETERROR$() again for the same error. CHR$(<nexp>,...) Return the character string represented by the values of list of numerical expressions. Each <nexp> is converted to a character. The expressions may have values greater than 255 and thus can be used to generate Unicode characters. PRINT CHR$(16*4 + 3) PRINT CHR$(945, 946) % Hexadecimal 43 is the character "C". This prints: C % Decimal for the characters alpha and beta: Prints: αβ LEFT$(<sexp>, <count_nexp>) Return the left-most characters of the string <sexp>. The number of characters to return is set by the count parameter, <count_nexp>. If the count is greater than 0, return <count_nexp> characters, counting from the left. If the count is less than 0, return all but <count_nexp> characters. The number to return is the string length reduced by <count_nexp>: LEFT$(a$, -2) is the same as LEFT$(a$, LEN(a$) - 2). If the count is 0, return an empty string (""). If the count is greater than the length of the string, return the entire string. MID$(<sexp>, <start_nexp>{, <count_nexp>}) Return a substring of the string <sexp>, beginning or ending at the start position <start_nexp>. The first character of the string is at position 1. If the start position is 0 or negative, it is set to 1. The count parameter is optional. If it is omitted, return all of the characters from the start position to the end of the string. a$ = MID$("dinner", 2) % a$ is "inner" Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 64 De Re BASIC!

65 Otherwise, the absolute value of the count specifies the length of the returned substring: If the count is greater than 0, begin at <start_nexp> and count characters to the right. That is, return the substring that begins at the start position. If the start position is greater than the length of the string, return an empty string (""). If the count is less than 0, begin at <start_nexp> and count characters to the left. That is, return the substring that ends at the start position. If the start position is greater than the length of the string, it is set to the end of the string. If the count is 0, return an empty string (""). a$ = MID$("dinner", 2, 3) % a$ is "inn" a$ = MID$("dinner", 4, -3) % a$ is "inn" a$ = MID$("dinner", 3, 0) % a$ is "" RIGHT$(<sexp>, <count_nexp>) Return the right-most characters of the string <sexp>. The number of characters to return is set by the count parameter, <count_nexp>. If the count is greater than 0, return <count_nexp> characters, counting from the right. If the count is less than 0, return all but <count_nexp> characters. The number to return is the string length reduced by <count_nexp>: RIGHT$(a$, -2) is the same as RIGHT$(a$, LEN(a$) - 2). If the count is 0, return an empty string (""). If the count is greater than the length of the string, return the entire string. REPLACE$(<sexp>, <argument_sexp>, <replace_sexp>) Returns <sexp> with all instances of <argument_sexp> replaced with <replace_sexp>. TRIM$(<sexp>{, <test_sexp>}) Returns <sexp> with leading and trailing occurrences of <test_sexp> removed. The expression to trim off, <test_sexp>, is optional. If omitted, all leading and trailing whitespace is removed. That is, the default <test_sexp> is the regular expression "\s+", which means "all whitespace". To use this regular expression in a BASIC! string, you must write it "\\s+" (escape the backslash). As with the WORD$() function and the SPLIT command, the <test_exp> is a regular expression. See Split for a note about Regular Expressions. LTRIM$(<sexp>{, <test_sexp>}) RTRIM$(<sexp>{, <test_sexp>}) Exactly like TRIM$(), except that LTRIM$() trims only the left end of the source string <sexp>, while RTRIM$() trims only the right end. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 65 De Re BASIC!

66 WORD$(<source_sexp>, <n_nexp> {, <test_sexp>}) This function returns a word from a string. The <source_sexp> string is split into substrings at each location where <test_sexp> occurs. The <n_nexp> parameter specifies which substring to return; numbering starts at 1. The <test_sexp> is removed from the result. The <test_sexp> parameter is an optional Regular Expression; if it is not given, the source string is split on whitespace. Specifically, the default <test_sexp> is "\s+". Leading and trailing occurrences of <test_sexp> are stripped from <source_sexp> before it is split. If <n_nexp> is less than 1 or greater than the number of substrings found in <source_sexp>, then an empty string ("") is returned. Two adjacent occurrences of <test_sexp> in <source_sexp> result in an empty string; <n_nexp> may select this empty string as the return value. Examples: string$ = "The quick brown fox" result$ = WORD$(string$, 2); % result$ is "quick" string$ = ":a:b:c:d" delimiter$ = ":" SPLIT array$[], string$, delimiter$ % array$[1] is "" result$ = WORD$(string$, 1, delimiter$) % result$ is "a", not "" This function is similar to the Split command. See Split for a note about Regular Expressions. ENCODE$(<type_sexp>, {<qualifier_sexp>}, <source_sexp>) Returns the string <source_sexp> encoded in one of several ways, as specified by the <type_sexp>. The <qualifier_sexp> usage depends on the type: Type Qualifier Default Result "ENCRYPT" password "" (empty) Encrypts the source string using the password parameter. The encryption algorithm is "PBEWithMD5AndDES". This usage of ENCODE$() works the same way as the ENCRYPT command. Use the DECODE$() function to decrypt. "DECRYPT" password "" Same as type "ENCRYPT" (encrypts, does not decrypt). "ENCRYPT_RAW" password "" Same as type "ENCRYPT" except the input and output are buffer strings. This is useful for encrypting binary data. "DECRYPT_RAW" password "" Same as "ENCRYPT_RAW" (encrypts, does not decrypt). "URL" charset "UTF-8" Encodes the source string using the format required by HTML application/x-www-form-urlencoded. You should omit the charset parameter. "BASE64" charset "UTF-8" Encodes the source string into the Base64 representation of binary data. See RFCs 2045 and The simplest way to use this function is to omit the charset parameter. The type is required, but see below for the two-parameter form of ENCODE$() and DECODE$(). The type IS NOT case-sensitive: "BASE64", "base64", and "Base64" are all the same. The qualifier is optional, but its comma is required. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 66 De Re BASIC!

67 If you supply the qualifier, whether password or charset, it IS case-sensitive. If the source string cannot be encoded (or encrypted) with the specified charset (or password), the function returns an empty string (""). You can call the GETERROR$() function to get an error message. "ENCRYPT", "DECRYPT", and "URL" can be used on any BASIC! string. The string is converted to a byte stream, then the byte stream is encrypted or URL-encoded. The encrypted byte stream is converted to string format using the Base64 representation of binary data (see comment for "BASE64" in the table above. URL-encoded strings do not require this extra step. "ENCRYPT_RAW" and "DECRYPT_RAW" are intended for use with binary data in a buffer string. A buffer string is a special use of the BASIC! string in which each 16-bit character consists of one byte of 0 and one byte of data. "ENCRYPT_RAW" can encrypt a buffer string or an ASCII text string, but using it on Unicode text will corrupt the string. After encryption, the result is returned in another buffer string. "BASE64" also converts its string to a byte-stream before encoding it to Base64. The default conversion, using UTF-8, works with any BASIC! string; specifying another character set encoding may corrupt data. Normally, you would use "BASE64" on binary data in a buffer string. In this case, you may specify any valid charset with no data corruption. The encoding string will change, but it can always be decoded using the same charset. See the two-parameter form of ENCODE$(), below, for a partial list of valid charsets. DECODE$(<type_sexp>, {<qualifier_sexp>}, <source_sexp>) Returns the result of decoding a string <source_sexp> that was encoded with ENCODE$(). The <type_sexp>and <qualifier_sexp> describe how the string was encoded. You must use the same type and qualifier that were used to encode the source string, or you may get unpredictable results. Type Qualifier Default Result "ENCRYPT" password "" (empty) Decrypts the source string using the password parameter. The encryption algorithm is "PBEWithMD5AndDES". This usage of DECODE$() works the same way as the DECRYPT command. "DECRYPT" password "" Same as type "ENCRYPT" (decrypts, does not encrypt). "ENCRYPT" password "" Same as type "DECRYPT" except the input and output are buffer strings. This is useful for decrypting binary data. "DECRYPT" password "" Same as type "ENCRYPT". "URL" charset "UTF-8" Decodes the source string assumed to be in the format required by HTML application/x-www-form-urlencoded. You should omit the charset parameter. "BASE64" charset "UTF-8" Decodes the source string holding the Base64 representation of binary data. See RFCs 2045 and The type is required, but see below for the two-parameter form of ENCODE$() and DECODE$(). The type IS NOT case-sensitive: "BASE64", "base64", and "Base64" are all the same. The qualifier is optional, but its comma is required. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 67 De Re BASIC!

68 If you supply the qualifier, whether password or charset, it IS case-sensitive. The source string is decoded to a byte stream according to the type. Then the byte stream is converted to a BASIC! string (UTF-16) according to the character encoding (the charset parameter), which describes how to interpret the byte stream. The charset is always UTF-8 for decryption, and defaults to UTF-8 for the other types. The most common usage of this function is to omit the charset. If the source string was encoded from binary data (with "ENCRYPT_RAW" or "BASE64"), the resulting BASIC! string will be a buffer string. When a string is used as a buffer, one byte of data is written into the lower 8 bits of each 16-bit character, and the upper 8 bits are 0. You can extract the binary data from the string, one byte at a time, using the ASCII() or UCODE() functions. If the source string cannot be decoded (or decrypted) with the specified charset (or password), the function returns an empty string (""). You can call the GETERROR$() function to get an error message. See the two-parameter form of ENCODE$(), below, for a partial list of valid charsets. ENCODE$(<charset_sexp>, <source_sexp>) Encodes the string <source_sexp> using the character encoding of the <charset_sexp> and returns the result in a buffer string. When a string is used as a buffer, one byte of data is written into the lower 8 bits of each 16-bit character, and the upper 8 bits are 0. The charset specifies the rules used to convert the source string into a byte stream. The stream is written to a buffer string, one byte per character. The bytes are not reassembled into 16-bit characters. The charsets "UTF-8", "UTF-16", "UTF-16BE", "UTF-16LE", "US-ASCII", and "ISO " are always available. Your device may have additional charsets. The charset names are case-sensitive, but the standard charsets have aliases for convenience. For example, "utf8" is valid. If the source string cannot be encoded with the specified charset, the function returns an empty string (""). You can call the GETERROR$() function to get an error message. If you create a buffer string with ENCODE$(), you can write the bytes to a file with Byte.write.buffer. For encryption and URL- or Base64-encoding, see the three-parameter form of ENCODE$(), above. DECODE$(<charset_sexp>, <buffer_sexp>) Decodes the buffer string <buffer_sexp> that was encoded using the <charset_sexp> and returns the result in a standard BASIC! string. A buffer string is a special use of the BASIC! string in which each 16-bit character consists of one byte of 0 and one byte of data. If the source string cannot be decoded with the specified charset, the function returns an empty string (""). You can call the GETERROR$() function to get an error message. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 68 De Re BASIC!

69 If you attempt to DECODE$() a string that is not a buffer string, you may get unexpected results. Besides the function ENCODE$(), the commands Byte.read.buffer and BT.read.bytes can write buffer strings. Your program can also build such strings directly, character-by-character. If you read data from a file with Byte.read.buffer, you can use DECODE$() to reassemble the bytes into BASIC! (UTF-16) strings. The charset specifies how the original string was encoded when it was written as bytes to the file. For example, a binary file may have embedded text strings for names or titles. In order to allow Unicode, the text may be encoded. Let s say you read 32 bytes of binary data, consisting of 8 bytes of binary and 24 bytes of UTF-8-encoded text: BYTE.READ.BUFFER file, 32, bfr$ namebfr$ = MID$(bfr$, 9) name$ = DECODE$("UTF-8", namebfr$) For encryption and URL- or Base64-decoding, see the three-parameter form of DECODE$(), above. STR$(<nexp>) Returns the string representation of <nexp>. LOWER$(<sexp>) Returns <sexp> in all lower case characters. UPPER$(<sexp>) Returns <nexp> in all upper case characters. VERSION$() Returns the version number of BASIC! as a string. INT$(<nexp>) Returns a string representing the integer part of the numeric expression. HEX$(<nexp>) Returns a string representing the hexadecimal representation of the numeric expression. OCT$(<nexp>) Returns a string representing the octal representation of the numeric expression. BIN$(<nexp>) Returns a string representing the binary representation of the numeric expression. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 69 De Re BASIC!

70 USING$({<locale_sexp>}, <format_sexp> {, <exp>}...) Returns a string, using the locale and format expressions to format the expression list. This function gives BASIC! programs access to the Formatter class of the Android platform. You can find full documentation here: The <locale_sexp> is a string that tells the formatter to use the formatting conventions of a specific language and region or country. For example, "en_us" specifies American English conventions. The <format_sexp> is a string that contains format specifiers, like "%d" or "%7.2f," that tell the formatter what to do with the expressions that follow. The format string is followed by a list of zero or more expressions. Most format specifiers take one argument from the list, in order. If you don t provide as many arguments as your format string needs, you will get a detailed Java error message. Each expression must also match the type of the corresponding format specifier. If you try to apply a string format specifier, like "%-7s", to a number, or a floating point specifier, like "%5.2f" to a string, you will get a Java error message. Locale expression The USING$() function can localize the output string based on language and region. The locale specifies the language and region with standardized codes. The <locale_sexp> is a string containing zero or more codes separated by underscores. The function accepts up to three codes. The first must be a language code, such as "en", "de", or "ja". The second must be a region or country code, such as "FR", "US", or "IN". Some language and country combinations can accept a third code, called the "variant code". The function also accepts the standard three-letter codes and numeric codes for country or region. For example, "fr_fr", "fr_fra", and "fr_250" are all equivalent. If you want to use the default locale of your Android device, make the <locale_exp> an empty string (""), or leave it out altogether. If you leave it out, you must keep the comma: USING$(, "%f", x) If you make a mistake in the <locale_sexp>, you may get an obscure Java error message, but more likely your locale will be ignored, and your string will be formatted using the default locale of your device. Android devices do not support all possible locales. If you specify a valid locale that your device does not understand, your string will be formatted using the default locale. Format expression If you are familiar with the printf functions of C/C++, Perl, or other languages, you will recognize most of format specifiers of this function. The format expression is exactly the same as format string of the Java Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 70 De Re BASIC!

71 Formatter class, or the format(string, Object ) method of the Java String, with two exceptions: Boolean format specifiers are not supported, and hex hash specifiers are limited to numeric and string types. If you have not programmed in one of those other languages, this will be your introduction to a powerful tool for formatting text. A format expression is a string with embedded format specifiers. Anything that is not a format specifier is copied literally to the function output string. Each embedded format specifier is replaced with the value of an expression from the list, formatted according to the specifier. For example: PRINT USING$("","Pi is approximately %f.", PI()) function call Pi is approximately printed output for English locale The <locale_exp> is "", meaning "use my default locale". The <format_exp>, "Pi is approximately %f", has one format specifier, "%f". "%f" means, "use the default decimal floating point output format". The expression list has one item, the math function PI(). In the output, "%f" is replaced by the value of the the PI() function. Your output may be different if your locale language is not English. Format Specifiers Here is a brief summary of the available format specifiers: For this type of data Use these formats Comments String %s %S %S forces output to upper-case Number %f %e %E %g %G %a %A Standard BASIC! numbers are floating point Use %f for decimal output: " " Use %e or %E for exponential notation: "1.234e+03" %E writes upper-case: "1.234E+03" %g (%G) lets the system choose %f or %e (%E) %a and %A are "hexadecimal floating point" Integer %d %o %x %X USING$ can use some math functions as integers Use %d for decimal, %o for octal, %x %X for hex %x writes lower-case abcdef, %X writes upper-case Special integer %c %C %t These specifiers can operate on an integer %c %C output a character, %C writes upper-case %t represents a family of time format specifiers None %% %n These specifiers do not read the expression list %% writes a single "%" to the output %n writes a newline, exactly the same as \n For more information about %a and %A, see the Android documentation linked above. Android s %b and %B are not supported because BASIC! has no Boolean type. Android s %h and %H hash code specifiers are limited to strings and numbers in BASIC!. For an explanation of USING$() with integer format specifiers, see below. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 71 De Re BASIC!

72 There is a whole family of time format specifiers: %t<x> where <x> is another letter. They operate on an integer, which they interpret as the number of milliseconds since the beginning of January 1, 1970, UTC (the "epoch"). You can apply time format specifiers to the output of the TIME() functions. Note, however, that the %t time specifiers use your local timezone, not the TimeZone.set value. There are more than 30 time format specifiers. A few examples appear below, but to get the full list you should read the Android documentation linked above. PRINT USING$("", "The time is: %ti:%<tm:%<ts %<Tp", time()) % the hard way PRINT USING$("", "The time is: %tr", time()) % same thing! 02:27:16 PM example of printed output t = TIME(2001, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) % set 2001/02/03 04:05:06, local timezone PRINT USING$("sv", "%ta", int(t)) % day in Swedish, prints "lördag" PRINT USING$("es", "%tb", int(t)) % month in Spanish, prints "febrero" PRINT USING$("", "%ty/%tm/%td", int(t), int(t), int(t)) % prints "2001/02/03" PRINT USING$(, "%ty/%<tm/%<td", int(t)) % prints "2001/02/03" PRINT USING$("en_GB", "%th:%<tm:%<ts", int(t)) % prints "04:05:06" PRINT USING$("in_IN", "%tt", int(t)) % prints "04:05:06" Note: Date and time are printed for your local timezone, regardless of either the TIMEZONE.SET setting or the locale parameter. Try the same set of examples with TIMEZONE.SET "UTC". Unless that is your local timezone, a different hour and perhaps even a different day will be displayed. Optional Modifiers The format specifiers can be used exactly as shown in the table. They have default settings that control how they behave. You can control the settings yourself, fine-tuning the behavior to suit your needs. You can modify the format specifiers with index, flags, width, and precision, as shown in this example: Index "%3$-,15.4f" "% 3$ -, f " <index> <flags> <width> <precision> <specifier> Normally the format specifiers are applied to the arguments in order. You can change the order with an argument index. An index a number followed by a $ character. The argument index 3$ specifies the third argument in the list. PRINT USING$("", "%3$s %s %s", "a", "b", "c") % prints "c a b" The special argument index "<" lets you reuse an argument. PRINT USING$("", "%o %<d %<h", int(64) ) % prints " " In the last example, there is only one argument, but three format specifiers. This is not an error because the argument is reused. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 72 De Re BASIC!

73 Flags There are six flags: Width - left-justify; if no flag, right-justify + always show sign; if no flag, show "-" but do not show "+" 0 pad numbers with leading zeros; if no flag pad with spaces, use grouping separators for large numbers ( put parentheses around negative values # alternate notation (leading 0 for octal, leading 0x for hexadecimal) The width control sets the minimum number of characters to print. If the value to format is longer than the width setting, the entire value is printed (unless it would exceed the precision setting). If the value to format is shorter than the width setting, it is padded to fill the width. By default, it is padded with spaces on the left, but you change this with the "-" and "0" flags. Precision The precision control means different things to different data types. For floating point numbers, precision specifies the number of characters to print after the decimal point, padding with trailing zeros if needed. For string values, it specifies the maximum number of characters to print. If precision is less than width, only precision characters are printed. "%4s", "foo" " foo" "%-4s", "foo" "foo " "%4.2s", "foo" "fo" The precision control is not valid for other types. In the example above, %-,15.4f: The flags "-" and "," mean "left-justify the output" and "use a thousands separator". The width is 15, meaning the output is to be at least 15 characters wide. The precision is 4, so there will be exactly four digits after the decimal point. The whole format specifier means, "format a floating point number (%f) left-justified ("-") in a space 15 characters wide, with 4 characters after the decimal point, with a thousands separator (",")". The characters used for the decimal point and the thousands separator depend on the locale: "1, " for locale "en" "1 234,5678 " for locale "fr" "1.234,5678 " for locale "it" Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 73 De Re BASIC!

74 Integer values BASIC! has only double-precision floating point numbers. It does not have an integer type. The USING$() function supports format specifiers ("%d", "%t", "%x") that apply only to integer values. USING$() has a special relationship with the math functions that intrinsically produce integer results. BASIC! converts the output of these functions to floating point, for storage in numeric variables, but USING$() can get the original integer values. For example: PRINT USING$("", "%d", 123) PRINT USING$("", "%d", INT(123)) % ERROR! % No error The functions that can produce integer values for USING$() are: INT() BIN() OCT() HEX() CEIL() FLOOR() ASCII() UCODE() BAND() BOR() BXOR() SHIFT() TIME() FORMAT_USING$(<locale_sexp>, <format_sexp> {, <exp>}...) Alias for USING$(). You can use the two equivalent functions to make your code easier to read. For example: string$ = FORMAT_USING("", "pi is not %d", int(pi())) Print USING$("en_US", "Balance: $%8.2f", balance) FORMAT$(<pattern_sexp>, <nexp>) Returns a string with <nexp> formatted by the pattern <pattern_sexp>. Leading Sign A negative (-) character for numbers < 0 or a space for numbers >= 0. The Sign and the Floating Character together form the Floating Field. Floating Character If the first character of the pattern is not "#" or "." or "-" then that character becomes a "floating" character. This pattern character is typically a "$". If no floating character is provided then a space character is used. See also Overflow, below. Decimal Point The pattern may have one optional decimal point character ("."). If the pattern has no decimal point, then only the whole number is ouput. # Character (before decimal, or no decimal) # Character (after decimal point) % Character (before decimal, or no decimal) Any digits that would otherwise appear after the decimal point are not output. Each "#" is replaced by a digit from the number. If there are more "#" characters than digits, then the leading "#" character(s) are replaced by space(s). Each "#" is replaced by a digit from the number. If there are more "#" characters than significant digits, then the trailing "#" character(s) are replaced by zero(s). The number of "#" characters after the pattern decimal point specifies the number of decimal digits that will be output. Each "%" is replaced by a digit from the number. If there are more "%" characters than digits, then the leading "%" character(s) are replaced by zero(s). Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 74 De Re BASIC!

75 % Character (after decimal) Non-pattern Characters Overflow Output Size The "%" character is not allowed after the decimal point. This is a syntax error. If any pattern character (other than the first) is not # or %, then that character is copied directly into the output. If the character would appear before the first digit of the number, it is replaced by a space. This feature is usually used for commas. If the number of digits exceeds the number of # and % characters, then the output has the ** characters inserted in place of the Floating Field. The number of characters output is always the number of characters in the pattern plus one for the sign plus one more for the space if the pattern has no Floating Character. Notes The sign and the floating character together form a Floating Field two characters wide that always appears just before the first digit of the formatted output. If there are any leading spaces in the formatted output, they are placed before the floating field. The "#" character generates leading spaces, not leading zeros. "##.###" formats as ".123". If you want a leading zero, use a "%". For example "%.###", "#%.###", or "##%" all assure a leading zero. Be careful mixing # and % characters. Doing so except as just shown can produce unexpected results. The number of characters output is always the number of characters in the pattern plus the two floating characters. Examples Function Call Output Width Format$( "##,###,###", ) 1,234, characters Format$( "%%,%%%,%%%.#", ) 01,234, characters Format$( "$###,###", ) $123,456 9 characters Format$( "$###,###", -1234) -$1,234 9 characters Format$( "$###,###", 12) $12 9 characters Format$( "$%%%,%%%", -12) -$000,012 9 characters Format$( "##.#", 0).0 6 characters Format$( "#%.#", 0) characters Format$( "$###.##", ) ** characters User-Defined Functions User-Defined Functions are BASIC! functions like ABS(n), MOD(a,b) and LEFT$(a$,n) except that the operation of the function is defined by the user. User functions should generally be defined at the start of the program and in particular, they should appear before the places where they are called. User-Defined Functions may call other User-Defined Functions. A function can even recursively call itself. You may define a function with the same name as a built-in function. The User-Defined Function always overrides the built-in function, and the built-in function is not accessible. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 75 De Re BASIC!

76 Each time a function is called from another function a certain amount of memory is used for the execution stack. The depth of these nested calls is limited only by the amount of memory that your particular Android device allocates to applications. Variable Scope All variables created while running a User-Defined Function are private to the function. A variable named v$ in the main program is not the same as variable v$ within a function. Furthermore, a variable named v$ in a recursively called function is not the same v$ in the calling function. A function cannot access variables created outside of the function, except as parameters passed by reference. (See Fn.def, below, for an explanation of parameters passed by value and by reference.) All variables created while running a User-Defined Function are destroyed when the function returns. When an array variable is destroyed, its storage is reclaimed. However, when a data structure pointer is destroyed, the data structure is not destroyed (see next section). Data Structures in User-Defined Functions Data structures (List, Stack, Bundle, bitmap, graphical object anything referenced through a pointer) are global in scope. That is, if a variable is used as a pointer to a data structure, it points to the same data structure whether it is used inside or outside of a function. The data structure may have been created in the main program, the same user-defined function, or some other user-defined function. This means that if you pass a pointer to a bundle, for example, and modify that bundle inside the function, the changes will be retained when the function returns. It also means that a function can modify graphical objects created outside of the function. Data structures (List, Stack, Bundle, or graphical object) created while running a User-Defined Function are not destroyed when the function returns. Local variables that point to the data structures are lost, but you can return a data structure pointer as the function s return value or through a parameter passed by reference. Commands Fn.def name name$( {nvar} {svar} Array[] Array$[],... {nvar} {svar} Array[] Array$[]) Begins the definition of a function. This command names the function and lists the parameters, if any. If the function name ends with the $ character then the function will return a string, otherwise it will return a number. The parameter list can contain as many parameters as needed, or none at all. The parameters may be numeric or string, scalar or array. Your program must execute Fn.def before it tries to call the named function. Your program must not attempt to create more than one function with the same name, or the same function more than once. However, you may override a built-in function by defining your own function with the same name. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 76 De Re BASIC!

77 The following are all valid: FN.DEF cut$(a$, left, right) FN.DEF sum(a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j) FN.DEF sort(v$[], direction) FN.DEF pi() % Overrides built-in. You can make π = 3! Parameters create variables visible only inside the function. They can be used like other variables created inside the function (see Variable Scope, above). There are two types of parameters: call by reference and call by value. Call by value means that the calling variable value (or expression) is copied into the called variable. Changes made to the called variable within the function do not affect the value of the calling variable. Call by reference means that the calling variable value is changed if the called variable value is changed within the function. Scalar (non-array) function variables can be either call by value or call by reference. Which type the variable will be depends upon how it is called. If the calling variable has the "&" character in front of it, then the variable is call by reference. If there is no "&" in front of the calling variable name then the variable is call by value. FN.DEF test(a) a = 9 FN.RTN a FN.END a =1 PRINT test(a), a %will print: 9, 1 PRINT test(&a), a %will print: 9, 9 Array parameters are always call by reference. FN.DEF test(a[]) a[1] = 9 FN.RTN a[1] FN.END DIM a[1] a[1] = 1 PRINT test(a[]), a[1] % prints: 9, 9 Along with the function s return value, you can use parameters passed by reference to return information to a function s caller. Fn.rtn <sexp> <nexp> Causes the function to terminate execution and return the value of the return expression <sexp> <nexp>. The return expression type, string or number, must match the type of the function name. Fn.rtn statements may appear anywhere in the program that they are needed. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 77 De Re BASIC!

78 A function can return only a single scalar value. It cannot return an array. It cannot return a data structure (List, Stack, Bundle, or graphical object), but it can return a pointer to a data structure. Note: You can also return information to a function s caller through parameters passed by reference. Fn.end Ends the definition of a user-defined function. Every function definition must end with Fn.end. When your function is running, executing the Fn.end statement causes the function to terminate and return a default value. If the function type is numeric then the default return value is 0.0. A string function returns the empty string (""). Call <user_defined_function> Executes the user-defined function. Any value returned by the function will be discarded. The CALL command keyword is optional. Just as BASIC! can infer the LET command from a line that starts with a variable, it can infer the CALL command from a line that starts with a function name. For example, if you have defined a function like this: FN.DEF MyFunction(x, y$, z) < your code here > FN.END You can execute the function, ignoring its return value, with either of these statements: CALL MyFunction(a, b$, c) MyFunction(a, b$, c) As with LET, you must use CALL if your function name starts with a BASIC! command keyword. It is also a little faster to execute a function with CALL than to make BASIC! infer the command. See LET, above, for details. Program Control Commands If / Then / Else / Elseif / Endif The If commands provide for the conditional execution of blocks of statements. (Note: the braces { } are not part of the command syntax. They are used only to show parts that are optional.) IF <condition> { THEN } <statement> <statement>... <statement> { ELSEIF<condition> { THEN } <statement> <statement> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 78 De Re BASIC!

79 ... <statement> } { ELSE <statement> <statement>... <statement> } ENDIF If commands may be nested to any depth. That is, any <statement> in a block may be a full If command with all of its own <statement> blocks. See the Sample Program file, F04_if_else.bas, for working examples of the If command. If / Then / Else If your conditional block(s) contain(s) only one statement, you may use a simpler form of the If command, all one line: IF <condition> THEN <statement> { ELSE <statement> } In this form, Then is required, and there is no ElseIf or EndIf. This form does not nest: neither <statement> may be an If command. Because the single statements are not treated as blocks, this is the preferred form if either of the embedded statements is a Break, Continue, or GoTo. You may replace either <statement> with multiple statements separated by colon (":") characters. If you do this, the set of multiple statements is treated as a block, and the single-line If/Then/Else becomes an If/Then/Else/Endif. These two lines are exactly equivalent: IF (x > y) THEN x = y : PRINT a$ ELSE y = x : PRINT b$ IF (x > y) : x = y : PRINT a$ : ELSE : y = x : PRINT b$ : ENDIF Please note, if you wish to use colon-separated statements in this form of If/Then/Else, then you must be careful to put spaces around the keywords Then and Else. Spaces are not significant to the BASIC! interpreter, but they are needed by the preprocessor that converts the single-line If with multistatement blocks into a multi-line If with an EndIf. For - To - Step / Next FOR <nvar> = <nexp_1> TO <nexp_2> {STEP <nexp_3>} <statement>... <statement> NEXT {<nvar>} Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 79 De Re BASIC!

80 Initially, <nvar> is assigned the value of <nexp_1> and compared to <nexp_2>. {STEP <nexp_3>} is optional and may be omitted. If omitted then the Step value is 1. If <nexp_3> is positive then if <nvar> <= <nexp_2> then the statements between the For and Next are executed. If <nexp_3> is negative then if <nvar> >= <nexp_2> then the statements between the For and Next are executed. When the Next statement is executed, <nvar> is incremented or decremented by the Step value and the test is repeated. The <statement>s will be executed as long as the test is true. Each time, <nvar> is compared to the original value of <nexp_2>; <nexp_2> is not re-evaluated with each Next. Because the keywords To and Step are in the middle of the line with expressions that may include variables, it is possible to confuse BASIC!. Remember that the interpreter does not see any spaces you put between variables and keywords. FOR a TO m is seen as foratom. If there is any possibility of confusion, use parentheses to tell BASIC! that a name is a variable: FOR WinTop TO WinBot FOR (WinTop) TO WinBot % ERROR: interpreted as "FOR win TO ptowinbot" % interpreted as intended For-Next loops can be nested to any level. When For-Next loops are nested, any executed Next statement will apply to the currently executing For statement. This is true no matter what the <nvar> coded with the Next is. For all practical purposes, the <nvar> coded with the Next should be considered to be nothing more than a comment. It is possible to exit a For loop without Next or F_N.break. However, this can create subtle logic errors that are hard to debug. If you set debug mode (see the Debug.on command), then BASIC! can help you find these bugs. When your program ends and debug is on, if your program entered a For loop and did not leave it cleanly, BASIC! shows a run-time error: "Program ended with FOR without NEXT". F_N.continue If this statement is executed within a For-Next loop, the rest of the current pass of the loop is skipped. The Next statement executes immediately. F_N.break If this statement is executed within a For-Next loop, the rest of the current pass of the loop is skipped and the loop is terminated. The statement immediately following the Next will be executed. While <lexp> / Repeat While <lexp> <statement> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 80 De Re BASIC!

81 Repeat <statement> The <statement>s between the While and Repeat will be executed as long as <lexp> evaluates as true. The <statements>s will not be executed at all if <lexp> starts off false. While-Repeat loops may be nested to any level. When While-Repeat are nested, any executed Repeat statement will apply to inner most While loop. W_R.continue If this statement is executed within a While-Repeat loop, the rest of the current pass of the loop is skipped. The Repeat statement executes immediately. You can exit a While loop without Repeat or W_R.break. As with For-Next loops, this can create subtle bugs, and BASIC! can help you find them. If debug is on, and your program is still in a While loop when it ends, BASIC! shows a run-time error: "Program ended with WHILE without REPEAT". W_R.break If this statement is executed within a While-Repeat loop, the rest of the current pass of the loop is skipped and the loop is terminated. The statement immediately following the Repeat will be executed. Do / Until <lexp> Do <statement> <statement> Until <lexp> The statements between Do and Until will be executed until <lexp> is true. The <statement>s will always be executed at least once. Do-Until loops may be nested to any level. Any encountered Until statement will apply to the last executed DO statement. You can exit a Do loop without Until or D_U.break. As with For-Next loops, this can create subtle bugs, and BASIC! can help you find them. If debug is on, and your program is still in a Do loop when it ends, BASIC! shows a run-time error: "Program ended with DO without UNTIL". D_U.continue If this statement is executed within a Do-Until loop, the rest of the current pass of the loop is skipped. The Until statement executes immediately. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 81 De Re BASIC!

82 D_U.break If this statement is executed within a Do-Until loop, the rest of the current pass of the loop is skipped and the loop is terminated. The statement immediately following the Until will be executed. Labels, GOTO, GOSUB, and RETURN: Traditional BASIC Before computer scientists invented the looping structures and user-defined functions described above, program flow was controlled by GOTO, GOSUB, and RETURN statements. These statements are present in BASIC!, too, mainly for compatibility with old BASIC dialects. A GoTo statement is a one-way jump to another place in your program, identified by a Label. The program goes to the Label and continues execution there. A GoSub is similar, except that the Label is the beginning of a "Subroutine". The proram goes to the Label, and executes there until it reaches a Return statement. Then it "returns", going back to where it came from: the line after the GoSub statement. Extensive use of the GoTo command in your program should be generally avoided. It can make code hard to read and harder to debug. Instead, you should use structured elements like Do Until, While Repeat, etc. in conjunction with the Break and Continue statements. It is especially serious to use GoTo commands inside an If Else Endif, For Next, or other structured block, jumping to code outside of the block. Doing this consumes system resources and may corrupt BASIC! s internal data structures. This practice may lead your program to a run-time error: Stack overflow. See manual about use of GOTO. Label A label is a word followed by the colon ":", character. Label names follow the same conventions as variable names, except that a label must not start with a BASIC! command keyword. You may put a label on a line with other commands. Use two colons: one to signify that the word is a label, and a second to separate the label from the other command(s) on the line. Here: : IF ++a < 5 THEN GOTO here ELSE PRINT a This program prints 5.0 and then stops. The colon signifies that the word is a label, but it is not part of the label. Use the colon where the label is defined. Do not use it in the GoTo or GoSub that jumps to the label. For example: Loop: % The command "GoTo Loop" jumps to this line <statement> Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 82 De Re BASIC!

83 <statement> GoTo Loop GoTo <label> The next statement that will be executed will be the statement following <label>. GoTo <index_nexp>, <label>... A "computed GOTO". The index expression is evaluated, rounded to the nearest integer, and used as an index into the list of labels. The program jumps to the statement after the indexed label. If the index does not select any label, the program continues at the statement after the GoTo. For examples, see GoSub. GoSub <label> / Return The next statement that will be executed will be the statement following <label>. The statements following the line beginning with <label> will continue to be executed until a Return statement is encountered. Execution will then continue at the statement following the GoSub statement. Example: This will print: Message$ = "Have a good day" GOSUB xprint PRINT "Thank you" <statement> <statement> END xprint: PRINT Message$ RETURN Have a good day Thank you GoSub <index_nexp>, <label>... / Return A "computed GOSUB". The index expression is evaluated, rounded to the nearest integer, and used as an index into the list of labels. The program jumps to the statement after the indexed label. When the next Return instruction executes, the program returns to the statement after this GoSub. If the index does not select any label, the program continues to the statement after the GoSub. No subroutine is executed, and no Return statement is expected. Example: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 83 De Re BASIC!

84 d = FLOOR(6 * RND() + 1) % roll a six-sided die GOSUB d, Side1, Side2, Side3, Side4, Side5, Side6 PRINT "Welcome back!" END Side1: <subroutine for side 1> RETURN Side6: <subroutine for side 6> RETURN Using Source Code from Multiple Files Include FilePath Before the program is run, the BASIC! preprocessor replaces any Include statements with the text from the named file. You can use this to insert another BASIC! program file into your program at this point. The program is not yet running, therefore the File Path cannot be a string expression. You may include a file only once. If multiple Include statements name the same file, the preprocessor inserts the contents of the file in place of the first such Include statement and deletes the others. This prevents Out-Of-Memory crashes caused by an Include file including itself. INCLUDE functions/drawgraph.bas inserts the code from the file "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/source/functions/drawgraph.bas" into the program. The File Path may be written without quotation marks, as in the example above, or with quotes: INCLUDE "functions/drawgraph.bas" If present, the quotes prevent the preprocessor from forcing the File Path to lower-case. Normally, this does not change how BASIC! behaves, because the file system on the SD card is case-insensitive. DrawGraph.bas and drawgraph.bas both refer to the same file. However, if you build your program into a standalone Android application (see Appendix D), you can use virtual files in the Android assets file system. File names in assets are case-sensitive, so you may need to use quotes with the Include File Path. Because Include is processed before your program starts running, it is not affected by program logic. IF 0 INCLUDE functions/drawgraph.bas ENDIF In this example, the contents of the program file replace the Include statement in the body of the If/Endif, but the statements are never executed because If 0 is always false. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 84 De Re BASIC!

85 However, an Include in a single-line If is ignored: IF x THEN INCLUDE functions/drawgraph.bas ELSE PRINT "bad!" In this example, the file is not inserted in place of the Include statement. Run <filename_sexp>{, <data_sexp>} This command will terminate the running of the current program and then load and run the BASIC! program named in the filename string expression. The filename is relative to BASIC s "source/" directory. If the filename is "program.bas" and your <pref base drive> is "/sdcard" (the default), then the file "/sdcard/rfo-basic/source/program.bas" will be executed. If the filename parameter is omitted, and the currently executing program has a name, then the program restarts. The program does not have a name if you run from the BASIC! Editor without first saving the program; in this case Run terminates your program with a syntax error. The optional data string expression provides for the passing of data to the next program. The passed data can be accessed in the next program by referencing the special variable, ##$. Run programs can be chained. A program loaded and run by means of the Run command can also run another program file. This chain can be a long as needed. When the last program in a Run chain ends, tapping the BACK key will display the original program in the BASIC! Editor. When a program ends with an error, the Editor tries to highlight the line where the error occurred. If the program with the error was started by a Run command, the Editor does not have that program loaded. Any highlighting that may be displayed is meaningless. Program.info <nexp> <nvar> Returns a Bundle that reports information about the currently running program. If you provide a variable that is not a valid Bundle pointer, the command creates a new Bundle and returns the Bundle pointer in your variable. Otherwise it writes into the Bundle your variable or expression points to. The bundle keys and possible values are in the table below: Key Type Value BasPath String Full path + name of the program currently being executed. The path is relative to BASIC! s "source/" directory. BasName String Name of the program currently being executed. SysPath String Full path to the BASIC! s private file storage directory. The path is relative to BASIC! s "data/" directory. Returns 1.0 (true) if the current program is being run from a UserApk Numeric standalone user-built APK (Appendix D). (Logical) Returns 0.0 (false) if the program is being from from the BASIC! Editor or a Launcher Shortcut (Appendix C). Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 85 De Re BASIC!

86 For example, assume: You are using the default <pref base drive> You downloaded a file called "my_program.bas" to the standard Android Download directory. You used the BASIC! Editor to load and run the downloaded program. Then the returned values would be as follows: Key Value Key Value BasPath../../Download/my_program.bas BasName my_program.bas SysPath../../../../../data/data/com.rfo.basic UserApk 0.0 SysPath: BASIC! normally keeps programs and data in its base directory (see Working with Files, later in this manual). The base directory is in public storage space. BASIC! programs also have acces to a private storage area. Your program can create a subdirectory within the SysPath directory and store private files there. Note that if you uninstall BASIC!, any files in private storage will be deleted. SysPath is of particular interest to you if you build a BASIC! program as an application in a standalone apk, as described in Appendix D. See Modifications to the AndroidManifest.xml File Permissions. Switch Commands The Switch commands may be used to replace nested if-then-else operations. SW.BEGIN a SW.CASE 1 <statement1> <statement2> SW.BREAK SW.CASE 2, 4 <statement3> <statement4> SW.BREAK SW.CASE < 0 <statement5> <statement6> SW.BREAK SW.DEFAULT <statement7> SW.END Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 86 De Re BASIC!

87 The value of the argument of Sw.begin is compared to the argument of each Sw.case in order. If any Sw.case matches the Sw.begin, the statements following the matching Sw.case is executed; if no Sw.case matches, the statements after Sw.default are executed. Once BASIC! starts to execute the statements of a Sw.case or Sw.default, it continues execution until it finds a Sw.break or the Sw.end, ignoring any other Sw.case or Sw.default it may encounter. Sw.break causes a jump to the Sw.end. In the example: if the value of a is 1, then <statement1> through <statement2> execute if the value of a is 2 or 4, then <statement3> through <statement4> execute if the value of a is less than 0, then <statement5> through <statement6> execute if a has any other value (3, or more than 4) then <statement7> executes. A Sw.begin must be followed by a Sw.end, and all of the Sw.case and the Sw.default (if there is one) for the same switch must appear between them. A set of switch commands is treated as a single unit, just as if BASIC! were compiled. Nesting Switch Operations Switches can be nested. The block of statements following a Sw.case or Sw.default may include a full set of switch commands. The nested switch begins with another Sw.begin and ends with another Sw.end, with its own Sw.case and Sw.default statements in between. You can nest other switches inside nested switches, for as many levels as you want. If you prefer, you may put the inner switch operations in a labeled Gosub routine or a User-defined Function, and put the Gosub or function call in the Sw.case or Sw.default block. This may make your code easier to read, and it will also make the initial scan of the switch a little faster. Sw.begin <exp> Begins a switch operation. BASIC! scans forward until it reaches a Sw.end, locating all Sw.case, Sw.break, and Sw.default statements between the Sw.begin and the Sw.end. The numeric or string expression <exp> is evaluated. Its value is then compared to the expression(s) in each Sw.case statement, in order. BASIC! uses to result of the compares to decide which statement to execute next. IF this condition is met: One or more Sw.Case statement(s) match the Sw.Begin No Sw.Case matches AND a Sw.default exists No Sw.Case matches AND no Sw.default exists THEN jump to the statement after the first matching Sw.case. after the Sw.default. after the Sw.end. There are two forms of Sw.case. You may freely mix both forms. Each form defines what it means to "match" Sw.begin. Only the first matching Sw.case has any effect. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 87 De Re BASIC!

88 Sw.case <exp>,... This form of Sw.case provides a list of one or more expressions. A Sw.case of this form matches the Sw.begin if the value of at least one of the expressions exactly equals the value of the Sw.begin parameter. The type of the Sw.begin and Sw.case parameter(s), numeric or string, must match. Sw.case <op><exp> The first form of Sw.case, above, matches the Sw.begin if the value of any of its parameters equals the value of the Sw.begin parameter. This second form can take only one expression <exp>, but it lets you specify a different logical operator <op>. You may use any of these comparison operators: < <= > >= <> For example: SW.BEGIN a SW.CASE < b % This SW.CASE matches if a < b The expression <exp> may be arbitrarily complex. The whole expression is evaluated as if written: <value of Sw.begin argument> <op> <exp> Operator precedence is applied as usual. Sw.break This statement may be used to terminate the block of statements that follows Sw.case or Sw.default. The Sw.break causes BASIC! to jump forward to the Sw.end statement, skipping everything between. If no Sw.break is present in a particular Sw.case then subsequent Sw.cases will be executed until a Sw.break or Sw.end is encountered. Sw.default This statements acts like a Sw.case that matches any value. If any Sw.case matches the Sw.begin value, then the Sw.default is ignored, even if the matching Sw.case is after the Sw.default. A switch is not required to have a Sw.default, but it must not have more than one. A second Sw.default in the same switch is a syntax error. Sw.end The Sw.end terminates a switch operation. Sw.end must eventually follow a Sw.begin. Interrupt Labels (Event Handlers) You can perform physical actions that tell your BASIC! program to do something. When you touch the screen or press a key you cause an event. These events are asynchronous, that is, they happen at times your program cannot predict. BASIC! detects some events so your program can respond to them. BASIC! handles events as interrupts. Each event that BASIC! recognizes has a unique Interrupt Label. When an event occurs, BASIC! looks for the Interrupt Label that matches the event. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 88 De Re BASIC!

89 If you have not written that Interrupt Label into your program, the event is ignored and your program goes on running as if nothing happened. If you have included the right Interrupt Label for the event, BASIC! jumps to that label and continues execution at the line after the label. This is called trapping the event. BASIC! does not necessarily respond to the event as soon as it occurs. The statement that is executing when the event occurs is allowed to complete, then BASIC! jumps to the Interrupt Label. When you use an Interrupt Label to trap an event, BASIC! executes instructions until it finds a Resume command that matches the Interrupt Label. During that time, it records other events but it does not respond to them. The block of code between the Interrupt Label and the matching Resume may be called an Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) or, if you prefer, an Event Handler. When BASIC! executes the event s Resume command, it resumes normal execution. BASIC! jumps back to where it was running when the interrupt occurred. BASIC! again responds to other events, including any that occurred while it was handling an event. An Interrupt Label looks and behaves just like any other label in BASIC!. However, you must not execute any of the Resume commands except to finish an event s handler. All Interrupt Labels BASIC! supports trapping of the following events. These interrupt labels and their Resume commands are described in various parts of this manual. OnBackground: Background.resume OnBackKey: Back.resume OnBtReadReady: Bt.onReadReady.resume OnConsoleTouch: ConsoleTouch.resume OnError: None (not a true event, see OnError:, below) OnGrTouch: Gr.onGrTouch.resume OnKbChange: Kb.resume OnKeyPress: Key.resume OnLowMemory: LowMemory.resume OnMenuKey: MenuKey.resume OnTimer: Timer.resume OnError: Special interrupt label that traps a run-time error as if it were an event, except that: OnError: has no matching Resume command. You can use GoTo to jump anywhere in your program. OnError: is not locked out by other interrupts. OnError: does not lock out other interrupts. If a BASIC! program does not have an OnError: label and an error occurs while the program is running, an error message is printed to the Output Console and the program stops running. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 89 De Re BASIC!

90 If the program does have an OnError: label, BASIC! does not stop on an error. Instead, it jumps to the OnError: label (see "Interrupt Labels", above). The error message is not printed, but it can be retrieved by the GETERROR$() function. Be careful. An infinite loop will occur if a run-time error occurs within the OnError: code. You should not place an OnError: label into your program until the program is fully debugged. Premature use of OnError: will make the program difficult to debug. OnConsoleTouch: Interrupt label that traps a tap on a line printed on the Output Console. BASIC! executes the statements following the OnConsoleTouch: label until it reaches a ConsoleTouch.resume. Note that you must touch a line written by a PRINT command, although it may be blank. BASIC! Ignores any touch in the empty area of the screen below the printed lines. After touching a Console line, you may use the Console.Line.Touched command to determine what line of text was touched. This label allows the user to interrupt an executing BASIC! program in Console mode (not in Graphics mode). A common reason for such an interrupt would be to have the program request input via an INPUT statement. See the Sample File, f35_bluetooth.bas, for an example of this. To detect screen touches while in graphics mode, use OnGrTouch:. ConsoleTouch.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnConsoleTouch: interrupt occurred. OnBackKey: Interrupt label that traps the BACK key. BASIC! executes the statements following the OnBackKey: label until it reaches a Back.resume. If a BASIC! program does not have an OnBackKey: label, the BACK key normally halts program execution. If you trap the BACK key with OnBackKey:, the BACK key does not stop your program. You should either terminate the run in the OnBackKey: code or provide another way for the user to tell your program to stop, especially if the program is in Graphics mode where there is no menu. If you do not then there will be no stopping the program (other than using Android Settings or a task killer application). Back.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnBackKey: interrupt occurred. OnMenuKey: Interrupt label that traps the MENU key. BASIC! executes the statements following the OnMenuKey: label until it reaches a MenuKey.resume. Note: This interrupt does not work unless your device has a MENU key. Android devices since Honeycomb typically do not have a MENU key. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 90 De Re BASIC!

91 MenuKey.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnMenuKey: interrupt occurred. OnKeyPress: Interrupt label that traps a tap on any key. BASIC! executes the statements following the OnKeyPress: label until it reaches a Key.resume. Key.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnKeyPress: interrupt occurred. OnLowMemory: Interrupt label that traps the Android "low memory" warning. BASIC! executes the program lines between the OnLowMemory: interrupt label and the LowMemory.resume command. If Android is running out of memory, it may kill applications running in the background, but first it will broadcast a "low memory" warning to all applications. If you do not have an OnLowMemory: label in your program, you will see "Warning: Low Memory" printed on the Console. LowMemory.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnLowMemory: interrupt occured. End{ <msg_sexp>} Prints a message and stops the execution of the program. The default message in "END". You can use the optional <msg_sexp> argument to specify a different message. The empty string ("") prints nothing, not even a blank line. The End statement always stops execution, even if the statement has an error. End statements may be placed anywhere in the program. Exit Causes BASIC! to stop running and exit to the Android home screen. READ DATA RESTORE Commands These commands approximate the READ, DATA and RESTORE commands of Dartmouth Basic. Read.data <number> <string>{,<number> <string>...,<number> <string>} Provides the data value(s) to be read with Read.next. Read.data statements may appear anywhere in the program. You may have as many Read.data statements as you need. Example: Read.data 1,2,3,"a","b","c" Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 91 De Re BASIC!

92 Read.data is equivalent to the DATA statement in Dartmouth Basic. Read.next <var>,... Reads the data pointed to by the internal NEXT pointer into the next variables. The NEXT pointer is initialized to "1" and is incremented by one each time a new value is read. Data values are read in the sequence in which they appeared in the program Read.data statement(s). The data type (number or string) of the variable must match the data type pointed by the NEXT pointer. Example: Read.next a,b,c,c$ Read.next d$,e$ Read.next is equivalent to the READ statement in Dartmouth Basic Read.from <nexp> Sets the internal NEXT pointer to the value of the expression. This command can be set to randomly access the data. The command Read.from 1 is equivalent to the RESTORE command in Dartmouth Basic. Debug Commands The debug commands help you debug your program. The Debug.on command controls execution of all the debug commands. The debug commands are ignored unless the Debug.on command has been previously executed. This means that you can leave all your debug commands in your program and be assured that they will not execute unless you turn debugging on with Debug.on. Debug.on Turns on debug mode. All debug commands will be executed when in the debug mode. Debug.on also enables a simple debugging aid built into BASIC!. If debug is on, and your program entered a loop but did not exit the loop cleanly, you will get a run-time error. See the looping commands (For, While, and Do) for details. Debug.off Turns off debug mode. All debug commands (except Debug.on) will be ignored. When your program exits, the broken-loop checks are not performed. Debug.echo.on Turns on Echo mode. Each line of the running BASIC! program is printed before it is executed. This can be of great help in debugging. The last few lines executed are usually the cause of program problems. The Echo mode is turned off by either the Debug.echo.off or the Debug.off commands. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 92 De Re BASIC!

93 Echo.on Same as Debug.echo.on. Debug.echo.off Turns off the Echo mode. Echo.off Same as Debug.echo.off. Debug.print This command is exactly the same as the Print command except that the print will occur only while in the debug mode. Debug.dump.scalars Prints a list of all the Scalar variable names and values. Scalar variables are the variable names that are not Arrays or Functions. Among other things, this command will help expose misspelled variable names. Debug.dump.array Array[] Dumps the contents of the specified array. If the array is multidimensional the entire array will be dumped in a linear fashion. Debug.dump.bundle <bundleptr_nexp> Dumps the Bundle pointed to by the Bundle Pointer numeric expression. Debug.dump.list <listptr_nexp> Dumps the List pointed to by the List Pointer numeric expression. Debug.dump.stack <stackptr_nexp> Dumps the Stack pointed to by the Stack Pointer numeric expression. Debug.show.scalars Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box prints a list of all the Scalar variable names and values, the line number of the program line just executed and the text of that line. Scalar variables are the variable names that are not Arrays or Functions. Among other things, this command will help expose misspelled variable names. For a description of the dialog box controls, see the Debug.show command, below. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 93 De Re BASIC!

94 Debug.show.array Array[] Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box prints the contents of the specified array, the line number of the program line just executed and the text of that line. If the array is multidimensional the entire array will be displayed in a linear fashion. For a description of the dialog box controls, see the Debug.show command, below. Debug.show.bundle <bundleptr_nexp> Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box prints the Bundle pointed to by the Bundle Pointer numeric expression, the line number of the program line just executed and the text of that line. For a description of the dialog box controls, see the Debug.show command, below. Debug.show.list <listptr_nexp> Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box prints the List pointed to by the List Pointer numeric expression, the line number of the program line just executed and the text of that line. For a description of the dialog box controls, see the Debug.show command, below. Debug.show.stack <stackptr_nexp> Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box prints the Stack pointed to by the Stack Pointer numeric expression, the line number of the program line just executed and the text of that line. For a description of the dialog box controls, see the Debug.show command, below. Debug.watch var,... Gives a list of Scalar variables (not arrays) to be watched. The values of these variables will be shown when the Debug.show.watch command is executed. This command is accumulative, meaning that subsequent calls will add new variables into the watch list. Debug.show.watch Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box lists the values of the variables being watched, the line number of the program line just executed and the text of that line. For a description of the dialog box controls, see the Debug.show command, below. Debug.show.program Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box shows the entire program, with line numbers, as well as a marker pointing to the last line that was executed. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 94 De Re BASIC!

95 Note: the debugger does not stop on a function call. The first line of the function is executed and the marker points to that line. When a Fn.rtn or Fn.end executes, the marker points to the function call. For a description of the dialog box controls, see the Debug.show command, below. Debug.show Pauses the execution of the program and displays a dialog box. The dialog box will contain the result of the last Debug.show.<command> used or by default Debug.show.program. There are three buttons in the dialog: Resume: Resumes execution. Step: Executes the next line while continuing to display the dialog box. View Swap: Opens a new dialog that allows you to choose a different Debug View. The BACK key closes the debug dialog and stops your program. Fonts Your program can use fonts loaded from files. At present, the only way to use a loaded font is with the Gr.Text.SetFont command. Font.load <font_ptr_nvar>, <filename_sexp> Loads a font from the file named by the <filename_sexp>. Returns a pointer to the font in the variable <font_ptr_nvar>. This pointer can be used to refer to the loaded font, for example, in a Gr.Text.SetFont command. If the font file can not be loaded, the pointer will be set to -1. You can call the GETERROR$() function to get an error message. Font.delete {<font_ptr_nexp>} Deletes the previously loaded font specified by the font pointer parameter <font_ptr_nexp>. Any variable that points to the deleted font becomes an invalid font pointer. An attempt to use the deleted font is an error. It is not an error to delete the same font again. If the font pointer is omitted, the command deletes the most-recently loaded font that has not already been deleted. Repeating this operation deletes loaded fonts in last-to-first order. It is not an error to do this when there are no fonts loaded. Font.clear Clears the font list, deleting all previously loaded fonts. Any variable that points to a font becomes an invalid font pointer. An attempt to use any of the deleted fonts is an error. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 95 De Re BASIC!

96 Note: Font.delete leaves a marker in the font list, so pointers to other fonts will not be affected. That is why you can Font.delete the same font more than once. Font.clear clears the entire list, making all font pointer variables invalid. After executing Font.clear, you can t Font.delete any of the cleared fonts. Console I/O Output Console BASIC! has three types of output screens: The Output Console, the Graphics Screen, and the HTML Screen. This section deals with the Output Console. See the section on Graphics for information about the Graphics Screen. See the section on HTML for information aobut the HTML screen. Information is printed to screen using the Print command. BASIC! Run-time error messages are also displayed on this screen. There is no random access to locations on this screen. Lines are printed one line after the other. Although no line numbers are displayed, lines are numbered sequentially as they are printed, starting with 1. These line numbers refer to lines of text output, not to locations on the screen. Print {<exp> {, ;}}...? {<exp> {, ;}}... Evaluates the expression(s) <exp> and prints the result(s) to the Output Console. You can use a question mark (?) in place of the command keyword Print. If the comma (,) separator follows an expression then a comma and a space will be printed after the value of the expression. If the semicolon (;) separator is used then nothing will separate the values of the expressions. If the semicolon is at the end of the line, the output will not be printed until a Print command without a semicolon at the end is executed. Print with no parameters prints a newline. Examples: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 96 De Re BASIC!

97 PRINT "New", "Message" PRINT "New";" Message" PRINT "New" + " Message" % Prints: New, Message % Prints: New Message % Prints: New Message? 100-1; " Luftballons" % Prints: 99.0 Luftballons? FORMAT$("##", 99); " Luftballons" % Prints: 99 Luftballons PRINT "A";"B";"C"; PRINT "D";"E";"F" % Prints: nothing % Prints: ABCDEF Print with User-Defined Functions Note: Some commands, such as Print, can operate on either strings or numbers. Sometimes it has to try both ways before it knows what to do. First it will try to evaluate an expression as a number. If that fails, it will try to evaluate the same expression as a string. If this happens, and the expression includes a function, the function will be called twice. If the function has side-effects, such as printing to the console, writing to a file, or changing a global parameter, the side-effect action will also happen twice. Eventually this problem should be fixed in BASIC!, but until then you should be careful not to call a function, especially a user-defined function, as part of a Print command. Instead, assign the return value of the function to a variable, and then Print the variable. An assignment statement always knows what type of expression to evaluate, so it never evaluates twice.! Do this: y = MyFunction(x) Print y! NOT this: Print MyFunction(x) Cls Clears the Output Console screen. Console.front Brings the Output Console to the front where the user can see it. If BASIC! is running in the background with no screen visible, this command brings it to the foreground. If you have a different application running in the foreground, it will be pushed to the background. If BASIC! is running in the foreground, but the Graphics or HTML screen is in the foreground, this command brings the Console to the foreground. BASIC! remains in Graphics or HTML mode. Console.line.count <count_nvar> Sets the return variable <count_nvar> to the number of lines written to the Console. This command waits for any pending Console writes to complete before reporting the count. Console.line.text <line_nexp>, <text_svar> The text of the specified line number of the Console is copied to the <text_svar>. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 97 De Re BASIC!

98 Console.line.touched <line_nvar> {, <press_lvar>} After an OnConsoleTouch interrupt indicates the user has touched the console, this command returns information about the touch. The number of the line that the user touched is returned in the <line_nvar>. If the optional <press_lvar> is present, the type of user touch a short tap or a long press is returned in the <press_lvar>. Its value will be 0 (false) if the touch was a short tap. Its value will be 1 (true) if the touch was a long press. Console.save <filename_sexp> The current contents of the Console is saved to the text file specified by the filename string expression. Console.title { <title_sexp>} Changes the title of the console window. If the <title_sexp> parameter is omitted, the title is changed to the default title, "BASIC! Program Output". User Input and Interaction This set of commands lets you interact with your programs. At the lowest level, you can use Inkey$ to read raw keystrokes. You control display of the virtual keyboard with Kb.hide, Kb.show, and Kb.toggle. With the Select command you present information in a list format that looks very much like the Output Console. If you prefer, you can use Dialog.Select to present the same information in a new dialog window. Either way, when your program runs, you select an item from the list by tapping a line. The other commands in this group all pop up new windows. Input lets you type a number or a line of text as input to your program. Dialog.message presents a message with a set of buttons to let you tell your program what to do next. Popup is different. It presents information in a small, temporary display. It is not interactive and requires no management in your program. You pop it up and forget it. The last two commands in this group present another kind of dialog window. The Text.input command operates on larger blocks of text, and TGet simulates terminal I/O. Dialog.message {<title_sexp>}, {<message_sexp>}, <sel_nvar> {, <button1_sexp>{, <button2_sexp>{, <button3_sexp>}}} Generates a dialog box with a title, a message, and up to three buttons. When the user taps a button, the number of the selected button is returned in <sel_nvar>. If the user taps the screen outside of the message dialog or presses the BACK key, then the returned value is 0. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 98 De Re BASIC!

99 The string <title_sexp> becomes the title of the dialog box. The string <message_sexp> is displayed in the body of the dialog, above the buttons. The strings <button1_sexp>, <button2_sexp>, and <button3_sexp> provide the labels on the buttons. You may have 0, 1, 2, or 3 buttons. On most devices, the buttons are numbered from right-to-left, because Android style guides recommend the positive action on the right and the negative action on the left. Some devices differ. On compliant devices, tapping the right-most button returns 1. All of the parameters except the selection index variable <sel_nvar> are optional. If any parameter is omitted, the corresponding part of the message dialog is not displayed. Use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). Examples: Dialog.Message "Hey, you!", "Is this ok?", ok, "Sure thing!", "Don t care", "No way!" Dialog.Message "Continue?",, go, "YES", "NO" Dialog.Message, "Continue?", go, "YES", "NO" Dialog.Message,, b The first command displays a full dialog with a title, a message, and three buttons. The second command displays a box with a title and two buttons note that the YES button will be on the right and the NO button on the left. The third displays the same information, but it looks a little different because the text is displayed as the message and not as the title. Note the commas. The fourth command displays nothing at all. The screen dims and your program waits for a tap or the BACK key with no feedback to tell the user what to do. Dialog.select <sel_nvar>, <Array$[]> <list_nexp> {,<title_sexp>} Generates a dialog box with a list of choices for the user. When the user taps a list item, the index of the selected line is returned in the <sel_nvar>. If the user taps the screen outside of the selection dialog or presses the BACK key, then the returned value is 0. <Array$[]> is a string array that holds the list of items to be selected. The array is specified without an index but must have been previously dimensioned or loaded via Array.load. As an alternative to an array, a string-type list may be specified in the <list_nexp>. The <title_sexp> is an optional string expression that will be displayed at the top of the selection dialog. If the parameter is not present, or the expression evaluates to an empty string (""), the dialog box will be displayed with no title. This command also accepts optional <message_sexp> and <press_lvar> parameters like those described in the Select command, but they should not be used. The <message_sexp> is ignored and the <press_lvar> will always be set to 0. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 99 De Re BASIC!

100 Input {<prompt_sexp>}, <result_var>{, {<default_exp>}{, <canceled_nvar>}} Generates a dialog box with an input area and an OK button. When the user taps the button, the value in the input area is written to the variable <result_var>. The <prompt_sexp> will become the dialog box title. If the prompt expression is empty ("") or omitted, the dialog box will be drawn without a title area. If the return variable <result_var> is numeric, the input must be numeric, so the only key taps that will be accepted are 0-9, "+", "-" and ".". If <result_var> is a string variable, the input may be any string. If a <default_exp> is given then its value will be placed into the input area of the dialog box. The default expression type must match the <result_var> type. The variable <canceled_nvar> controls what happens if the user cancels the dialog, either by tapping the BACK key or by touching anywhere outside of the dialog box. If you provide a <canceled_nvar>, its value is set to false (0) if the user taps the OK button, and true (1) if the users cancels the dialog. If you do not provide a <canceled_nvar>, a canceled dialog is reported as an error. Unless there is an "OnError:" the user will see the messages: Input dialog cancelled Execution halted If there is an "OnError:" label, execution will resume at the statement following the label. The <result_var> parameter is required. All others are optional. These are all valid: INPUT "prompt", result$, "default", iscanceled INPUT, result$, "default" INPUT "prompt", result$,, iscanceled INPUT "prompt", result$ INPUT, result$ Note the use of commas as parameter placeholders (see Optional Parameters). Inkey$ <svar> Reports key taps for the a-z, 0-9, Space and the D-Pad keys. The key value is returned in <svar>. The D-Pad keys are reported as "up", "down", "left", "right" and "go". If any key other than those have been tapped, the string "key nn" will be returned. Where nn will be the Android key code for that key. If no key has been tapped, the "@" character is returned in <svar>. Rapid key taps are buffered in case they come faster than the BASIC! program can handle them. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 100 De Re BASIC!

101 Popup <message_sexp> {{, <x_nexp>}{, <y_nexp>}{, <duration_lexp>}} Pops up a small message for a limited duration. The message is <message_sexp>. All of the parameters except the message are optional. If omitted, their default values are 0. Use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). The simplest form of the Popup command, Popup "Hello!", displays the message in the center of the screen for two seconds. The default location for the Popup is the center of the screen. The optional <x_nexp> and <y_nexp> parameters give a displacement from the center. The values may be negative. Select the duration of the Popup, either 2 seconds or 4 seconds, with the optional <duration_lexp> "long flag". If the flag is false (the expression evaluates to 0) the message is visible for 2 seconds. If the flag is true (non-zero) the message is visible for 4 seconds. If the flag is omitted the duration is short. Select <sel_nvar>, <Array$[]> <list_nexp> {,<title_sexp> {, <message_sexp> } } {,<press_lvar> } The Select command generates a new screen with a list of choices for the user. When the user taps a screen line, the index of the selected line is returned in the <sel_nvar>. If the user presses the BACK key, then the returned value is 0. <Array$[]> is a string array that holds the list of items to be selected. The array is specified without an index but must have been previously dimensioned, loaded via Array.load, or created by another command. As an alternative to an array, a string-type list may be specified in the <list_nexp>. The <title_sexp> is an optional string expression that is placed into the title bar at the top of the selection screen. If the parameter is not present, the screen displays a default title. If the expression evaluates to an empty string ("") the title is blank. The <message_sexp> is an optional string expression that is displayed in a short Popup message. If the message is an empty string ("") there is no Popup. If the parameter is absent, the <title_sexp> string is used instead, but if the <title_sexp> is also missing or empty, there is no Popup. The <press_lvar> is optional. If present, the type of user tap long or short is returned in <press_lvar>. The value returned is 0 (false) if the user selected the item with a short tap. The value returned is 1 (true) if the user selected the item with a long press. Use commas to indicate omitted optional parameters (see Optional Parameters). Text.input <svar>{, { <text_sexp>}, <title_sexp> } This command is similar to "Input" except that it is used to input and/or edit a large quantity of text. It opens a new window with scroll bars and full text editing capabilities. You may set the title of the new window with the optional <title_sexp> parameter. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 101 De Re BASIC!

102 If the optional <text_sexp> is present then that text is loaded into the text input window for editing. If <text_sexp> is not present then the text.input text area will be empty. If <title_sexp> is needed but text.input text area is to be initially empty, use two commas to indicate the <sexp> specifies the title and not the initial text. When done editing, tap the Finish button. The edited text is returned in <svar>. If you tap the BACK key then all text editing is discarded. <svar> returns the original <sexp> text. The following example grabs the Sample Program file, f01_commands.bas, to string s$. It then sends s$ to text.input for editing. The result of the edit is returned in string r$. r$ is then printed to console. GRABFILE s$, "../source/ Sample_Programs/f01_commands.bas" TEXT.INPUT r$,s$ PRINT r$ END TGet <result_svar>, <prompt_sexp> {, <title_sexp>} Simulates a terminal. The current contents of the Output Console is displayed in a new window. The last line displayed starts with the prompt string followed by the cursor. The user types in the input and taps enter. The characters that the user typed in is returned in <result_svar>. The prompt and response are displayed on the Output Console. You may set the title of the text input window with the optional <title_sexp> parameter. Kb.hide Hides the soft keyboard. If the keyboard is showing, and you have an OnKbChange: interrupt label, BASIC! will jump to your interrupt label when the keyboard closes. The soft keyboard is always hidden when your program starts running, regardless of whether it is showing in the Editor. Note: BASIC! automatically hides the soft keyboard when you change screens. For example, if the keyboard is showing over the Output Console, and you execute Gr.open to start Graphics Mode, the keyboard is hidden. The keyboard will not be showing when you exit Graphics Mode and return to the Console. Similarly, if you show the keyboard over your Graphics screen and you execute Gr.close to return to the Console, the keyboard is hidden. If you have an OnKbChange: interrupt label, automatically hiding the keyboard does not trigger a jump to the interrupt label. Kb.show Shows the soft keyboard. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 102 De Re BASIC!

103 If the keyboard is not showing, and you have an OnKbChange: interrupt label, BASIC! will jump to your interrupt label when the keyboard opens. When the soft keyboard is showing, its keys may be read using the Inkey$ command. The command may not work in devices with hard or slide-out keyboards. You cannot show the soft keyboard over the Output Console unless you first Print to the Console. Kb.toggle Toggles the showing or hiding of the soft keyboard. If the keyboard is being shown, it will be hidden. If it is hidden, it will be shown. Kb.showing <lvar> Reports the visibility of the soft keyboard. If the keyboard is showing, the <lvar> is set to 1.0 (true), otherwise the <lvar> is set to 0.0 (false). This command reports only the status of the keyboard shown by Kb.show. For example, the keyboard attached to the Input command dialog box cannot be controlled by Kb.show or Kb.hide and its status is not reported by Kb.showing. OnKbChange: If you show a soft keyboard with Kb.show, or close that same keyboard with Kb.hide or by tapping the BACK key, the change takes some time. The keyboard may open or close a few hundred milliseconds after it is requested. Kb.show and Kb.hide block until the change is complete, but your program does not know when you tap the BACK key. If you have an OnKbChange: interrupt label in your program, then when the keyboard changes as just described, BASIC! interrupts your program and executes the statements after the interrupt label. To return control to where the interrupt occurred, execute Kb.resume in your interrupt handler. This interrupt occurs only for keyboards you show with Kb.show. Keyboards attached to other screens, such as TGet or the Input dialog box, do not cause OnKbChange: interrupts. Kb.resume Resume program execution at the point where the OnKbChange: interrupt occurred. When an interrupt occurs, no other interrupt can occur (except OnError:) until the corresponding resume executes. The Soft Keyboard and the BACK Key If you show a soft keyboard with Kb.show, and you tap the BACK key, the keyboard closes. The current screen (Console or Graphics screen) does not close. BASIC! does not trap the keypress with either OnBackKey: or OnKeyPress:. You can use the OnKbChange: interrupt label to be notified that the keyboard closed. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 103 De Re BASIC!

104 Working with Files Android devices may have several file storage devices. BASIC! uses one of these devices as its base drive. You can select a different base drive in the Menu->Preferences item BASE DRIVE. In this manual, the notation <pref base drive> refers to the base drive you selected in Preferences. BASIC! can work with files anywhere on the base drive, but most file operations are done in BASIC! s base directory. Except when you create a standalone apk file (see Appendix D), the base directory is <pref base drive>/rfo-basic. All file paths are relative to a subdirectory of the base directory. Paths Explained a beginner s guide A path describes where a file or directory is located relative to another directory. A file is a container for data. A directory is a container for files and other directories. 1 A directory that is in a directory may have other directories in it, and those directories may contain other directories, and so on. This results in a "tree" of directories and files, called a file system. A file system organizes data on a storage device, such as a disk or a memory card. Absolute paths: A path that is relative to the root directory is called an absolute path. For example, the absolute path to pictures you take with an Android camera may be "/sdcard/dcim/camera". In BASIC!, the base directory is not a root directory, so BASIC! does not use absolute paths. Relative paths: A path that is relative to anything except the root directory is called a relative path. Starting from "/sdcard", the relative path down to Camera is "DCIM/Camera". Use the "../" path notation to go back up: from Camera, the path to "/sdcard/dcim" is ".." and to "/sdcard" is "../..". The relative path from "/sdcard/dcim/camera" to "/sdcard/dcim/.thumbnails" is "../.thumbnails". With this notation, you can reach any file in the file system. All paths in BASIC! are relative to a default path that depends on the kind of data you want to use. These default paths are explained in the next section. Paths in BASIC! BASIC! files are stored in subdirectories of the base directory, "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/". Files are grouped by type, as follows: BASIC! program files are in rfo-basic/source/ BASIC! data files are in rfo-basic/data/ BASIC! SQLite databases are in rfo-basic/databases/ All of the BASIC! file commands assume a certain default path. The default path depends on the type of file each command expects to handle: 1 This container is called a "directory" because it is a listing of the items it contains. You can also call it a "folder", and you can say "a folder is a container for files and other folders." Both expressions mean the same thing. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 104 De Re BASIC!

105 The Include and Run commands expect to load program files, so they look in rfo-basic/source/. SQLite operations look for database files in rfo-basic/databases/. All other file operations look for data files in rfo-basic/data/. If you give a filename to a file command, it looks for that filename in the default directory for commands of that type. If you want to work with a file that is not in that directory, you must specify a relative path to the appropriate directory. BASIC! adds your path to the default path. To read the file "names.txt" in "rfo-basic/data/", the path is "names.txt". To read the program file "sines.bas" in "rfo-basic/source", the path is "../source/sines.bas". Paths Outside of BASIC! BASIC! runs on an Android device, and its files are part of the Android file system. You can use relative paths to access files outside of the base directory. To continue the example from the previous section, assume the absolute Android path to the <pref base drive> is "/sdcard": To read the music file "rain.mp3" in "/sdcard/music/", the BASIC! path is "../../music/rain.mp3". The path is relative to the default directory for general data "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". Use care when writing paths that look up from the <pref base drive>. The directory name may not be what you expect, and it may not be the same on all Android devices. Every file on an Android device has an absolute path. Unfortunately, on most Android devices every file has several absolute paths. The default <pref base drive> can be reached with the absolute Android path "/sdcard". The name "sdcard" is a shortcut (a symbolic link) that means different things on different devices. "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/../" may not get to the Android directory "/sdcard", but to something like "/storage/emulated/legacy". You can use the command File.root to get the absolute Android path to the BASIC! <pref base drive>. Paths and Case-sensitivity While the Android file system is normally case-sensitive. However, the FAT file system, often used on SD cards, memory sticks, etc., is case-insensitive. When handling files on these devices, Android and therefore BASIC! can not differentiate between names that differ only in case. In your BASIC! program, the two paths "../../music/rain.mp3" and "../../MUSIC/Rain.MP3" will both access the same file. The rules change if you compile the same BASIC! program into a standalone apk (see Appendix D). The file system inside the apk is case-sensitive. The paths "../../music/rain.mp3" and"../../music/rain.mp3" access different files. If the actual path in your build project is "Assets/<project>/MUSIC/Rain.MP3", then using the second path would succeed, but the first path would fail. To prevent any error, it is good practice to match case exactly in file paths and names. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 105 De Re BASIC!

106 Mark and Mark Limit Note: This is an advanced file management technique that you will rarely need to use. However, see the note below about Out of Memory errors when reading very large files. Every file has a mark and a mark limit. The mark is a position, and the mark limit is a size. As you read a file, its data is copied into a buffer. The buffer starts at the mark, and its length is the mark limit. BASIC! uses the buffer to allow you to reposition within the file. You are really repositioning within the buffer. If you do not mark a file, then the first time you read it or set a position in it, the mark is set at position 1 and the mark limit is set to the size of the file. This allows you to position and read anywhere in the file. The Text.position.mark and Byte.position.mark commands override the default mark and mark limit. You can change the mark and mark limit as often as you like, but there is only one mark in a file. You cannot set a position before the mark. If you try, the file will be positioned at the mark. You will not be notified that the current position is different from what you requested, but you can use Text/Byte.position.get to determine the real position. Since the default mark position is 1, you can position anywhere if you never set a mark. You cannot make the buffer smaller. If you want the buffer to be smaller than the file, you must execute Text/Byte.position.mark before reading the file or setting a position. The smallest buffer size available is 8096 bytes, but it is not an error to specify a smaller number. Since the default mark limit is the file size, you can position anywhere if you never set a mark limit. If you read or position past the end of the buffer (more than marklimit bytes beyond the the mark), the mark is invalid. It is an error to try to move the position backward when the mark is invalid. You will see the error message "Invalid mark". Since the default buffer is the whole file, you will never see this error if you never set a mark. There is only one condition that requires you to use this command. If you open a very large file, the default buffer size may be too large. Reading or positioning to the end of the file may cause an Out Of Memory error. To avoid this error, your must use Text.position.mark to reduce the buffer size. File Commands File.delete <lvar>, <path_sexp> The file or directory at <path_sexp> will be deleted, if it exists. If the file or directory did not exist before the Delete, the <lvar> will contain zero. If the file or directory did exist and was deleted, the <lvar> will be returned as not zero. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 106 De Re BASIC!

107 File.dir <path_sexp>, Array$[] {,<dirmark_sexp>} Returns the names of the files and directories in the path specified by <path_sexp>. The path is relative to "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The names are placed into Array$[]. The array is sorted alphabetically with the directories at the top of the list. If the array exists, it is overwritten, otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a onedimensional array. A directory is identified by a marker appended to its name. The default marker is the string "(d)". You can change the marker with the optional directory mark parameter <dirmark_sexp>. If you do not want directories to be marked, set <dirmark_sexp> to an empty string, "". Dir is a valid alias for this command. File.exists <lvar>, <path_sexp> Reports if the <path_sexp> directory or file exists. If the directory or file does not exist, the <lvar> will contain zero. If the file or directory does exist, the <lvar> will be returned as not zero. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". File.mkdir <path_sexp> Before you can use a directory, the directory must exist. Use this command to create a directory named by the path string <path_sexp>. The new directory is created relative to the default directory "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". For example: To create a new directory, "homes", in "<pref base drive>/rfo_basic/data/", use the path "homes/", or simply "homes". To create a new directory, "icons", in the root directory of the SD card, use "../../icons". Mkdir is a valid alias for this command. File.rename <old_path_sexp>, <new_path_sexp> The file or directory at old_path is renamed to new_path. If there is already a file present named <new_path_sexp>, it is silently replaced. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The rename operation can not only change the name of a file or a directory, it can also move the file or directory to another directory. For example: Rename "../../testfile.txt", "testfile1.txt" Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 107 De Re BASIC!

108 removes the file, testfile.txt, from "<pref base drive>/", places it into "sdcard/rfo-basic/data/" and also renames it to testfile1.txt. Rename is a valid alias for this command. File.root <svar> Returns the canonical path from the file system root to "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data", the default data directory, in <svar>. The <pref base drive> is expanded to the full absolute Android path from the file system root, "/". You cannot use this path in any BASIC! command, as BASIC! paths are relative to a command-dependent default directory. However, you can use it to compute a relative path to parts of the Android file system outside of the BASIC! <pref base drive>. File.size <size_nvar>, <path_sexp> The size, in bytes, of the file at <path_sexp> is returned in <size_nvar>. If there is no file at <path_sexp>, this command generates a run-time error. The <path_sexp> is appended to the default path, "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". File.type <type_svar>, <path_sexp> Returns a one-character type indicator in <type_svar> for the file at <path_sexp>. The <path_sexp> is appended to the default data path, "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The type indicator values are: Indicator: "d" "f" "o" "x" Meaning: "directory" path names a directory "file" path names a regular file "other" path names a special file file does not exist Text File I/O The text file I/O commands are to be exclusively used for text (.txt) files. Text files are made up of lines of characters that end in CR (Carriage Return) and/or NL (New Line). The text file input and output commands read and write entire lines. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/" Text.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp> The file specified by the path string expression <path_sexp> is opened. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The <path_sexp> string is appended to the default path. The first parameter is a single character that sets the I/O mode for this file: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 108 De Re BASIC!

109 Parameter Mode Notes r read File exists: Reads from the start of the file. File does not exist: Error (see below). w write File exists: Writes from the start of the file. Writes over any existing data. File does not exist: Creates a new file. Writes from the start of the file. a append File exists: Writing starts after the last line in the file. File does not exist: Creates a new file. Writes from the start of the file. A file table number is placed into the numeric variable <file_table_nvar>. This value is for use in subsequent Text.readln, Text.writeln, Text.eof, Text.position.*, or Text.close commands. If a file being opened for read does not exist then the <file_table_nvar> will be set to -1. The BASIC! programmer can check for this and either create the file or report the error to the user. Information about the error is available from the GETERROR$() function. Opening a file for append that does not exist creates an empty file. Finally, opening a file for write that already exists deletes the contents of the file; that is, it replaces the existing file with a new, empty one. Text.close <file_table_nexp> The previously opened file represented by <file_table_nexp> will be closed. Note: It is essential to close an output file if you have written over 8k bytes to it. If you do not close the file then the file will only contain the first 8k bytes. Text.readln <file_table_nexp> {,<svar>}... Read the lines from the specified, previously opened file and write them into the <svar> parameter(s). If <file_table_nexp> is -1, indicating Text.open failed, or if it is not a valid file table number, then the command throws a run-time error. After the last line in the file has been read, further attempts to read from the file place the characters "EOF" into the <line_svar> parameter(s). This is indistinguishable from the string "EOF" read as actual data, except that the result of the Text.eof command will be false after reading real data and true after reading at end-of-file (EOF). This example reads an entire file and prints each line. TEXT.OPEN r, file_number, "testfile.txt" DO TEXT.READLN file_number, line$ PRINT line$ UNTIL line$ = "EOF" TEXT.CLOSE file_number The file will not automatically be closed when the end-of-file is read. Subsequent reads from the file will continue to return "EOF". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 109 De Re BASIC!

110 When you are done reading a file, the Text.close command should be used to close the file. Text.writeln <file_table_nexp>, <parms same as Print> The parameters that follow the file table pointer are parsed and processed exactly the same as the Print command parameters. This command is essentially a Print to a file. If a parameter line ends with a semicolon, the data is not written to the file. It is stored in a temporary buffer until the next Text.writeln command that does not end in a semicolon. There is only one temporary buffer no matter how many files you have open. If you want to build partial print lines for more than one file at a time, do not use Text.writeln commands ending with semicolons. Instead use string variables to store the temporary results. After the last line has been written to the file, the Text.close command should be used to close the file. Text.writeln with no parameters writes a newline. Text.eof <file_table_nexp>, <lvar> Report an opened file s end-of-file status. If the file is at EOF, the <lvar> is set true (non-zero). If the file or directory is not at EOF, the <lvar> is set false (zero). A file opened for write or append is always at EOF. A file opened for read is not at EOF until all of the data has been read and then one more read is attempted. That read will have returned the string "EOF". Text.position.set may also position the file at EOF. Text.position.get <file_table_nexp>, <position_nvar> Get the position of the next line to be read or written to the file. The position of the first line in the file is 1. The position is incremented by one for each line read or written. The position information can be used for setting up random file data access. Note: If a file is opened for append, the position returned will be relative to the end of the file. The position returned for the first line to be written after a file is opened for append will be 1. You will have to add these new positions to the known position of the end of the file when building your random access table. Text.position.set <file_table_nexp>, <position_nexp> Sets the position of the next line to read. A position value of 1 will read the first line in the file. Text.position.set can only be used for files open for text reading. If the position value is greater than the number of lines in the file, the file will be positioned at the end of file. The position returned for Text.position.get at the EOF will be number of lines plus one in the file. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 110 De Re BASIC!

111 If you have marked a position in the file, you cannot set a position before the mark. You will not be notified that the position is different from what you requested. See Text.position.mark for more information. Text.position.mark {{<file_table_nexp>}{, <marklimit_nexp>}} Marks the current line of the file, and sets the mark limit to <marklimit_nexp> bytes. Both parameters are optional. If the file table index <file_table_nexp> is omitted, the default file is the last file opened; you must ensure that the last file opened was a Text file opened for reading. If the mark limit <marklimit_exp> is omitted, the default value is the file s current mark limit. Please read Working with Files Mark and Mark Limit, above. GrabURL <result_svar>, <url_sexp>{, <timeout_nexp>} Copies the entire source text of the URL <url_sexp> to the string variable <result_svar>. The URL may specify an Internet resource or a local file. If the URL does not exist or the data cannot be read, the <result_svar> is set to the empty string, "", and you can use the GETERROR$() function to get more information. If the optional <timeout_nexp> parameter is non-zero, it specifies a timeout in milliseconds. This is meaningful only if the URL names a resource on a remote host. If the timeout time elapses and host does not connect or does not return any data, GETERROR$ reports a socket timeout. If the named resource is empty, the <result_svar> is empty, "", and GETERROR$() returns "No error". The Split command can be used to split the <result_svar> into an array of lines. GrabFile <result_svar>, <path_sexp>{, <unicode_flag_lexp>} Copies the entire contents of the file at <path_sexp> to the string variable <result_svar>. By default, GrabFile assumes that the file contains binary bytes or ASCII characters. If the optional <unicode_flag_lexp> evaluates to true (a non-zero numeric value), GrabFile can read Unicode text. If the file does not exist or cannot be opened, the <result_svar> is set to the empty string, "", and you can use the GETERROR$() function to get more information. If the file is empty, the <result_svar> is an empty string, "", but GETERROR$() returns "No error". For text files, either ASCII or Unicode, the Split command can be used to split the <result_svar> into an array of lines. GrabFile can also be used grab the contents of a text file for direct use with Text.input: GRABFILE text$, "MyJournal.txt" TEXT.INPUT EditedText$, text$ Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 111 De Re BASIC!

112 Byte File I/O Byte file I/O can be used to read and write any type of file (.txt,.jpg,.pdf,.mp3, etc.). Each command reads or writes one byte or a sequence of bytes as binary data. Byte.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp> The file specified by the path string expression <path_sexp> is opened. If the path is a URL starting with "http " then an Internet file is opened. Otherwise, the <path_sexp> string is appended to the default path "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The first parameter is a single character that sets the I/O mode for this file: Parameter Mode Notes r read File exists: Reads from the start of the file. File does not exist: Error (see below). w write File exists: Writes from the start of the file. Writes over any existing data. File does not exist: Creates a new file. Writes from the start of the file. a append File exists: Writing starts after the last line in the file. File does not exist: Creates a new file. Writes from the start of the file. A file table number is placed into the numeric variable <file_table_nvar>. This value is for use in subsequent Byte.read.*, Byte.write.*, Byte.eof, Byte.position.*, Byte.truncate, Byte.copy, or Byte.close commands. If a file being opened for read does not exist then the <file_table_nvar> will be set to -1. The BASIC! program can check for this and either create the file or report the error to the user. Information about the error is available from the GETERROR$() function. Byte.close <file_table_nexp> Closes the previously opened file. Byte.read.byte <file_table_nexp> {,<nvar>}... Reads bytes from a file. The <file_table_nexp> parameter is a file table number returned by a previous Byte.open. If the file number is -1 then the command throws a run-time error. Places the byte(s) into the <nvar> parameter(s) as positive values, 0 <= byte <= 255. After the last byte in the file has been read, further attempts to read from the file return the value -1. The result of the Byte.eof command will be false after reading real data and true after reading at end-of-file (EOF). This example reads a file and prints each byte, and prints "-1" at the end to show that the entire file has been read. BYTE.OPEN r, file_number, "testfile.jpg" DO BYTE.READ.BYTE file_number, Byte Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 112 De Re BASIC!

113 PRINT Byte UNTIL Byte < 0 BYTE.CLOSE file_number Byte.write.byte <file_table_nexp> {{,<nexp>}...{,<sexp>}} Writes bytes to the file specified by the file number parameter <file_table_nexp>. The bytes are written from an optional comma-separated list of numeric expressions, a single optional string expression, or both. Numeric parameters: the command writes the low-order 8 bits of the value of each expression as a single byte. String parameters: the command writes the entire string to the file. Each character of the string is written as a single byte. See Byte.write.buffer for more information. If you have both numeric and string parameters, you may have only one string, and it must be last. The command accepts a string for backward compatibility. Byte.write.buffer is preferred. Examples: Byte.open w, f1, "tmp.dat" Byte.write.byte f1, 10 Byte.write.byte f1, 11, 12, 13 Byte.write.byte f1, "Hello!" Byte.write.byte f1, 1,2,3,"abc" Byte.write.byte f1, "one", "two" % create a file % write one byte % write three bytes % write six bytes % write six bytes % syntax error: only one string allowed Note: If the bytes are written from a string expression then the expression is evaluated twice. You should not put calls to user-defined functions in the expression. Byte.read.number <file_table_nexp> {,<nvar>...} Reads numbers from the file specified by the file number parameter <file_table_nexp> and places them into the numeric variables in the "{,<nvar>}..." parameter list. Each number is a group of 8 bytes. If the file does not have enough data available for all of the variables, the value of one or more <nvar> will be set to -1. This is indistinguishable from -1 read as actual data, except that the result of the Byte.eof command will be false for real data and true for EOF. Normally this command is used only to read values written with Byte.write.number. You must be sure the file is positioned at the first byte of the eight-byte representation of a number, or you will get unexpected results. Byte.write.number <file_table_nexp> {,<nexp>}... Writes the values of the numeric expressions <nexp> to the file specified by the file number parameter <file_table_nexp>. This command always writes 8 bytes for each expression in the parameter list. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 113 De Re BASIC!

114 Byte.read.buffer <file_table_nexp>, <count_nexp>, <buffer_svar> Reads the specified number of bytes (<count_nexp>) into the buffer string variable (<buffer_svar>) from the file. The string length (len(<buffer_svar>)) will be the number of bytes actually read. If the end of file is reached, the string length may be less than the requested count. A buffer string is a special use of the BASIC! string. Each character of a string is 16 bits. When used as a buffer, one byte of data is written into the lower 8 bits of each 16-bit character. The upper 8 bits are 0. Extract the binary data from the string, one byte at a time, with the ASCII() or UCODE() functions. The format of the buffer string read by this command is compatible with the DECODE$() function. If you know that part of your data contains an encoded string, you can extract the substring (using a function like MID$()), then pass the substring to DECODE$() to convert it to a BASIC! string. Byte.write.buffer <file_table_nexp>, <buffer_sexp> Writes the entire contents of the string expression to the file. The string is assumed to be a buffer string holding binary data, as described in Byte.read.buffer. The writer discards the upper 8 bits of each 16-bit character, writing one byte to the file for each character in the string. The Byte.read.buffer command and the ENCODE$() function always create these "buffer strings". You can construct one by using, for example, the CHR$() function with values less than 256. If you use only ASCII characters in a string, you can use this function to write the string to a file. The output is the same as if you had written it with Text.writeln, except that it will have no added newline. Byte.eof <file_table_nexp>, <lvar> Reports an opened file s end-of-file status. If the file is at EOF, the <lvar> is set true (non-zero). If the file or directory is not at EOF, the <lvar> is set false (zero). A file opened for write or append is always at EOF. A file opened for read is not at EOF until all of the data has been read and then one more read is attempted. That read will have returned the value -1. Byte.position.set may also position the file at EOF. Byte.position.get <file_table_nexp>, <position_nvar> Gets the position of the next byte to be read or written. The position of the first byte is 1. The position value will be incremented by 1 for each byte read or written. The position information can be used for setting up random file data access. If the file is opened for append, the position returned will be the length of the file plus one. Byte.position.set <file_table_nexp>, <position_nexp> Sets the position of the next byte to be read from the file. If the position value is greater than the position of the last byte of the file, the position will point to the end of file. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 114 De Re BASIC!

115 This command can only be used on files open for byte read. Byte.position.mark {{<file_table_nexp>}{, <marklimit_nexp>}} Marks the current position in the file, and sets the mark limit to <marklimit_nexp> bytes. Both parameters are optional. If the file table index <file_table_nexp> is omitted, the default file is the last file opened; you must ensure that the last file opened was a Byte file opened for reading. If the mark limit <marklimit_exp> is omitted, the default value is the file s current mark limit. Please read Working with Files Mark and Mark Limit, above. Byte.truncate <file_table_nexp>,<length_nexp> Truncates the file to <length_nexp> bytes and closes the file. Setting the truncate length <length_nexp> larger than the current length (current write position - 1) has no effect. This command can only be used on files open for byte write or append. Byte.copy <file_table_nexp>,<output_file_sexp> Copies the previously open input file represented by <file_table_nexp> to the file whose path is specified by <output_file_sexp>. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". If <file_table_nexp> = -1 then a run-time error will be thrown. All bytes from the current position of the input file to its end are copied to the to the output file. Both files are then closed. If you have read from the input file, and you want to copy the whole file, you must reset the file position to 0 with Byte.position.set. However, if you have changed the file mark with Byte.position.mark, or if you reading a non-local (internet) file, you can t reset the file position to 0. Instead, you must close and reopen the file. You should use Byte.copy if you are using Byte I/O for the sole purpose of copying. It is thousands (literally) of times faster than using Byte.read/Byte.write. ZIP File I/O The ZIP file I/O commands work with compressed files. ZIP is an archive file format that stores multiple directories and files, using a method of lossless data compression to save file space. Use Zip.dir to get an array containing the names of all of the directories and files in an archive. Use the file names with Zip.read to extract files from the archive. Zip.read can not extract a directory. Use Zip.write to put files in a new archive. You can overwrite an existing ZIP file, but you cannot replace or add entries. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 115 De Re BASIC!

116 Zip.count <path_sexp>, <nvar> Returns the number of entries inside the ZIP file located at <path_sexp>. The path is relative to "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The count is returned in the <nvar>. If the ZIP file does not exist, the returned count is 0. Zip.dir <path_sexp>, Array$[] {,<dirmark_sexp>} Returns the names of the files and directories inside the ZIP file located at <path_sexp>. The path is relative to "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The names are placed into Array$[]. The array is sorted alphabetically with the directories at the top of the list. If the array exists, it is overwritten, otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a onedimensional array. A directory is identified by a marker appended to its name. The default marker is the string "(d)". You can change the marker with the optional directory mark parameter <dirmark_sexp>. If you do not want directories to be marked, set <dirmark_sexp> to an empty string, "". Zip.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp> The ZIP file specified by the path string expression <path_sexp> is opened. The path is relative to "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The first parameter is a single character that sets the I/O mode for this file: Parameter Mode Notes r read File exists: Reads from the start of the file. File does not exist: Error (see below). w write File exists: Writes from the start of the file. Writes over any existing data. File does not exist: Creates a new file. Writes from the start of the file. Note: unlike Text.open and Byte.open, Zip.open does not support append mode. A file table number is placed into the numeric variable <file_table_nvar>. This value is for use in subsequent Zip.read, Zip.write, or Zip.close commands. If there was an error opening the ZIP file, <file_table_nvar> is set to -1 with details available from the GETERROR$() function. Zip.close <file_table_nexp> Closes the previously opened ZIP file. Zip.read <file_table_nexp>,<buffer_svar>, <file_name_sexp> Reads the content of the file <file_name_sexp> from inside a ZIP file and puts the result byte(s) inside the buffer string variable <buffer_svar>. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 116 De Re BASIC!

117 The <file_table_nexp> parameter is a file table number returned by a previous Zip.open command. If the file number is -1 then the command throws a run-time error. If the file <file_name_sexp> is not found in the ZIP, <buffer_svar> is set to "EOF". If the user tries to read the content of a zipped directory, instead of a zipped file, then the command throws a run-time error. To read the contents of a zipped directory, use Zip.dir. Zip.write <file_table_nexp>,<buffer_sexp>, <file_name_sexp> Writes the entire contents of the string expression <buffer_sexp> into a ZIP, as a file named <file_name_sexp>. The ZIP is in a file previously opened with Zip.open. The string <buffer_sexp> is assumed to be a buffer string holding binary data, typically a string coming from reading a local file with Byte.read.buffer. HTML Introduction The BASIC! HTML package is designed to allow the BASIC! programmer to create user interfaces using HTML and JavaScript. The interface provides for interaction between the HTML engine and BASIC!. The HTML programmer can use JavaScript to send messages to BASIC!. The HTML engine will also report user events such as the BACK key, hyperlink transfers, downloads, form data and errors. The demo program, f37_html_demo.bas, combined with the HTML demo files, htmldemo1.html and htmldemo2.html, illustrate the various commands and possibilities. The content of all three files are listed in the Appendix B of this document. They are also delivered with the BASIC! apk. It is highly recommended that all three files be carefully studied to fully understand this interface. Another demo program, f38_html_edit.bas, can be used to edit html files. To use the program, run it and enter the html file name without the html extension. The program will add the extension ".html". Caution: Forum users have reported problems in HTML mode with commands that use a new window or screen to interact with the user (Input, Select and others), or when using the BACK key to try to control actions outside of the HTML WebView. HTML Commands Html.open {<ShowStatusBar_lexp> {, <Orientation_nexp>}} This command must be executed before using the HTML interface. The Status Bar will be shown on the Web Screen if the <ShowStatusBar_lexp> is true (not zero). If the <ShowStatusBar_lexp> is not present, the Status Bar will not be shown. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 117 De Re BASIC!

118 The orientation upon opening the HTML screen will be determined by the <Orientation_nexp> value. <Orientation_nexp> values are the same as values for the Html.orientation command (see below). If the <Orientation_nexp> is not present, the default orientation is determined by the orientation of the device. Both <ShowStatusBar_lexp> and <Orientation_nexp> are optional; however, a <ShowStatusBar_lexp> must be present in order to specify an <Orientation_nexp>. Executing a second HTML.OPEN before executing HTML.CLOSE will generate a run-time error. Html.orientation <nexp> The value of the <nexp> sets the orientation of screen as follows: -1 = Orientation depends upon the sensors. 0 = Orientation is forced to Landscape. 1 = Orientation is forced to Portrait. 2 = Orientation is forced to Reverse Landscape. 3 = Orientation is forced to Reverse Portrait. Html.load.url <file_sexp> Loads and displays the file specified in the string <file_sexp>. The file may reside on the Internet or on your Android device. In either case, the entire URL must be specified. The command: HTML.LOAD.URL " will load and display the BASIC! home page. The command: HTML.LOAD.URL "htmldemo1.html" will load and display the html file "htmldemo1.html" residing in BASIC!'s default "data" directory, as set by your "Base Drive" preference. You may also use a fully-qualified pathname. With the default "Base Drive" setting, this command loads the same file: HTML.LOAD.URL "file:///sdcard/rfo-basic/data/htmldemo1.html" When you tap the BACK key on the originally-loaded page, the HTML viewer will be closed and the BASIC! output console will be displayed. If the page that was originally loaded links to another page and then the BACK key is tapped, it will be up to the BASIC! programmer to decide what to do. Html.load.string <html_sexp> Loads and displays the HTML contained in the string expression. The base page for this HTML will be: <pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/ Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 118 De Re BASIC!

119 Html.post <url_sexp>, <list_nexp> Execute a Post command to an Internet location. <url_sexp> is a string expression giving the url that will accept the Post. <list_nexp> is a pointer to a string list which contains the Name/Value pairs needed for the Post. Html.get.datalink <data_svar> A datalink provides a method for sending a message from an HTML program to the BASIC! programmer. There are two parts to a datalink in an HTML file: 1. The JavaScript that defines the datalink function 2. The HTML code that calls the datalink function. The BASIC! Program requires a mechanism for communicating with a website's HTML code. Html.get.datalink gets the next datalink string from the datalink buffer. If there is no data available then the returned data will be an empty string (""). You should program a loop waiting for data: DO HTML.GET.DATALINK data$ UNTIL data$ <> "" The returned data string will always start with a specific set of four characters three alphabetic characters followed by a colon (":"). These four characters identify the return datalink data type. Most of the type codes are followed by some sort of data. The codes are: BAK: The user has tapped the BACK key. The data is either "1" or "0". If the data is "0" then the user tapped BACK in the start screen. Going back is not possible therefore HTML has been closed. If the data is "1" then going back is possible. The BASIC! programmer should issue the command Html.go.back if going back is desired. LNK: The user has tapped a hyperlink. The linked-to url is returned. The transfer to the new url has not been done. The BASIC! programmer must execute an Html.load.url with the returned url (or some other url) for a transfer to occur. ERR: Some sort of fatal error has occurred. The error condition will be returned. This error code always closes the html engine. The BASIC! output console will be displayed. FOR: The user has tapped the Submit button on a form with action= FORM The form name/value pairs are returned. DNL: The user has clicked a link that requires a download. The download url is supplied. It is up to the BASIC! programmer to do the download. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 119 De Re BASIC!

120 DAT: The user has performed some action that has caused some JavaScript code to send data to BASIC! by means of the datalink. The JavaScript function for sending the data is: <script type="text/javascript"> function dodatalink(data) { Android.dataLink(data); } </script> Html.go.back Go back one HTML screen, if possible. Html.go.forward Go forward one HTML screen, if possible. Html.close Closes the HTML engine and display. Html.clear.cache Clears the HTML cache. Html.clear.history Clears the HTML history. Related Commands Browse <url_sexp> If <url_sexp> starts with "http " then the internet site specified by <url_sexp> will be opened and displayed. If <url_sexp> starts with "file:///sdcard/... " then the file will be open be opened by the application, ThinkFree Mobile. The file types that the free version of ThinkFree Mobile can open are ".txt,.doc,.xls,.rtf". If your Android device does not already have ThinkFree Mobile Viewer on it, you can find it in the apps section of the Google Play Store. There is also a paid "pro" version that manages additional file types. Note: You can also use the HTML commands to display (and interact with) web pages located on your device or on the web. Http.post <url_sexp>, <list_nexp>, <result_svar> Execute a Post command to an Internet location. <url_sexp> contains the url (" that will accept the Post. <list_nexp> is a pointer to a string list which contains the Name/Value pairs needed for the Post. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 120 De Re BASIC!

121 <result_svar> is where the Post response will be placed. TCP/IP Sockets TCP/IP Sockets provide for the transfer of information from one point on the Internet to another. There are two genders of TCP/IP Sockets: Servers and Clients. Clients must talk to Servers. Servers must talk to Clients. Clients cannot talk to Clients. Servers cannot talk to Servers. Every Client and Server pair have an agreed-upon protocol. This protocol determines who speaks first and the meaning and sequence of the messages that flow between them. Most people who use a TCP/IP Socket will use a Client Socket to exchange messages with an existing Server with a predefined protocol. One simple example of this is the Sample Program file, f31_socket_time.bas. This program uses a TCP/IP client socket to get the current time from one of the many time servers in the USA. A TCP/IP Server can be set up in BASIC!; however, there are difficulties. The capabilities of individual wireless networks vary. Some wireless networks allow servers. Most do not. Servers can usually be run on WiFi or Ethernet Local Area Networks (LAN). If you want to set up a Server, the way most likely to work is to establish the Server inside a LAN. You will need to provide Port tunneling (forwarding) from the LAN s external Internal IP to the device s LAN IP. You must to be able to program (setup) the LAN router in order to do this. Clients, whether running inside the Server s LAN or from the Internet, should connect to the LAN s external IP address using the pre-established, tunneled Port. This external or WAN IP can be found using: Graburl ip$, " This is not the same IP that would be obtained by executing Socket.myIP on the server device. Note: The specified IPs do not have to be in the numeric form. They can be in the name form. The Sample Program, f32_tcp_ip_sockets.bas, demonstrates the socket commands for a Server working in conjunction with a Client. You will need two Android devices to run this program. TCP/IP Client Socket Commands Socket.client.connect <server_sexp>, <port_nexp> {, <wait_lexp> } Create a Client TCP/IP socket and attempt to connect to the Server whose Host Name or IP Address is specified by the Server string expression using the Port specified by Port numeric expression. The optional "wait" parameter determines if this command waits until a connection is made with the Server. If the parameter is absent or true (non-zero), the command will not return until the connection Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 121 De Re BASIC!

122 has been made or an error is detected. If the Server does not respond, the command should time out after a couple of minutes, but this is not certain. If the parameter is false (zero), the command completes immediately. Use Socket.server.status to determine when the connection is made. If you monitor the socket status, you can set your own timeout policy. You must use the Socket.client.close command to stop a connection attempt that has not completed. Socket.client.status <status_nvar> Get the current client socket connection status and place the value in the numeric variable <status_nvar>. 0 = Nothing going on 2 = Connecting 3 = Connected Socket.client.server.ip <svar> Return the IP of the server that this client is connected to in the string variable. Socket.client.read.line <line_svar> Read a line from the previously-connected Server and place the line into the line string variable. The command does not return until the Server sends a line. To avoid an infinite delay waiting for the Server to send a line, the Socket.client.read.ready command can be repeatedly executed with timeouts. Socket.client.read.ready <nvar> If the previously created Client socket has not received a line for reading by Socket.client.read.line then set the return variable <nvar> to zero. Otherwise return a non-zero value. The Socket.client.read.line command does not return until a line has been received from the Server. This command can be used to allow your program to time out if a line has not been received within a pre-determined time span. You can be sure that Socket.client.read.line will return with a line of data if Socket.client.read.ready returns a non-zero value. Socket.client.read.file <file_nexp> Read file data transmitted by the Server and write it to a file. The <file_nexp> is the file index of a file opened for write by Byte.open write command. For example: Byte.open w, fw, "image.jpg" Socket.client.read.file fw Byte.close fw Socket.client.write.line <line_sexp> Send the string expression <line_sexp> to the previously-connected Server as UTF-16 characters. End of line characters will be added to the end of the line. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 122 De Re BASIC!

123 Socket.client.write.bytes <sexp> Send the string expression, <sexp>, to the previously-connected Server as 8-bit bytes. Each character of the string is sent as a single byte. The string is not encoded. No end-of-line characters are added by BASIC!. If you need a CR or LF character, you must make it part of the string. Note that if Socket.server.read.line is used to receive these bytes, the read.line command will not return until it receives a LF (10, 0x0A) character. Socket.client.write.file <file_nexp> Transmit a file to the Server. The <file_nexp> is the file index of a file opened for read by Byte.open. Example: Byte.open r, fr, "image.jpg" Socket.client.write.file fr Byte.close fr Socket.client.close Closes an open client side connection. TCP/IP Server Socket Commands Socket.myIP <svar> Returns the IP of the device in string variable <svar>. If the device has no active IP address, the returned value is the empty string "". If the device is on a WiFi or Ethernet LAN then the IP returned is the device s LAN IP. Note: The external or WAN IP can be found using: Graburl ip$, " Socket.myIP <array$[]>{, <nvar>} Returns all active IP addresses of the device in the string array <array$[]>. If you provide the optional address-count variable <nvar>, it is set to the number of active IP addresses. If the device has no active IP address, the array has a single element, the empty string "", and the address-count in <nvar> is 0. In this case only, the address-count is not the same as the array length. Most devices usually have zero or one IP address. It is possible to have more than one. For example, after enabling a WiFi connection, there may still be an active cellular data connection. Normally this connection shuts down after a short time, but in some cases it may remain open. Socket.server.create <port_nexp> Establish a Server that will listen to the Port specified by the numeric expression, <port_nexp>. Socket.server.connect {<wait_lexp>} Direct the previously created Server to accept a connection from the next client in the queue. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 123 De Re BASIC!

124 The optional "wait" parameter determines if the command waits until a connection is made with a client. If the parameter is absent or true (non-zero), the command waits for the connection. If the parameter is false (zero), the command completes immediately. Use Socket.server.status to determine when the connection is made. In general, it is safer to set the parameter to false (don't wait) and explicitly monitor the connection's status, since it can avoid a problem if the program exits with no connection made. You must use the Socket.server.close command to stop a connection attempt that has not completed. Socket.server.status <status_nvar> Get the current server socket connection status and place the value in the numeric variable <status_nvar>. - 1 = Server socket not created 0 = Nothing going on 1 = Listening 3 = Connected Socket.server.read.line <svar> Read a line sent from the previously-connected Client and place the line into the string variable <svar>. The command does not return until the Client sends a line. To avoid an infinite delay waiting for the Client to send a line, the Socket.server.read.ready command can be repeatedly executed with timeouts. Socket.server.read.ready <nvar> If the previously-connected Client socket has not sent a line for reading by Socket.server.read.line then set the return variable <nvar> to zero. Otherwise return a non-zero value. The Socket.server.read.line command does not return until a line has been received from the Client. This command can be used to allow your program to time out if a line has not been received within a pre-determined time span. You can be sure that Socket.server.read.line will return with a line of data if returns a non-zero value. Socket.server.write.line <line_sexp> Send the string expression <line_sexp> to the previously-connected Client as UTF-16 characters. End of line characters will be added to the end of the line. Socket.server.write.bytes <sexp> Send the string expression, <sexp>, to the previously-connected Client as 8-bit bytes. Each character of the string is sent as a single byte. The string is not encoded. No end of line characters are added by BASIC!. If you need a CR or LF character, you must make it part of the string. Note that if Socket.client.read.line is used to receive these bytes, the read.line command will not return until it receives a LF (10, 0x0A) character. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 124 De Re BASIC!

125 Socket.server.write.file <file_nexp> Transmit a file to the Client. The <file_nexp> is the file index of a file opened for read by Byte.open. Example: Byte.open r, fr, "image.jpg" Socket.server.write.file fr Byte.close fr Socket.server.read.file <file_nexp> Read file data transmitted by the Client and write it to a file. The <file_nexp> is the file index of a file opened for write by Byte.open. Example: Byte.open w, fw, "image.jpg" Socket.server.read.file fw Byte.close fw Socket.server.disconnect Close the connection with the previously-connected Client. A new Socket.server.connect can then be executed to connect to the next client in the queue. Socket.server.close Close the previously created Server. Any currently connected client will be disconnected. Socket.server.client.ip <nvar> Return the IP of the Client currently connected to the Server. FTP Client These FTP commands implement a FTP Client Ftp.open <url_sexp>, <port_nexp>, <user_sexp>, <pw_sexp> Connects to the specified url and port. Logs onto the server using the specified user name and password. For example: Ftp.close ftp.open "ftp.laughton.com", 21, "basic", "basic" Disconnects from the FTP server. Ftp.put <source_sexp>, <destination_sexp> Uploads specified source file to the specified destination file on connected ftp server. The source file is relative to the directory, "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/" If you want to upload a BASIC! source file, the file name string would be: "../source/xxxx.bas". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 125 De Re BASIC!

126 The destination file is relative to the current working directory on the server. If you want to upload to a subdirectory of the current working directory, specify the path to that directory. For example, if there is a subdirectory named "etc" then the filename, "/etc/name" would upload the file into that subdirectory. Ftp.get <source_sexp>, <destination_sexp> The source file on the connected ftp server is downloaded to the specified destination file on the Android device. You can specify a subdirectory in the server source file string. The destination file path is relative to "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/" If you want to download a BASIC! source file, the path would be, "../source/xxx.bas". Ftp.dir <list_nvar> {,<dirmark_sexp>} Creates a list of the names of the files and directories in the current working directory and places it in a BASIC! List data structure. A pointer to the new List is returned in the variable <list_nvar>. A directory is identified by a marker appended to its name. The default marker is the string "(d)". You can change the marker with the optional directory mark parameter <dirmark_sexp>. If you do not want directories to be marked, set <dirmark_sexp> to an empty string, "". The following code can be used to print the file names in that list: ftp.dir file_list list.size file_list,size for i = 1 to size list.get file_list,i,name$ print name$ next i Ftp.cd <new_directory_sexp> Changes the current working directory to the specified new directory. Ftp.rename <old_filename_sexp>, <new_filename_sexp> Renames the specified old filename to the specified new file name. Ftp.delete <filename_sexp> Deletes the specified file. Ftp.rmdir <directory_sexp> Removes (deletes) the specified directory if and only if that directory is empty. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 126 De Re BASIC!

127 Ftp.mkdir <directory_sexp> Creates a new directory of the specified name. Bluetooth BASIC! implements Bluetooth in a manner which allows the transfer of data bytes between an Android device and some other device (which may or may not be another Android device). Before attempting to execute any BASIC! Bluetooth commands, you should use the Android "Settings" Application to enable Bluetooth and pair with any device(s) with which you plan to communicate. When Bluetooth is opened using the Bt.open command, the device goes into the Listen Mode. While in this mode it waits for a device to attempt to connect. For an active attempt to make a Bluetooth connection, you can use the Connect Mode by successfully executing the Bt.connect command. Upon executing the Bt.connect command the person running the program is given a list of paired Bluetooth devices and asked. When the user selects a device, BASIC! attempts to connect to it. You should monitor the state of the Bluetooth using the Bt.status command. This command will report states of Listening, Connecting and Connected. Once you receive a "Connected" report, you can proceed to read bytes and write bytes to the connected device. You can write bytes to a connected device using the Bt.write command. Data is read from the connected device using the Bt.read.bytes command; however, before executing Bt.read.bytes, you need to find out if there is data to be read. You do this using the Bt.read.ready command. Once connected, you should continue to monitor the status (using Bt.status) to ensure that the connected device remains connected. When you are done with a particular connection or with Bluetooth in general, execute Bt.close. The sample program, f35_bluetooth, is a working example of Bluetooth using two Android devices in a "chat" type application. Bt.open {0 1} Opens Bluetooth in Listen Mode. If you do not have Bluetooth enabled (using the Android Settings Application) then the person running the program will be asked whether Bluetooth should be enabled. After Bt.open is successfully executed, the code will listen for a device that wants to connect. The optional parameter determines if BT will listen for a secure or insecure connection. If no parameter is given or if the parameter is 1, then a secure connection request will be listened for. Otherwise, an insecure connection will be listened for. It is not possible to listen for either a secure or insecure Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 127 De Re BASIC!

128 connection with one Bt.open command because the Android API requires declaring a specific secure/insecure open. If Bt.open is used in graphics mode (after Gr.open), you will need to insert a Pause 500 statement after the Bt.open statement. Bt.close Closes any previously opened Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth will automatically be closed when the program execution ends. Bt.connect {0 1} Commands BASIC! to connect to a particular device. Executing this command will cause a list of paired devices to be displayed. When one of these devices is selected the Bt.status will become "Connecting" until the device has connected. The optional parameter determines if BT will seek a secure or insecure connection. If no parameter is given or if the parameter is 1, then a secure connection will be requested. Otherwise, an insecure connection will be requested. Bt.disconnect Disconnects from the connected Bluetooth device and goes into the Listen status. This avoids having to use Bt.close + Bt.open to disconnect and wait for a new connection. Bt.reconnect This command will attempt to reconnect to a device that was previously connected (during this Run) with Bt.connect or a prior Bt.reconnect. The command cannot be used to reconnect to a device that was connected following a Bt.open or Bt.disconnect command (i.e. from the Listening status). You should monitor the Bluetooth status for Connected (3) after executing Bt.reconnect. Bt.status {{<connect_var>}{, <name_svar>}{, <address_svar>}} Gets the current Bluetooth status and places the information in the return variables. The available data are the current connection status (in <connect_var>), and the friendly name and MAC address of your Bluetooth hardware (in <name_svar> and <address_svar>). All parameters are optional; use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). If the connection status variable <connect_var> is present, it may be either a numeric variable or a string variable. The table shows the possible return values of each type: Numeric Value String Value Meaning -1 Not enabled Bluetooth not enabled 0 Idle Nothing going on Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 128 De Re BASIC!

129 1 Listening Listening for connection 2 Connecting Connecting to another device 3 Connected Connected to another device If the device name string variable <name_svar> is present, it is set to the friendly device name. If your device has no Bluetooth radio, the string will be empty. If the address string variable <address_svar> is present, it is set to the MAC address of your Bluetooth hardware, represented as a string of six hex numbers separated by colons: "00:11:22:AA:BB:CC". Bt.write {<exp> {, ;}}... Writes data to the Bluetooth connection. If the comma (,) separator is used then a comma will be printed between the values of the expressions. If the semicolon (;) separator is used then nothing will separate the values of the expressions. If the semicolon is at the end of the line, the output will be transmitted immediately, with no newline character(s) added. The parameters are the same as the Print parameters. This command is essentially a Print to the Bluetooth connection, with two differences: Only one byte is transmitted for each character; the upper byte is discarded. Binary data and ASCII text are sent correctly, but Unicode characters may not be. A line that ends with a semicolon is sent immediately, with no newline character(s) added. This command with no parameters sends a newline character to the Bluetooth connection. Bt.read.ready <nvar> Reports in the numeric variable the number of messages ready to be read. If the value is greater than zero then the messages should be read until the queue is empty. OnBtReadReady: Interrupt label that traps the arrival of a message received on the Bluetooth channel (see "Interrupt Labels"). If a Bluetooth message is ready (Bt.read.ready would return a non-zero value) BASIC! executes the statements after the OnBtReady: label, where you can read and handle the message. When done, execute the Bt.onReadReady.Resume command to resume the interrupted program. Bt.onReadReady.resume Resumes execution at the point in the program where it was interrupted by the Bluetooth Read Ready event. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 129 De Re BASIC!

130 Bt.read.bytes <svar> The next available message is placed into the specified string variable. If there is no message then the string variable will be returned with an empty string (""). Each message byte is placed in one character of the string; the upper byte of each character is 0. This is similar to Byte.read.buffer, which reads binary data from a file into a buffer string. Bt.device.name <svar> Returns the name of the connected device in the string variable. A run-time error will be generated if no device (Status <> 3) is connected. Bt.set.UUID <sexp> A Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) is a standardized 128-bit format for a string ID used to uniquely identify information. The point of a UUID is that it's big enough that you can select any random 128-bit number and it won't clash with any other number selected similarly. In this case, it's used to uniquely identify your application's Bluetooth service. To get a UUID to use with your application, you can use one of the many random UUID generators on the web. Many devices have common UUIDs for their particular application. The default BASIC! UUID is the standard Serial Port Profile (SPP) UUID: " F9B34FB". You can change the default UUID using this command. Some information about 16 bit and 128 bit UUIDs can be found at: Communication: Phone and Text .send <recipient_sexp>, <subject_sexp>, <body_sexp> The message in the Body string expression will be sent to the named recipient with the named subject heading. MyPhoneNumber <svar> The phone number of the Android device will be returned in the string variable. If the device is not connected to a cellular network, the returned value will be uncertain. Phone.call <sexp> The phone number contained in the string expression will be called. Your device must be connected to a cellular network to make phone calls. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 130 De Re BASIC!

131 Phone.dial <sexp> Open the phone dialer app. The phone number contained in the string expression will be displayed in the dialer. Alphabetic characters in the string will be converted to digits, as if the corresponding key of a phone pad had been touched. Phone.rcv.init Prepare to detect the state of your phone. If you want to detect phone calls using Phone.rcv.next, or you want Phone.info to attempt to report signal strength, you must first run this command. Phone.rcv.init starts a background "listener" task that detects changes in the phone state. There is no command to disable this listener, but it is stopped when your program exits. Phone.rcv.next <state_nvar>, <number_svar> The state of the phone will be returned in the state numeric value. A phone number may be returned in the string variable. State = 0. The phone is idle. The phone number will be an empty string. State = 1. The phone is ringing. The phone number will be in the string. State = 2. The phone is off hook. If there is no phone number (an empty string) then an outgoing call is being made. If there is a phone number then an incoming phone call is in progress. States 1 and 2 will be continuously reported as long the phone is ringing or the phone remains off hook. Sms.send <number_sexp>, <message_sexp> The SMS message in the string expression <message_sexp> will be sent to number in the string expression <number_sexp>. This command does not provide any feedback about the sending of the message. The device must be connected to a cellular network to send an SMS message. Sms.rcv.init Prepare to intercept received SMS using the sms.rcv.next command. Sms.rcv.next <svar> Read the next received SMS message from received SMS message queue in the string variable. The returned string will contain "@" if there is no SMS message in the queue. The sms.rcv.init command must be called before the first sms.rcv.next command is executed. Example: SMS.RCV.INIT DO Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 131 De Re BASIC!

132 DO % Loop until SMS received PAUSE 5000 % Sleep of 5 seconds SMS.RCV.NEXT m$ % Try to get a new message UNTIL m$ <> "@" % "@" indicates no new message PRINT m$ % Print the new message UNTIL 0 % Loop forever Time and Timers Time and TimeZone Commands The TimeZone commands allow you to manage the timezone used by the Time command and the TIME( ) function. They do not affect the no-parameter TIME() function. They affect only your BASIC! program, not any other time-related operation on your device. See also the time functions CLOCK() and TIME(). Time {<time_nexp>,} Year$, Month$, Day$, Hour$, Minute$, Second$, WeekDay, isdst Returns the current (default) or specified date, time, weekday, and Daylight Saving Time flag in the variables. You can use the optional first parameter (<time_nexp>) to specify what time to return in the variables. It is a numeric expression number of milliseconds from 12:00:00 AM, January 1, 1970, UTC, as returned by the TIME() functions. It may be negative, indicating a time before that date. The day/date and time are returned as two-digit numeric strings with a leading zero when needed, except Year$ which is four characters. The WeekDay is a number from 1 to 7, where 1 means Sunday. You can use it to index an array of day names in your language of choice. The isdst flag is 1 if the current or specified time is in Daylight Saving Time in the current timezone 0 if the time is not in Daylight Saving Time (is Standard Time) -1 if the system can't tell if the time is in DST The current timezone is your local timezone unless you change it with the TimeZone commands. All of the return variables are optional. That is, you can omit any of them, but if you want to return only some of them, you need to retain their position by including commas for the omitted return variables. For example: t = TIME(2001, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) Time t, Y$, M$, D$ % sets only the year, month, and day Time t, Y$, M$, D$,,,, W % adds the day of the week (7, Saturday) To do the same with the current time, leave out both the first parameter and its comma: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 132 De Re BASIC!

133 Time,, day$,,,, wkday % returns the today's day and weekday TimeZone.set { <tz_sexp> } Sets the timezone for your program. If you don't specify a timezone, it is set to the default for your device, which is based on where you are. If you specify a timezone your device does not recognize, it is set to "GMT". (In Android, GMT is exactly the same as UTC). TimeZone.get <tz_svar> Returns the current timezone in the string variable. This is the default timezone for your device and location, unless you have changed it with TimeZone.set. TimeZone.list <tz_list_pointer_nexp> While timezones are defined by international standards, the only ones that matter to your program are those recognized by your device. This command returns all valid timezone strings, putting them in the list that <tz_list_pointer_nexp> points at. The previous contents of the list are discarded. If the pointer does not specify a valid string list, and the expression is a numeric variable, a new list is created and the variable is set to point to the new list. Timer Interrupt and Commands You can set a timer that will interrupt the execution of your program at some set time interval. When the timer expires, BASIC! jumps to the statements following the OnTimer: label. When you have done whatever you need to do to handle this Timer event, you use the Timer.resume command to resume execution of the program at the point where the timer interrupt occurred. The timer cannot interrupt an executing command. When the timer expires, the current command is allowed to complete. Then the timer interrupt code after the OnTimer: label executes. If the current command takes a long time to finish, it may appear that your timer is late. The timer cannot interrupt another interrupt. If the timer expires while any interrupt event handler is running, the OnTimer: interrupt will be delayed. If the timer expires while the OnTimer: interrupt handler is running, the timer event will be lost. The OnTimer: interrupt code must exit by running Timer.resume, or the timer interrupt can occur only once. Timer.set <interval_nexp> Sets a timer that will repeatedly interrupt program execution after the specified time interval. The interval time units are milliseconds. The program must also contain an OnTimer: label. OnTimer: Interrupt label for the timer interrupt. (See "Interrupt Labels" and "Timer Interrupts and Commands".) Timer.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnTimer: interrupt occurred. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 133 De Re BASIC!

134 Timer.clear Clears the repeating timer. No further timer interrupts will occur. Sample Code n=0 TIMER.SET 2000 DO UNTIL n=4 TIMER.CLEAR PRINT "Timer cleared. No further interrupts." DO UNTIL 0 ONTIMER: n = n + 1 PRINT n*2; " seconds" TIMER.RESUME Clipboard Clipboard.get <svar> Copies the current contents of the clipboard into <svar> Clipboard.put <sexp> Places <sexp> into the clipboard. Encryption Encrypts and decrypts a string using a supplied password. The encryption algorithm used is "PBEWithMD5AndDES". Encrypt {<pw_sexp>}, <source_sexp>, <encrypted_svar> Encrypts the string <source_sexp> using the password <pw_sexp>. The result is placed into the variable <encrypted_svar>. The password parameter is optional, but its comma is required. Omitting the password is the same as using an empty string, "". If the source string cannot be encrypted, the result is an empty string (""). You can call the GETERROR$() function to get an error message. This command is the same as ENCODE$("ENCRYPT", <pw_sexp>, <source_sexp>). Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 134 De Re BASIC!

135 Decrypt <pw_sexp>, <encrypted_sexp>, <decrypted_svar> Decrypts the encrypted string <encrypted_sexp> using the password <pw_sexp>. The result is placed in <decrypted_svar>. The password parameter is optional, but its comma is required. Omitting the password is the same as using an empty string, "". If the source string cannot be decoded with the specified password, the result is an empty string (""). You can call the GETERROR$() function to get an error message. This command is the same as DECODE$("ENCRYPT", <pw_sexp>, <source_sexp>). Ringer Android devices support three ringtone modes: Value: Meaning: Behavior 0 Silent Ringer is silent and does not vibrate 1 Vibrate Ringer is silent but vibrates 2 Normal Ringer may be audible and may vibrate "Normal" behavior depends on other device settings set by the user. Ringer volume is an integer number from zero to a device-dependent maximum. If the volume is zero the ringer is silent. NOTE: These are system settings. Any change you make persists after your program ends. You may want to record the original settings and change them back when the program exits. Ringer.get.mode <nvar> Returns the current ringtone mode in the numeric variable. Ringer.set.mode <nexp> Changes the ringtone mode to the specified value. If the value is not a valid mode, the device mode is not changed. Ringer.get.volume <vol_nvar> {, <max_nvar> } Returns the ringer volume level in the numeric variable. Returns the maximum volume settting in <max_nvar>, if <max_nvar> is present. Ringer.set.volume <nexp> Changes the ringer volume to the specified value. If the value is less than zero, volume is set to zero. If the value is greater than the device-specific maximum, the volume is set to the maximum level. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 135 De Re BASIC!

136 String Operations Split and Join are complementary operations. Split separates a string into parts and put the parts in an array. Join builds a string by combining the elements of an array. See also the various String Functions. Join <source_array$[]>, <result_svar> {, <separator_sexp>{, <wrapper_sexp}} Join.all <source_array$[]>, <result_svar> {, <separator_sexp>{, <wrapper_sexp}} The elements of the <source_array$[]> are joined together as a single string in the <result_svar>. By default, the source elements are joined with nothing between them or around them. You may specify optional modifiers that add characters to the string. Copies of the separator string <separator_sexp> are written between source elements. Copies of the wrapper string <wrapper_sexp> are placed before and after the rest of the result string. The Join command omits any empty source elements. The Join.all command includes all source elements in the result string, even if they are empty. There is no difference between the two commands unless you specify a non-empty separator string. Join.all places copies of the separator between all of the elements, including the empty ones. An example of an operation that uses both separators and wrappers is a CSV string, for "commaseparated values". InnerPlanets$ = "Mercury Venus Earth Mars" SPLIT IP$[], InnerPlanets$ JOIN IP$[], PlanetsCSV$, "\",\"", "\"" PRINT PlanetsCSV$ This prints the string "Mercury","Venus","Earth","Mars" (including all of the quotes). The separator puts the "," between planet names, and the wrapper puts the " at the beginning and end of the string. Split <result_array$[]>, <sexp> {, <test_sexp>} Split.all <result_array$[]>, <sexp> {, <test_sexp>} Splits the source string <sexp> into multiple strings and place them into <result_array$[]>. The array is specified without an index. If the array exists, it is overwritten. Otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a one-dimensional array. The string is split at each location where <test_sexp> occurs. The <test_sexp> occurrences are removed from the result strings. The <text_sexp> parameter is optional; if it is not given, the string is split on whitespace. Omitting the parameter is equivalent to specifying "\\s+". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 136 De Re BASIC!

137 If the beginning of the source string matches the test string, the first element of the result array will be an empty string. This differs from the WORD$() function, which strips leading and trailing occurrences of the test string from the source string before splitting. Two adjacent occurrences of the test expression in the source expression result in an empty element somewhere in the result array. The Split command discards these empty strings if they occur at the end of the result array. To keep these trailing empty strings, use the Split.all command. Example: string$ = "a:b:c:d" delimiter$ = ":" SPLIT result$[], string$, delimiter$ Prints: a b c d ARRAY.LENGTH length, result$[] FOR i = 1 TO length PRINT result$[i] + " "; NEXT i PRINT "" Note: The <test_sexp> is actually a Regular Expression. If you are not getting the results that you expect from the <test_sexp> then you should examine the rules for Regular Expressions at: Speech Conversion Text To Speech Your program can synthesize speech from text, either for immediate playback with the TTS.speak command or to create a sound file with TTS.speak.toFile. Your device may come with the text-to-speech engine already enabled and configured, or you may need to set it up yourself in the Android Settings application. The details vary between different devices and versions of Android. Typically, the menu navigation looks like one of these: Settings Voice input & output Text-to-speech settings Settings Language & input Text-to-speech output Unless you set an output language in the text-to-speech settings, the speech generated will be spoken in the current default language of the device. The menu path for setting the default language usually looks like one of these: Settings Language and keyboard Select language Settings Language & input Language Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 137 De Re BASIC!

138 Most speech engines limit the number of characters they are able to speak. The limit is not the same for all devices or all speech engines, but it is typically around 4000 characters. If you exceed the limit, most engines fail silently: you don t get an error message, but you don t get any speech output, either. TTS.init This command must be executed before speaking. TTS.speak <sexp> {, <wait_lexp>} Speaks the string expression. The statement does not return until the string has been fully spoken, unless the optional "wait" parameter is present and evaluates to false (numeric 0). Spoken expressions cannot overlap. A second TTS.speak (or a TTS.speak.toFile) will wait for the speech from an earlier TTSts.speak to finish, even if the "wait" flag was false. TTS.speak.toFile <sexp> {, <path_sexp>} Converts the string expression to speech and writes it into a wav file. You can specify the name and location of the file with the optional "path" parameter. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfobasic/data/tts.wav". The statement does not return until the speech synthesis is complete, but there is no guarantee the file-write is finished. If a previous TTS.speak is still speaking, this statement will not start until that speech completes. TTS.stop Waits for any outstanding speech to finish, then releases Android's text-to-speech engine. Following TTS.stop, if you want to run TTS.speak or TTS.speak.toFile again, you will have to run TTS.init again. Speech To Text (Voice Recognition) The Voice Recognition function on Android uses Google Servers to perform the recognition. This means that you must be connected to the Internet and logged into your Google account for this feature to work. There are two commands for Speech to Text: STT.listen and STT.results. STT.listen starts the voice recognition process with a dialog box. STT.results reports the interpretation of the voice with a list of strings. The Speech to Text procedures are different for Graphics Mode, HTML mode and simple Console Output mode. STT.listen {<prompt_sexp>} Start the voice recognize process by displaying a "Speak Now" dialog box. The optional prompt string expression <prompt_sexp> sets the dialog box s prompt. If you do not provide the prompt parameter, the default prompt "BASIC! Speech To Text" is used. Begin speaking when the dialog box appers. The recognition will stop when there is a pause in the speaking. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 138 De Re BASIC!

139 STT.results should be executed next. Note: STT.listen is not to be used in HTML mode. STT.results <string_list_ptr_nexp> The command must not be executed until after a STT.listen is executed (unless in HTML mode). The recognizer returns several variations of what it thinks it heard as a list of strings. The first string in the list is the best guess. The strings are written into the list that <string_list_ptr_nexp> points to. The previous contents of the list are discarded. If the pointer does not specify a valid string list, and the expression is a numeric variable, a new list is created and the variable is set to point to the new list. Console Mode The following code illustrates the command in Output Console (not HTML mode and not Graphics mode): PRINT "Starting Recognizer" STT.LISTEN STT.RESULTS thelist LIST.SIZE thelist, thesize FOR k = 1 TO thesize LIST.GET thelist, k, thetext$ PRINT thetext$ NEXT k END Graphics Mode This command sequence is to be used in graphics mode. Graphics mode exists after Gr.open and before Gr.close. (Note: Graphics mode is temporarily exited after Gr.front 0. Use the Console Mode if you have called Gr.front 0). The primary difference is that Gr.render must be called after STT.listen and before STT.results. PRINT "Starting Recognizer" STT.LISTEN GR.RENDER STT.RESULTS thelist LIST.SIZE thelist, thesize FOR k =1 TO thesize LIST.GET thelist, k, thetext$ PRINT thetext$ NEXT k END Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 139 De Re BASIC!

140 HTML Mode This command sequence is used while in HTML mode. HTML mode exists after HTML.open and before HTML.close. The primary difference is that the STT.listen command is not used in HTML mode. The STT.listen function is performed by means of an HTML datalink sending back the string "STT". The sending of "STT" by means of the datalink causes the Speak Now dialog box to be displayed. When the datalink "STT" string is received by the BASIC! program, the STT.results command can be executed normally as it will contain the recognized text. The sample file, f37_html_demo.bas, along with the associated html file, htmldemo1.html (located in "rfo-basic/data/") demonstrates the use of voice recognition in HTML mode. Information About Your Android Device Device Command Overview You can get information about your Android device with the Device command: The Device Brand, Device Model, Device Type, and OS The Language and Locale The PhoneType, PhoneNumber, and DeviceID The SN, MCC/MNC, and Network Provider stored on the SIM, if there is one. The Device command has two forms that differ only in the type of the parameter, which determines the format of the returned data. Both forms return the same information, as shown in this table: Key Values Meaning Example (from emulator) Brand Any string Brand name assigned by device manufacturer generic Model Any string Model identifier assigned by device manufacturer sdk Device Any string Device identifier assigned by device manufacturer generic Product Any string Product identifier assigned by device manufacturer sdk OS OS Version Android operating system version number Language Language name Default language of this device English Locale Locale code Default locale code, typically language and country en_us PhoneType GSM, CDMA, SIP, or None Type of phone radio in this device GSM Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 140 De Re BASIC!

141 PhoneNumber String of digits Phone number registered to this device, if any DeviceID String of digits The unique device ID, such as the IMEI SIM SN String of digits or Serial number of the SIM card, Not available if one is present and it is accessible 0720 SIM MCC/MNC String of digits or The "numeric name" of the provider Not available of the SIM, if present and accessible SIM Provider Name string or The name of the provider of the SIM, Not available if present and accessible Android The last six items access your device s telephony system and SIM card. If your device has no telephone, or BASIC! does not have permission to access them, the fields are set to neutral values: "None", "Not available", or a string of "0" characters. In addition, there are convenience commands to retrieve only the Locale or the Language. The information returned by Device is static. To get dynamic information, use the Phone.Info command. Device <svar> Returns information about your Android device in the string variable <svar>. Each item has this form: key = value The names key and value refer to the first two columns of the table in the Device overview above. The items are placed in a single string, separated by newline characters. Formatted this way, if you Print the string it is displayed with one item on each line. You can separate the individual items with Split: DEVICE info$ % all info in one string SPLIT info$[], info$, "\\n" % each array element is one item, "<k> = <v>" SPLIT lang_line$[], info$[6], " = " % split the Language item, two-element array lang$ = lang_line$[2] % lang$ is the language name, like "English" Device <nexp> <nvar> Returns information about your Android device in a Bundle. If you provide a variable that is not a valid Bundle pointer, the command creates a new Bundle and returns the Bundle pointer in your variable. Otherwise it writes into the Bundle your variable or expression points to. The Bundle keys are shown in the first column of the table in the Device overview above. DEVICE info % all info in a Bundle BUNDLE.GET info, "Language", lang$ % lang$ is the language name, like "English" Device.Language <svar> Returns the default language of the device as a human-readable string value in string variable <svar>. This convenience shortcut returns the same value as the "Language" key of the Bundle returned by the numeric form of the Device command. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 141 De Re BASIC!

142 Device. Locale <svar> Returns the default locale code of the device in standard Locale format, typically including the language and country codes. This convenience shortcut returns the same value as the "Locale" key of the Bundle returned by the numeric form of the Device command. Phone.info <nexp> <nvar> Returns information about the telephony radio in your Android device, if it has one. The information is placed in a Bundle. If you provide a variable that is not a valid Bundle pointer, the command creates a new Bundle and returns the Bundle pointer in your variable. Otherwise it writes into the Bundle your variable or expression points to. The Bundle keys and possible values are in the table below. Each entry s type is either N (Numeric) or S (String). Key Type Values Meaning Example PhoneType S GSM, CDMA, SIP, or None NetworkType S GPRS, EDGE, UMTS, CDMA, EVDOrev0, EVDOrevA, 1xRTT, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA, iden, EDVOrevB, LTE, EHRPD, HSPAP+, or Unknown Type of phone radio in this device Network type of the current data connection The PhoneType is the same as that returned by the Device command. It is static. If the PhoneType is GSM and the phone is registered to a network, the Phone.info command also returns the following items in the Bundle: Key Type Values Meaning Example CID N A positive number or -1 if CID is unknown GSM Cell ID LAC N A positive number or -1 if LAC is unknown GSM Location Area Code MCC/MNC S String of 5 or 6 decimal digits The "numeric name" of the registered network operator Operator N A name string The name of the operator of the registered network T-Mobile The "numeric name" is made up of the Mobile Country Code (MCC) and Mobile Network Code (MNC). GSM LTE Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 142 De Re BASIC!

143 If the PhoneType is CDMA and the phone is registered to a network, the Phone.info command also returns the following items in the Bundle: Key Type Values Meaning BaseID N A positive number or -1 if BaseID is unknown CDMA base station identification number NetworkID N A positive number or -1 if NetworkID is unknown CDMA network identification number SystemID N A positive number or -1 if SystemID is unknown CDMA system identification number If your program has executed Phone.rcv.init, then Phone.info may be able to report the strength of the signal connecting your phone to the cell tower. If the signal strength is available, Phone.info will try to report it in one or two of the following bundle keys (the first three are mutually exclusive): Key Type Values Meaning SignalLevel N A positive number 0-4 General measure of signal quality as shown in status bar. Higher is better. GsmSignal N A positive number, 0-31 "SignalLevel" unavailable, phone type is GSM, or 99 if unknown get GSM level instead. CdmaDbm N A negative number, typically "SignalLevel" unavailable, phone type is CDMA, -90 (strong) to -105 (weak) get raw power level in dbm instead. SignalASU N 0-31, 99 (most) "Arbitrary Strength Units", 0-97, 99 (LTE) range depends on network type. This information is not available on some Android devices, depending on the device manufacturer and your wireless carrier. Screen rotation, size[], realsize[], density Returns information about your screen. Provide numeric variables to get the rotation and density of the screen. Provide numeric array variables to get the "application size" and "real size" of the screen. A size is returned as two values, width first and height second, in a two-element array. If the array exists, it is overwritten. Otherwise a new array is created. All parameters are optional. Use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). rotation: The current orientation of your screen relative to the "natural" orientation of your device. The natural orientation may be portrait or landscape, as defined by the manufacturer. The return value is a number from 0 to 3. Multiply by 90 to get the rotation in degrees clockwise. size[]: The size of the screen in pixels available for applications. This excludes system decorations. The width and height values reflect the current screen orientation. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 143 De Re BASIC!

144 realsize[]: The current real size of the screen in pixels, including system decorations. NOTE: this value is available only on devices running Android version 4.2 or later. On other devices, the values will be the same as in the size[] array parameter. density: A standardized Android density value in dots per inch (dpi), usually 120, 160, or 240 dpi. This is not necessarily the real physical density of the screen. This value never changes. Screen.rotation <nvar> Returns a number in the <nvar> parameter representing the current orientation of your screen relative to the "natural" orientation of your device. The natural orientation may be portrait or landscape, as defined by the manufacturer. The return value is a number from 0 to 3. Multiply by 90 to get the rotation in degrees clockwise. Screen.size, size[], realsize[], density Returns information about the size and density of your screen. You may provide numeric array variables to get the "application size" and "real size" of the screen. A size is returned as two values, width first and height second, in a two-element array. If the array exists, it is overwritten. Otherwise a new array is created. Provide a simple numeric variable to get the density of the screen. All parameters are optional. Use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). size[]: The size of the screen in pixels available for applications. This excludes system decorations. The width and height values reflect the current screen orientation. realsize[]: The current real size of the screen in pixels, including system decorations. NOTE: this value is available only on devices running Android version 4.2 or later. On other devices, the values will be the same as in the size[] array parameter. density: A standardized Android density value in dots per inch (dpi), usually 120, 160, or 240 dpi. This is not necessarily the real physical density of the screen. This value never changes. If your program is running in Graphics mode, "SCREEN.SIZE xy[],, dens" returns the same values as "GR.SCREEN x, y, dens". Unlike Gr.screen, Screen.size also works in Console and HTML modes. WiFi.info {{<SSID_svar>}{, <BSSID_svar>}{, <MAC_svar>}{, <IP_var>}{, <speed_nvar>}} Gets information about the current Wi-Fi connection and places it in the return variables. All of the parameters are optional; use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). The table shows the available data: Variable Type Returned Data Format SSID String SSID of current network "name" or hex digits (see below) Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 144 De Re BASIC!

145 BSSID String BSSID of current access point xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (MAC address) MAC String MAC address of your WiFi xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx IP Numeric or String IP address of your WiFi Number or octets (see below) speed Numeric Current link speed in Mbps Number Format notes: SSID: If the network is named, the name is returned, surrounded by double quotes. Otherwise the returned name is a string of hex digits. IP: If you provide a numeric variable, your Wi-Fi IP address is returned as a single number. If you provide a string variable, the number is converted to a standard four-octet string. For example, the string format is the same IP address as the number (hex 8f82460a). Running in the Background Home The HOME command does exactly what tapping the HOME key would do. The Home Screen is displayed while the BASIC! program continues to run in the background. OnBackground: Interrupt label that traps changes in the Background/Foreground state (see "Interrupt Labels"). BASIC! executes the statements following the OnBackground: label until it reaches a Background.resume command. The Background() function should be used to determine the new state. Background.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnBackground: interrupt occurred. WakeLock <code_nexp>{, <flags_nexp>} The WakeLock command modifies the system screen timeout function. The Code parameter <code_nexp> may be one of five values. Values 1 through 4 modify the screen timeout in various ways. Code value 5 releases the WakeLock and restores the system screen timeout function. Code WakeLock Type CPU Screen Keyboard Light 1 Partial WakeLock On* Off Off 2 Screen Dim On Dim Off 3 Screen Bright On Bright Off 4 Full WakeLock On Bright Bright 5 No WakeLock Off Off Off * If you hold a partial WakeLock, the CPU will continue to run, regardless of any timers and even after the user taps the power button. In all other WakeLocks, the CPU will run, but the user can still put the device to sleep using the power button. You can use the optional Flags parameter <flags_nexp> to change the screen behavior, as shown in the table below. If the WakeLock Type is Partial WakeLock (Code 1), the Flags parameter is ignored. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 145 De Re BASIC!

146 Value Flag(s) Set Meaning 1 Acquire causes wakeup Turn screen on when wakelock is acquired. 2 On after release Reset screen timeout when wakelock is released. 3 Both Other Neither Use the WakeLock only when you really need it. Acquiring a WakeLock increases power usage and decreases battery life. The WakeLock is always released when the program stops running. One of the common uses for WakeLock would be in a music player that needs to keep the music playing after the system screen timeout interval. Implementing this requires that BASIC! be kept running. One way to do this is to put BASIC! into an infinite loop: Audio.load n,"b5b.mp3" Audio.play n WakeLock 1 Do Pause Until 0 The screen will turn off when the system screen timeout expires but the music will continue to play. WifiLock <code_nexp> The WifiLock command allows your program to keep the WiFi connection awake when a time-out would normally turn it off. The <code_nexp> may be one of four values. Values 1 through 3 acquire a WifiLock, changing the way WiFi behaves when the screen turns off. Code value 4 releases the WifiLock and restores the normal timeout behavior. Code: WiFiLock Type WiFi Operation When Screen is Off 1 Scan Only WiFi kept active, but only operation is initiating scan and reporting scan results 2 Full WiFi behaves normally 3 Full High- Performance WiFi operates at high performance with minimum packet loss and low latency* 4 No WiFiLock WiFi turns off (may be settable on some devices) *Full Hi-Perf mode is not available on all Android devices. Devices running Android 3.0.x or earlier, and devices without the necessary hardware, will run in Full mode instead. Use WifiLock only when you really need it. Acquiring a WifiLock increases power usage and decreases battery life. The WifiLock is always released when the program stops running. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 146 De Re BASIC!

147 Miscellaneous Commands Headset <state_nvar>, <type_svar>, <mic_nvar> Reports if there is a headset plugged into your device, and returns data about the headset. The parameters are all names of variables that receive the data: <state_nvar>: 1.0 if a headset is plugged in, 0.0 if no headset is plugged in, and -1.0 if unknown. <type_svar>: A string describing the device type of the last headset known to your device. <mic_nvar>: 1.0 if the headset has a microphone, 0.0 if the headset does not have a microphone, and -1.0 if unknown. If you plug in or unplug a headset, new information becomes available. Your program must run the Headset command again to get the update. Notify <title_sexp>, <subtitle_sexp>, <alert_sexp>, <wait_lexp> This command will cause a Notify object to be placed in the Notify (Status) bar. The Notify object displays the BASIC! app icon and the <alert_sexp> text. The user taps the Notify object to open the notification window. Your program s notification displays the <title_sexp> and <subtitle_sexp> text. The code snippet and screenshots shown below demonstrate the placement of the parameter strings. If <wait_lexp> is not zero (true), then the execution of the BASIC! program will be suspended until the user taps the Notify object. If the value is zero (false), the BASIC! program will continue executing. The Notify object will be removed when the user taps the object, or when the program exits. Print "Executing Notify" Notify "BASIC! Notify", "Tap to resume running program",~ "BASIC! Notify Alert", 1! Execution is suspended and waiting for user to tap the Notify Object Print "Notified" Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 147 De Re BASIC!

148 Note: the icon that appears in the Notify object will be the icon for the application in user-built apk. Pause <ticks_nexp> Stops the execution of the BASIC! program for <ticks_nexp> milliseconds. One millisecond = 1/1000 of a second. Pause 1000 will pause the program for one second. A pause can not be interrupted. An infinite loop can be a very useful construct in your programs. For example, you may use it to wait for the user to tap a control on the screen. A tight spin loop keeps BASIC! very busy doing nothing. A Pause, even a short one, reduces the load on the CPU and the drain on the battery. Depending on your application, you may want to add a Pause to the loop to conserve battery power: DO : PAUSE 50 : UNTIL x <> 0 Swap <nvar_a> <svar_a>, <nvar_b> <svar_b> The values and in "a" and "b" numeric or string variables are swapped. Tone <frequency_nexp>, <duration_nexp> {, <duration_chk_lexp} Plays a tone of the specified frequency in hertz (cycles per second) for the specified duration in milliseconds. The duration produced does not exactly match the specified duration. If you need to get an exact duration, experiment. Each Android device has a minimum tone duration. By default, if you specify a duration less than this minimum, you get a run-time error message giving the minimum for your device. However, you can suppress the check by setting the optional duration check flag <duration_chk_lexp> to 0 (false). If you do this, the result you get depends on your device. You will not get a run-time error message, but you may or may not get the tone you expect. Vibrate <pattern_array[{<start>,<length>}]>,<nexp> The vibrate command causes the device to vibrate in the specified pattern. The pattern is held in a numeric array (pattern_array[]) or array segment (pattern_array[start,length]). The pattern is of the form: pause-time, on-time,, pause-time, on-time. The values for pause-time and on-time are durations in milliseconds. The pattern may be of any length. There must be at least two values to get a single buzz because the first value is a pause. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 148 De Re BASIC!

149 If <nexp> = -1 then the pattern will play once and not repeat. If <nexp> = 0 then the pattern will continue to play over and over again until the program ends. If <nexp> > 0 then the pattern play will be cancelled. See the sample program, f21_sos.bas, for an example of Vibrate. VolKeys Certain keys and buttons have special meaning to your Android device. By default, BASIC! propagates these special keycodes to the Android system, even if your program detects them. So, for example, when you press the "Volume Up" button, your program can catch it (see INKEY$), but you still see the Volume Control window open on your screen, and your audio gets louder. The VolKeys.off and VolKeys.on commands let you control this behavior for five keys. These keys may be on the Android device or on a headset plugged into the device. Key Name Key Code Usual Action (Android docs) (decimal) VOLUME_UP 24 Increase speaker volume VOLUME_DOWN 25 Decrease speaker volume VOLUME_MUTE 164 Mute the speaker (Android 3.0 or later) MUTE 91 Mute the microphone HEADSETHOOK 79 Hang up a call, stop media playback VolKeys.off Disables the usual action of the keys listed in the VolKeys table, above. Your program can still detect these keypresses, but BASIC! does not pass the events on to the Android system. VolKeys.on Enables the usual action of the keys listed in the VolKeys table, above. This is the default setting when your BASIC! program starts. SQLITE Overview The Android operating system provides the ability to create, maintain and access SQLite databases. SQLite implements a self-contained, serverless, zero-configuration, transactional SQL database engine. SQLite is the most widely deployed SQL database engine in the world. The full details about SQLite can be found at the SQLite Home Page ( An excellent online tutorial on SQL can be found at ( Database files will be created on the base drive (usually the SD card) in the directory, "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/databases/ ". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 149 De Re BASIC!

150 SQLITE Commands Sql.open <DB_pointer_nvar>, <DB_name_sexp> Opens a database for access. If the database does not exist, it will be created. <DB_pointer_nvar> is a pointer to the newly opened database. This value will be set by the sql.open command operation. <DB_pointer_nvar> is used in subsequent database commands and should not be altered. <DB_name_sexp> is the filename used to hold this database. The base reference directory is "<pref base drive>/com.rfo.basic/databases/". If <DB_name_sexp> = ":memory:" then a temporary database will be created in memory. Note: You may have more than one database opened at same time. Each opened database must have its own, distinct pointer. Sql.close <DB_pointer_nvar> Closes a previously opened database. <DB_pointer_nvar> will be set to zero. The variable may then be reused in another sql.open command. You should always close an opened database when you are done with it. Not closing a database can reduce the amount of memory available on your Android device. Sql.new_table <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, C2$,...,CN$ A single database may contain many tables. A table is made of rows of data. A row of data consists of columns of values. Each value column has a column name associated with it. This command creates a new table with the name <table_name_sexp> in the referenced opened database. The column names for that table are defined by the following: C1$, C2$,..., CN$. At least one column name is required. You may create as many column names as you need. BASIC! always adds a Row Index Column named "_id" to every table. The value in this Row Index Column is automatically incremented by one for each new row inserted. This gives each row in the table a unique identifier. This identifier can be used to connect information in one table to another table. For example, the _id value for customer information in a customer table can be used to link specific orders to specific customers in an outstanding order database. Sql.drop_table <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp> The table named <table_name_sexp> in the opened database pointed to by <DB_pointer_nvar> will be dropped from the database if the table exists. Sql.insert <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, V1$, C2$, V2$,..., CN$, VN$ Inserts a new row of data columns and values into a table in a previously opened database. The <table_name_sexp> is the name of the table into which the data is to be inserted. All newly inserted rows are inserted after the last, existing row of the table. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 150 De Re BASIC!

151 C1$, V1$, C2$, V2$,..., CN$, VN$: The column name and value pairs for the new row. These parameters must be in pairs. The column names must match the column names used to create the table. Note that the values are all strings. When you need a numeric value for a column, use the BASIC! STR$(n) to convert the number into a string. You can also use the BASIC! FORMAT$(pattern$, N) to create a formatted number for a value. (The Values-as-strings requirement is a BASIC! SQL Interface requirement, not a SQLite requirement. While SQLite, itself, stores all values as strings, it provides transparent conversions to other data types. I have chosen not to complicate the interface with access to these SQLite conversions since BASIC! provides its own conversion capabilities.) Sql.query <cursor_nvar>, <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, <columns_sexp> {, <where_sexp> {, <order_sexp>} } Queries a table of a previously-opened database for some specific data. The command returns a Cursor named <Cursor_nvar> to be used in stepping through Query results. The <columns_sexp> is a string expression with a list of the names of the columns to be returned. The column names must be separated by commas. An example is Columns$ = "First_name, Last_name, Sex, Age". If you want to get the automatically incremented Row Index Column then include the "_id" column name in your column list. Columns may be listed in any order. The column order used in the query will be the order in which the rows are returned. The optional <where_sexp> is an SQL expression string used to select which rows to return. In general, an SQL expression is of the form <Column Name> <operator> <Value>. For example, Where$ = "First_name = 'John' " Note that the Value must be contained in single quotes. Full details about the SQL expressions can be found here. If the Where parameter is omitted, all rows will be returned. The optional <order_sexp> specifies the order in which the rows are to be returned. It identifies the column upon which the output rows are to be sorted. It also specifies whether the rows are to be sorted in ascending (ASC) or descending (DESC) order. For example, Order$ = "Last_Name ASC" would return the rows sorted by Last_Name from A to Z. If the Order parameter is omitted, the rows are not sorted. If the Order parameter is present, the Where parameter must be present. If you want to return all rows, just set Where$ = "" Sql.query.length <length_nvar>, <cursor_nvar> Report the number of records returned by a previous Query command, Given the Cursor returned by a Query, the command writes the number of records into <length_nvar>. This command cannot be used after all of the data has been read. Sql.query.position <position_nvar>, <cursor_nvar> Report the record number most recently read using the Cursor of a Query command. Given the Cursor returned by a Query, the command writes the position of the Cursor into <Position_nvar>. Before the first Next command, the Position is 0. It is incremented by each Next command. A Next command after the last row is read sets its Done variable to true and resets the Cursor to 0. The Cursor can no longer be used, and this command can no longer be used with that Cursor. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 151 De Re BASIC!

152 Sql.next <done_lvar>, <cursor_nvar>{, <cv_svars>} Using the Cursor generated by a previous Query command (Sql.query or Sql.raw_query), step to the next row of data returned by the Query and retrieve the data. <done_lvar> is a Boolean variable that signals when the last row of the Query data has been read. <cursor_nvar> is a numeric variable that holds the Cursor pointer returned by a Query command. You may have more than one Cursor open at a time. <cv_svars> is an optional set of column value string variables that return data from the database to your program. The Cursor carries the values from the table columns listed in the Query. Sql.next retrieves one row from the Cursor as string values and writes them into the <cv_svars>. If any of your columns are numeric, you can use the BASIC! VAL(str$) function to convert the strings to numbers. When this command reads a row of data, it sets the Done flag <done_lvar> to false (0.0). If it finds no data to read, it changes the Done flag to true (1.0) and resets the cursor variable <cursor_nvar> to zero. The Cursor can no longer be used for Sql.next operations. The cursor variable may be used with another Cursor from a different Query. In its simplest form, <cv_svars> is a comma-separated list of string variable names. Each variable receives the data of one column. If there are more variables than columns, the excess variables are left unchanged. If there are more columns than variables, the excess data are discarded. SQL.NEXT done, cursor, cv1$, cv2$, cv3$ % get data from up to three columns The last (or only) variable may be a string array name with no index(es): SQL.NEXT done, cursor, cv$[] % get data from ALL available columns The data from any column(s) that are not written to string variables are written into the array. If no column data are written to the array, the array has one element, an empty string "". If the variable names an array that already exists, it is overwritten. If the last (or only) <cv_svars> variable is an array, you may also add (after another comma) a numeric variable <ncol_nvar>. This variable receives the total number of columns in the cursor. Note that this is not necessarily the same as the size of the array. SQL.NEXT done, cursor, cv$[], ncols % report number of columns available The full specification for this command, including the optional array and column count, is as follows: Sql.next <done_lvar>, <cursor_nvar> {, svar}... {, array$[] {, <ncol_nvar>}} Sql.delete <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>{,<where_sexp>{,<count_nvar>} } From the named table of a previously opened database, delete rows selected by the conditions established by the Where string expression. The Count variable reports the number of rows deleted. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 152 De Re BASIC!

153 The formation of the Where string is exactly the same as described in the Sql.query command. Both Where and Count are optional. If the Where string is omitted all rows are deleted, and the Count variable must be omitted, too. Sql.update <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, V1$, C2$, V2$,...,CN$, VN${: <where_sexp>} In the named table of a previously opened database, change column values in specific rows selected by the Where$ parameter <where_sexp>. The C$,V$ parameters must be in pairs. The colon character terminates the C$,V$ list and must precede the Where$ in this command. The Where$ parameter and preceding colon are optional. BASIC! also uses the colon character to separate multiple commands on a single line. The use of a colon in this command conflicts with that feature. Use caution when using both together. If you put a colon on a line after this command, the preprocessor always assumes the colon is part of the command and not a command separator. If you are not certain of the outcome, the safest action is to put the Sql.update command on a line by itself, or at the end of a multi-command line. Sql.exec <DB_pointer_nvar>, <command_sexp> Execute ANY non-query SQL command string ("CREATE TABLE", "DELETE", "INSERT", etc.) using a previously opened database. Sql.raw_query <cursor_nvar>, <DB_pointer_nvar>, <query_sexp> Execute ANY SQL Query command using a previously opened database and return a Cursor for the results. Graphics Introduction The Graphics Screen and Graphics Mode Graphics are displayed on a new screen that is different from the BASIC! Text Output Screen. The Text Output Screen still exists and can still be written to. You can be returned to the text screen using the BACK key or by having the program execute the Gr.front command. The Gr.open command opens the graphics screen and puts BASIC! into the graphics mode. BASIC! must be in graphics mode before any other graphics commands can be executed. Attempting to execute any graphics command when not in the graphics mode will result in a run-time error. The Gr.close command closes the graphics screen and turns off graphics mode. The graphics mode automatically turns off when the BACK key or MENU key is tapped. BASIC! will continue to run after the BACK key or MENU key is tapped when in graphics mode but the Output Console will be shown. The BASIC! Output Console is hidden when the graphics screen is being displayed. No run-time error messages will be observable. A haptic feedback alert signals a run-time error. This haptic feedback will Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 153 De Re BASIC!

154 be a distinct, short buzz. Tap the BACK key to close the Graphics Screen upon feeling this alert. The error messages can then read from the BASIC! Output Console. Use the Gr.front command to swap the front-most screen between the Output Console and the graphics screen. Commands that use a new window or screen to interact with the user (Input, Select and others) may be used in graphics mode. When your program ends, the graphics screen will be closed. If you want to keep the graphics screen showing, use a long pause or an infinite loop to keep the program from ending:! Stay running to keep the graphics screen showing do until 0 Depending on your application, you may want to add a Pause to the loop to conserve battery power. Tap the BACK key to break out of the infinite loop. The BACK key ends your program unless you trap it with the OnBackKey: interrupt label. Display Lists Each command that draws a graphical object (line, circle, text, etc.) places that object on a list called the Object List. The command returns the object's Object Number. This Object Number, or Object Pointer, is the object s position in the Object List. This Object Number can be used to change the object on the fly. You can change the parameters of any object in the Object List with the Gr.modify command. This feature allows you easily to create animations without the overhead of having to recreate every object in the Object List. To draw graphical objects on the graphics screen, BASIC! uses a Display List. The Display List contains pointers to graphical objects on the Object List. Each time a graphical object is added to the Object List, its Object Number is also added to the Display List. Objects are drawn on the screen in the order in which they appear in the Display List. The Display List objects are not visible on the screen until the Gr.render command is called. You may use the Gr.NewDL command to replace the current Display List with a custom display list array. This custom display list array may contain some or all of the Object Numbers in the Object List. One use for custom display lists is to change the Z order of the objects. In other words you can use this feature to change which objects will be drawn on top of other objects. See the Sample Program file, f24_newdl, for a working example of Gr.NewDL. Drawing Coordinates The size and location of an object drawn on the screen are specified in pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper-left corner of the screen are x = 0 (horizontal position) and y = 0 (vertical position). Coordinate values increase from left to right and from top to bottom of the screen. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 154 De Re BASIC!

155 Coordinates are measured with respect to the physical screen, not to anything on it. If you choose to show the Android Status Bar, anything you draw at the top of the screen is covered by the Status Bar. Drawing into Bitmaps You can draw into bitmaps in addition to drawing directly to the screen. You notify BASIC! that you want to start drawing into a bitmap instead of the screen with the Gr.bitmap.drawinto.start command. This puts BASIC! into the draw-into-bitmap mode. All draw commands issued while in this mode will draw directly into the bitmap. The objects drawn in this mode will not be placed into the Object List. The Object Number returned by a draw command while in this mode is invalid and should not be used for any purpose including Gr.modify. The draw-into-bitmap mode is ended by the Gr.bitmap.drawinto.end command. Subsequent draw commands will place the objects on the Object List and object numbers in the Display List for rendering on the screen. If you wish to display the drawn-into bitmap on the screen, issue a Gr.bitmap.draw command for that bitmap. The drawn-into bitmap may be drawn at any time before, during or after the draw-into process. Colors BASIC! colors consist of a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue. Each component has a numerical value ranging from 0 to 255. Black occurs when all three values are zero. White occurs when all three values are 255. Solid Red occurs with a Redvalue of 255 while Blue and Green are zero. Colors also have what is called an Alpha Channel. The Alpha Channel describes the level of opaqueness of the color. An Alpha value of 255 is totally opaque. No object of any color can show through an object with an Alpha value of 255. An Alpha value of zero renders the object invisible. Paints BASIC! holds drawing information such as color, font size, style and so forth, in Paint objects. The Paint objects are stored in a Paint List. The last created Paint object (the "Current Paint") is associated with a graphical object when a draw command is executed. The Paint tells the renderer (see Gr.render) how to draw the graphical object. The same Paint may be attached to many graphical objects so they will all be drawn with the same color, style, etc. Basic usage You can ignore Paints. This can keep your graphics programming simpler. Each command that changes a drawing setting (Gr.color, Gr.text.size, etc.) affects everything you draw from that point on, until you execute another such command. Advanced usage You can control the Paint objects used to draw graphical objects. The extra complexity allows you to create special effects that are not otherwise possible. To use these effects, you must understand the Paint List and the Current Paint. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 155 De Re BASIC!

156 Each command that changes a drawing setting (Gr.color, Gr.text.size, etc.) creates or modifies a Paint. Each of these commands has an optional "Paint pointer" parameter. If you don t specify which Paint to use, the command first copies the Current Paint and then modifies it to make a new Paint, which then becomes the Current Paint. If you do specify which Paint to use, the command modifies only the specified Paint, leaving the Current Paint unchanged. The Current Paint is always the last Paint on the Paint List.If you specify the Paint object, the pointer values -1 and 0 are special. Paint pointer value -1 means the Current Paint. Using -1 is the same as omitting the Paint pointer parameter. Paint pointer value 0 refers to a "working Paint". You can change it as often as you like without generating a new Paint. Paint 0 can not be attached to a graphical object. To make it useful, you must copy it (Gr.paint.copy) to another location in the Paint List, or to the Current Paint. You can get a pointer to the current Paint with the Gr.paint.get command. You can get a pointer to the Paint associated with any graphical object by using the "paint" tag with Gr.get.value command. You can assign that Paint to any other graphical object by using the "paint" tag with Gr.modify command. Paints can not be individually deleted. You may delete all Paint objects, along with all graphics objects, with Gr.cls. The commands Gr.paint.copy and Gr.paint.reset operate directly on Paint objects. Style Most graphics objects are made up of two parts: an outline and the center. There is a subtle but important difference in the rules governing how each part is drawn. The two parts are controlled by the style setting of the Paint object, set by the style parameter of the Gr.color command. Note: Gr.Point and Gr.Line are not affected by style. Only the STROKE part (outline) is drawn. STROKE If you specify STROKE (style 0), only the outline is drawn. The center of the shape is not colored. The width of the outline is controlled by the stroke weight setting of the Paint, set by the Gr.stroke command. If the stroke weight is 0 or 1 (they behave the same way), the outline is drawn exactly on the coordinates you provide. For example, if the shape is a rectangle: left: The left-most edge. All pixels with x-coordinate left are colored. top: The upper-most edge. All pixels with y-coordinate top are colored. right: The right-most edge. All pixels with x-coord right are colored. bottom: The lower-most edge. All pixels with y-coord bottom are colored. This is probably what you expect. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 156 De Re BASIC!

157 When you increase the stroke weight, the lines get wider, but the centers of the lines do not change. Additional lines of pixels are colored on both sides of the outline. Increasing the stroke weight generally increases the area of the shape, making it larger than the dimensions you specify. This may not be what you expect. In some drawing systems, increasing the line width grows the line inward only, toward the center of the shape, so the shape does not get any bigger. FILL If you specify FILL (style 1), the center of the shape is filled as if it had an outline. That is, the center of the object is colored, but the pixels colored by STROKE may be left uncolored. The area that is colored depends on the coordinates of the shape. For example, consider a rectangle: left: The left-most edge. All pixels with x-coordinate left are colored. top: The upper-most edge. All pixels with y-coordinate top are colored. right: One more than the right-most edge. All pixels with x-coord right - 1 are colored. bottom: One more than the lower-most edge. Pixels with y-coord bottom - 1 are colored. left and top values are "inclusive": pixels with x-coodinate left are colored. Pixels with y-coordinate top are colored. right and bottom values are "exclusive": pixels with x-coodinate right are not colored. Pixels with y- coordinate bottom are not colored. This is not what most people expect, but it is consistent with many operations in Java programming. STROKE and FILL If you specify STROKE_AND_FILL (style 2), both parts of the shape are drawn and superimposed. That is, the outline is drawn as described in STROKE, above, and the object is filled in as described in FILL. Because both parts are the same color, and there are never uncolored pixels beween the STROKE lines and the FILL area, the effect is to draw a single solid shape. Note that increasing the stroke weight generally makes the shape bigger than the dimensions you specify. Hardware-accelerated Graphics Many Android devices since 3.0 (Honeycomb) support hardware acceleration of some graphical operations. An app that can use the hardware Graphics Processor (GPU) may run significantly faster than one that cannot use the GPU. Some of BASIC! s graphical operations do not work with hardwareacceleration, so it is disabled by default. You can turn it on with the Graphic Acceleration item of the Editor->Menu->Preferences screen. If you enable accelerated graphics, test your app thoroughly, comparing it to what you see with acceleration off. If you see blurring, missing objects, or other problems, leave acceleration disabled. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 157 De Re BASIC!

158 Graphics Setup Commands Gr.open {{alpha}{, red}{, green}{, blue}{, <ShowStatusBar_lexp>}{, <Orientation_nexp>}} Opens the Graphics Screen and puts BASIC! into Graphics Mode. The color values become the background color of the graphics screen. The default color is opaque white (255,255,255,255). All parameters are optional; use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). Each of the four color components is a numeric expression with a value from 0 through 255. If a value is outside of this range, only the last eight bits of the value are used; for example, 257 and 1025 are the same as 1. If any color parameter is omitted, it is set to 255. The Status Bar will be shown on the graphics screen if the <ShowStatusBar_lexp> is true (not zero). If the <ShowStatusBar_lexp> is not present, the Status Bar will not be shown. The orientation upon opening graphics will be determined by the <Orientation_nexp> value. <Orientation_nexp> values are the same as values for the Gr.orientation command (see below). If the <Orientation_nexp> is not present, the default orientation is Landscape. Gr.color {{alpha}{, red}{, green}{, blue}{, style}{, paint}} Sets the color and style for drawing objects. There are two ways to use this command. Basic usage: ignore the optional <paint> parameter. The new color and style will be used for whatever graphical objects are subsequently drawn until the next Gr.color command is executed. Advanced usage: The "basic usage" of this command always creates a new Paint. If you prefer, you can use the <paint> parameter to specify an existing Paint. The Gr.color command sets the color and style of that Paint, changing the appearance of any graphical object to which it is attached. The current Paint is not changed. See "Paints Advanced Usage" above and the example below. All of the parameters are optional. If a color component or the style is omitted, that component is left unchanged. For example, Gr.color,,0 sets only green to 0, leaving alpha, red, blue, and style as they were. Use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). Each of the four color components (alpha, red, green, blue) is a numeric expression with a value from 0 through 255. If a value is outside of this range, only the last eight bits of the value are used; for example, 257 and 1025 are both the same as 1. The style parameter, is a numeric expression that determines the stroking and filling of objects. The effect of this parameter is explained in detail in the "Style" sections, see above. The possible values for <style_nexp> are shown in this table: Value Meaning Description 0 STROKE Geometry and text drawn with this style will be stroked (outlined), respecting the stroke-related fields on the paint. 1 FILL Geometry and text drawn with this style will be filled, ignoring all Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 158 De Re BASIC!

159 stroke-related settings in the paint. 2 STROKE_AND_FILL Geometry and text drawn with this style will be filled and stroked at the same time, respecting the stroke-related fields on the paint. If you specify a value other than -1, 0, 1, or 2, then the style is set to 2. If you specify a style of -1, the style is left unchanged, just as if the style parameter were omitted. If you never set a style, the default value is 1, FILL. You can change the stroke weight with commands such as Gr.set.stroke (see below) and the various text style commands. Example: GR.OPEN! basic usage GR.COLOR,0,0,255,2 GR.RECT r1, 50,50,100,100 GR.RECT r2, 100,100,150,150 GR.COLOR 128,255,0,0 GR.RECT r3, 75,75,125,125 GR.RENDER : PAUSE 2000! advanced usage GR.GET.VALUE r1, "paint", p GR.COLOR 255,0,255,0,,p GR.RENDER : PAUSE 2000 GR.RECT r4, 125,125,175,175 GR.RENDER : PAUSE 2000 GR.CLOSE : END % opaque blue, stroke and fill % draw two squares % half-transparent red % draw an overlapping square % get index of first Paint % change that Paint s color to opaque green % both r1 and r2 change % use current Paint, unchanged % still draws half-transparent red Gr.set.antialias {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Turns antialiasing on or off on objects drawn after this command is issued: If the value of the antialias setting parameter <lexp> is false (0), AntiAlias is turned off. If the parameter value is true (not zero), AntiAlias is turned on. If the parameter is omitted, the AntiAlias setting is toggled. AntiAlias should generally be on. It is on by default. AntiAlias must be off to draw single-pixel pixels and single-pixel-wide horizontal and vertical lines. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.set.stroke {{<nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Sets the line width of objects drawn after this command is issued. The <nexp> value must be >=0. Zero produces the thinnest line and is the default stroke value. The thinnest horizontal lines and vertical lines will be two pixels wide if AntiAlias is on. Turn AntiAlias off to draw single-pixel-wide horizontal and vertical lines. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 159 De Re BASIC!

160 Pixels drawn by the Gr.set.pixels command will be drawn as a 2x2 matrix if AntiAlias is on. To draw single-pixel pixels, set AntiAlias off and set the stroke = 0. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.orientation <nexp> The value of the <nexp> sets the orientation of screen as follows: -1 = Orientation depends upon the sensors. 0 = Orientation is forced to Landscape. 1 = Orientation is forced to Portrait. 2 = Orientation is forced to Reverse Landscape. 3 = Orientation is forced to Reverse Portrait. You can monitor changes in orientation by reading the screen width and height using the the Gr.screen or Screen commands. Gr.statusbar {<height_nvar>} {, showing_lvar} Returns information about the Status Bar. If the height variable <height_nvar> is present, it is set to the nominal height of the Status Bar. If the showing flag <showing_lvar> is present, it is set to 0 (false, not showing) or 1 (true, showing) based on on how Graphics Mode was opened. The parameters are both optional. If you omit the first parameter but use the second, you must keep the comma. Gr.statusbar.show <nexp> This command has been deprecated. To show the status bar on the graphics screen, use the optional fifth parameter in Gr.open. Gr.render This command displays all the objects that are listed in the current working Display List. It is not necessary to have a Pause command after a Gr.render. The Gr.render command will not complete until the contents of the Display List have been fully displayed. Gr.render always waits until the next screen refresh. Most Android devices refresh the screen 60 times per second; your device may be faster or slower. Therefore, if you execute two consecutive Gr.render commands, there will be a delay of 16.7 milliseconds (on most devices) between the two commands. For smooth animation, try to avoid doing more than 16.7 ms of work between Gr.render commands, to achieve the maximum refresh rate. This is not a lot of time for a BASIC! program, so you may have to settle for a lower frame rate. However, there is no benefit to trying to render more often than 16.7 ms. If BASIC! is running in the background (see Background() function and Home command), Gr.render will not execute. It will pause your program until you return BASIC! to the foreground. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 160 De Re BASIC!

161 Gr.screen width, height{, density } Returns the screen's width and height, and optionally its density, in the numeric variables. The density, in dots per inch (dpi), is a standardized Android density value (usually 120, 160, or 240 dpi), and not necessarily the real physical density of the screen. If a Gr.orientation command changes the orientation, the width and height values from a previous Gr.screen command are invalid. Android s orientation-change animation takes time. You may need to wait for a second or so after Gr.open or Gr.orientation before executing Gr.screen, otherwise the width and height values may be set before the orientation change is complete. Gr.screen returns a subset of the information returned by the newer Screen command. Gr.scale x_factor, y_factor Scale all drawing commands by the numeric x and y scale factors. This command is provided to allow you to draw in a device-independent manner and then scale the drawing to the actual size of the screen that your program is running on. For example:! Set the device independent sizes di_height = 480 di_width = 800! Get the actual width and height gr.open % defaults: white, no status bar, landscape gr.screen actual_w, actual_h! Calculate the scale factors scale_width = actual_w /di_width scale_height = actual_h /di_height! Set the scale gr.scale scale_width, scale_height Now, start drawing based upon di_height and di_width. The drawings will be scaled to fit the device running the program. Gr.cls Clears the graphics screen. Deletes all previously drawn objects; all existing object references are invalid. Deletes all existing Paints and resets all Gr.color or Gr.text {size align bold strike underline skew} settings. Disposes of the current Object List and Display List and creates a new Initial Display List. Note: bitmaps are not deleted. They will not be drawn because no graphical objects point to them, but the bitmaps still exist. Variables that point to them remain valid. The Gr.render command must be called to make the cleared screen visible to the user. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 161 De Re BASIC!

162 Gr.close Closes the opened graphics mode. The program will continue to run. The graphics screen will be removed. The text output screen will be displayed. Gr.front flag Determines whether the graphics screen or the Output Console will be the front-most screen. If flag = 0, the Output Console will be the front-most screen and seen by the user. If flag <> 0, the graphics screen will be the front-most screen and seen by the user. One use for this command is to display the Output Console to the user while in graphics mode. Use Gr.front 0 to show text output and Gr.front 1 to switch back to the graphics screen. Note: When the Output Console is in front of the graphics screen, you can still draw (but not render) onto the graphics screen. The Gr.front 1 must be executed before any Gr.render. Print commands will continue to print to the Output Console even while the graphic screen is in front. Gr.brightness <nexp> Sets the brightness of the graphics screen. The value of the numeric expression should be between 0.01 (darkest) and 1.00 (brightest). Graphical Object Creation Commands These commands create graphical objects and add them to the Object List, also adding their Object Numbers to the Display List. You create each object with parameters that describe what to draw and where. Once it is created, you can read back its parameters by name with the Gr.get.value command. You can change any parameter with the Gr.modify command. The parameters you can modify are listed with each command's description. Along with the parameters listed with each command, every graphical object has two other modifiable parameters, "paint" and "alpha". See the Gr.modify and Gr.paint.get command descriptions for more details. There are three commands that create graphical objects that are not in this section: Gr.text.draw, Gr.bitmap.draw, and Gr.clip. Gr.point <obj_nvar>, x, y Creates a point object. The point will be located at (x,y). The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for this point. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The appearance of the point object is affected by the current stroke weight and the AntiAlias setting. The object is rendered as a square, centered on (x,y) and as big as the current stroke. If AntiAlias is on, it will blur the point, making it larger and dimmer. To color a single pixel, use Gr.set.stroke 0 and Gr.set.antialias 0. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.point are: "x" and "y". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 162 De Re BASIC!

163 Gr.line <obj_nvar>, x1, y1, x2, y2 Creates a line object. The line will start at (x1,y1) and end at (x2,y2). The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for this line. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The thinnest horizontal lines and vertical lines are drawn with Gr.set.stroke 0. These lines will be two pixels wide if AntiAlias is on. Turn AntiAlias off to draw single-pixel wide horizontal and vertical lines. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.line are: "x1", "y1", "x2" and "y2". Gr.rect <ob_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom Creates a rectangle object. The rectangle will be located within the bounds of the parameters. The rectangle will or will not be filled depending upon the Gr.color style parameter. The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for this rectangle. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.rect are: "left", "top", "right" and "bottom". Gr.oval <obj_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom Creates an oval-shaped object. The oval will be located within the bounds of the parameters. The oval will or will not be filled depending upon the Gr.color style parameter. The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for this oval. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.oval are: "left", "top", "right" and "bottom". Gr.arc <obj_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom, start_angle, sweep_angle, fill_mode Creates an arc-shaped object. The arc will be created within the rectangle described by the parameters. It will start at the specified start_angle and sweep clockwise through the specified sweep_angle. The angle values are in degrees. The effect of the fill_mode parameter depends on the Gr.color style parameter: Style 0, fill_mode false: Only the arc is drawn. Style 0, fill_mode true: The arc is drawn with lines connecting each endpoint to the center of the bounding rectangle. The resulting closed figure is not filled. Style non-0, fill_mode false: The endpoints of the arc are connected by a single straight line. The resulting figure is filled. Style non-0, fill_mode true: The arc is drawn with lines connecting each endpoint to the center of the bounding rectangle. The resulting closed figure is filled. The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for this arc. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.arc are: "left", "top", "right", "bottom", "start_angle", "sweep_angle" and "fill_mode". The value for "fill_mode" is either false (0) or true (not 0). Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 163 De Re BASIC!

164 Gr.circle <obj_nvar>, x, y, radius Creates a circle object. The circle will be created with the given radius around the designated center (x,y) coordinates. The circle will or will not be filled depending upon the Gr.color style parameter. The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for this circle. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.circle are "x", "y", and "radius". Gr.set.pixels <obj_nvar>, pixels[{<start>,<length>}] {,x,y} Inserts an array of pixel points into the Object List. The array (pixels[]) or array segment (pixels[start,length]) contains pairs of x and y coordinates for each pixel. The pixels[] array or array segment may be any size but must have an even number of elements. If the optional x,y expression pair is present, the values will be added to each of the x and y coordinates of the array. This provides the ability to move the pixel array around the screen. The default values for the x,y pair is 0,0. Negative values for the x,y pair are valid. Pixels will be drawn as 2x2 matrix pixels if AntiAlias is on and the stroke = 0. To draw single-pixel pixels, set AntiAlias off and set the stroke = 0. AntiAlias in on by default. The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for the object. The pixels will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The Gr.modify parameters for this command are "x" and "y". In addition to modify, the individual elements of the pixel array can be changed on the fly. For example: Pixels[3] = 120 Pixels[4] = 200 will cause the second pixel to be located at x = 120, y = 200 at the next rendering. Gr.poly <obj_nvar>, list_pointer {,x, y} Creates an object that draws a closed polygon of any number of sides. The <obj_nvar> returns the Object List object number for this polygon. This object will not be visible until the next Gr.render. The list_pointer is an expression that points to a List data structure. The list contains x,y coordinate pairs. The first coordinate pair defines the point at which the polygon drawing starts. Each subsequent coordinate pair defines a line drawn from the previous coordinate pair to this coordinate pair. A final line drawn from the last point back to the first closes the polygon. If the optional x,y expression pair is present, the values will be added to each of the x and y coordinates of the list. This provides the ability to move the polygon array around the screen. The default x,y pair is 0,0. Negative values for x and y are valid. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 164 De Re BASIC!

165 The polygon line width, line color, alpha and fill are determined by previous Gr.color and Gr.set.stroke commands just like any other drawn object. These attributes are owned by the poly object, not by the list. If you use the same list in different Gr.poly commands, the color, stroke, etc., may be different. You can change the polygon (add, delete, or move points) by directly manipulating the list with List commands. You can change to a different list of points using Gr.Modify with "list" as the tag parameter. Changes are not visible until the Gr.render command is called. When you create a polygon with Gr.poly or attach a new list with Gr.modify, the list must have an even number of values and at least two coordinate pairs (four values). These rules are enforced with run-time errors. The rules cannot be enforced when you modify the list with List commands. Instead, if you have an odd number of coordinates, the last is ignored. If you have only one point, Gr.render draws nothing. The Gr.modify parameters are "x", "y" and "list". See the Sample Program file, f30_poly, for working examples of Gr.poly. Groups You can put graphical objects into groups. A group is a list of graphical objects. When you perform certain operation on a group, the operation is performed on each object in the group. You group graphical objects by creating a Group Object on the Display List. You use the group by putting its object number in a graphics command where you would use any other graphical object number. In this version of BASIC!, you can use a Group Object in these commands: Gr.move: moves all of the objects by the same x and y amounts Gr.hide: hides all of the objects Gr.show: shows (unhides) all of the objects Gr.show.toggle: any objects that are showing will be hidden, and any objects that are hidden will be shown. You use graphics commands to act on the objects in the group s list. You use the List commands to act on the list: add objects, count the objects, clear the list, and so on. Try running this example. Watch as the top circle moves to the right, then the top two, and finally the top three, as circles are added one-by-one to the list attached to the group. GR.OPEN,,,,,1 : GR.COLOR,255,0,0,2 GR.CIRCLE c1,100,100,40 : GR.CIRCLE c2,100,200,40 GR.CIRCLE c3,100,300,40 : GR.CIRCLE c4,100,400,40 GR.RENDER : PAUSE 1000 % draw four red circles GR.GROUP g, c1 GR.GET.VALUE g, "list", glist GR.MOVE g, 0, 50 GR.RENDER : PAUSE 1000 % create a group with one circle % get the group s list of objects % move whole group 0 up/down, 50 right % only one circle moves Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 165 De Re BASIC!

166 LIST.ADD glist, c2 GR.MOVE g, 0, 50 GR.RENDER : PAUSE 1000 LIST.ADD glist, c2 GR.MOVE g, 0, 50 GR.RENDER : PAUSE 1000 % add another circle to the group s list % two circles move % add another circle to the group s list % three circles move GR.CLOSE : END Gr.group <object_number_nvar>{, <obj_nexp>}... Creates a group of graphical objects. All of the numeric expressions <obj_nexp> must evaluate to valid graphical object numbers. The object numbers are put in a list and attached to the group. The <object_number_nvar> returns the Object List object number for the group. The Gr.modify parameter is "list". Gr.group.list <object_number_nvar>, <list_ptr_nexp> Creates a group from a list of graphical objects. The List is assumed to contain valid graphical object numbers, but it is not checked. The list is simply attached to the group. The list pointer parameter <list_ptr_nexp> is optional. If you provide an expression that evaluates to a valid List pointer, the List that the pointer addresses supplies the graphical objects that are put in the group. Otherwise, the group is empty. If you provide a numeric variable that does not already point to a list, the variable is set to point to the group s empty list. The <object_number_nvar> returns the Object List object number for the group. The Gr.modify parameter is "list". Gr.group.getDL <object_number_nvar> Creates a group from the current Display List. The Display List is copied to a new list that is attached to the group. The <object_number_nvar> returns the Object List object number for the group. The Gr.modify parameter is "list". Gr.group.newDL <object_number_nvar> Replaces the existing Display List with a new list read from the specified group. The <object_number_nvar> returns the Object List object number for the group. The Gr.modify parameter is "list". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 166 De Re BASIC!

167 Hide and Show Commands Gr.hide <object_number_nexp> Hides the object with the specified Object Number. If the Object is a Group, all of the Graphical Objects in the Group are hidden. This change will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. Gr.show <object_number_nexp> Shows (unhides) the object with the specified Object Number. If the Object is a Group, all of the Graphical Objects in the Group are shown. This change will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. Gr.show.toggle <object_number_nexp> Toggles visibility of the object with the specified Object Number. If it is hidden, it will be shown. If it is shown, it will be hidden. If the Object is a Group, all of the Graphical Objects in the Group are toggled. This change will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. Touch Query Commands If the user touches the screen and then moves the finger without lifting the finger from the screen, the motion can be tracked by repeatedly calling on the touch query commands. This will allow you to program the dragging of graphical objects around the screen. The Sample Program, f23_breakout.bas, illustrates this with the code that moves the paddle. The OnGrTouch: label can be used optionally to interrupt your program when a new touch is detected. The touch commands report on one- or two-finger touches on the screen. If the two fingers cross each other on the x-axis then touch and touch2 will swap. Gr.touch touched, x, y Tests for a touch on the graphics screen. If the screen is being touched, Touched is returned as true (not 0) with the (x,y) coordinates of the touch. If the screen is not currently touched, Touched returns false (0) with the (x,y) coordinates of the last previous touch. If the screen has never been touched, the x and y variables are left unchanged. The command continues to return true as long as the screen remains touched. If you want to detect a single short tap, after detecting the touch, you should loop until touched is false. DO GR.TOUCH touched, x, y UNTIL touched! Touch detected, now wait for! finger lifted DO GR.TOUCH touched, x, y UNTIL!touched Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 167 De Re BASIC!

168 The returned values are relative to the actual screen size. If you have scaled the screen then you need to similarly scale the returned parameters. If the parameters that you used in Gr.scale were scale_x and scale_y (Gr.scale scale_x, scale_y) then divide the returned x and y by those same values. GR.TOUCH touched, x, y Xscaled = x / scale_x Yscaled = y / scale_y Gr.bounded.touch touched, left, top, right, bottom The Touched parameter will be returned true (not zero) if the user has touched the screen within the rectangle defined by the left, top, right, bottom parameters. If the screen has not been touched or has been touched outside of the bounding rectangle, the touched parameter will be return as false (zero). The command will continue to return true as long as the screen remains touched and the touch is within the bounding rectangle. The bounding rectangle parameters are for the actual screen size. If you have scaled the screen then you need to similarly scale the bounding rectangle parameters. If the parameters that you used in Gr.scale were scale_x and scale_y (Gr.scale scale_x, scale_y) then divide left and right by scale_x and divide top and bottom by scale_y. Gr.touch2 touched, x, y The same as Gr.touch except that it reports on second simultaneous touch of the screen. Gr.bounded.touch2 touched, left, top, right, bottom The same as Gr.bounded.touch except that it reports on second simultaneous touch of the screen. OnGrTouch: Interrupt label that traps any touch on the Graphics screen (see "Interrupt Labels"). BASIC! executes the statements following the OnGrTouch: label until it reaches a Gr.onGrTouch.resume command. To detect touches on the Output Console (not in Graphics mode), use OnConsoleTouch:. Gr.onGrTouch.resume Resumes execution at the point in the BASIC! program where the OnGrTouch: interrupt occurred. Text Commands Overview Gr.text.draw is the only text command that creates a graphical object. The other text commands set attributes of text yet to be drawn or report measurements of text. Each command that sets a text attribute (the Gr.text.align, bold, size, skew, strike, and underline commands, as well as Gr.text.setfont and typeface) has an optional "Paint pointer" parameter that may be used to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted, and the command sets a text attribute for all text objects drawn after the command is executed. For using the Paint pointer, see "Paints Advanced Usage", above. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 168 De Re BASIC!

169 Gr.text.height returns information about how text would be drawn. It does not measure a drawn text object, but uses information from the current Paint. Gr.text.width and Gr.get.textbounds commands can return information about how text would be drawn or how a text object was actually drawn. If used to measure the text of a string expression, they use information from the current Paint. If used to measure the text of a text object that was already drawn, they use information from the text object. Gr.text.align {{<type_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Align the text relative to the (x,y) coordinates given in the Gr.text.draw command. type values: 1 = Left, 2 = Center, 3 = Right. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.text.bold {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Turns bold on or off on text objects drawn after this command is issued: If the value of the bold parameter <lexp> is false (0), text bold is turned off. If the parameter value is true (not zero), makes text appear bold. If the parameter is omitted, the bold setting is toggled. If the color fill parameter is 0, only the outline of the bold text will be shown. If fill <>0, the text outline will be filled. This is a "fake bold", simulated by graphical techniques. It may not look the same as text drawn after setting "Bold" style with Gr.text.setfont or Gr.text.typeface. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.text.size {{<size_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Specifies the size of the text in pixels. The size <nexp> sets the nominal height of the characters. This height is large enough to include the top of characters with ascenders, like "h", and the bottom of characters with descenders, like "y". Character width is scaled proportionately to the height. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.text.skew {{<skew_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Skews the text to give an italic effect. Negative values of <nexp> skew the bottom of the text left. This makes the text lean forward. Positive values do the opposite. Traditional italics can be best imitated with <nexp> = You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 169 De Re BASIC!

170 Gr.text.strike {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Turns overstrike on or off on text objects drawn after this command is issued: If the value of the strike parameter <lexp> is false (0), text strike is turned off. If the parameter value is true (not zero), text will be drawn with a strike-through line. If the parameter is omitted, the bold setting is toggled. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.text.underline {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}} Turns underlining on or off on text objects drawn after this command is issued: If the value of the underline parameter <lexp> is false (0), text underlining is turned off. If the parameter value is true (not zero), drawn text will be underlined. If the parameter is omitted, the underline setting is toggled. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.text.setfont {{<font_ptr_nexp> <font_family_sexp>} {, <style_sexp>} {,<paint_nexp>}} Set the text font, specifying typeface and style. Both of these parameters are optional. This command is similar to the older Gr.text.typeface, but it is more flexible. If the font parameter is a numerical expression <font_ptr_nexp>, it must be a font pointer value returned by the Font.load command. You cannot modify the style of a font once it is loaded, so the the style parameter <style_sexp> is ignored. If the font parameter is a string expression <font_family_sexp>, it must specify one of the font families available on your Android device. If your device does not recognize the string, the font is set to the system default font typeface. On most systems, the default is "sans serif". The standard font families are "monospace", "serif", and "sans serif". Some more recent versions of Android also support "sans-serif", "sans-serif-light", "sans-serif-condensed", and "sans-serif-thin". The font family names are not case-sensitive: "Serif" or "SERIF" works as well as "serif". If you omit the font parameter, the command sets the most recently loaded font (see Font.load). If you have deleted fonts (see Font.delete), the command sets the most recently loaded font that has not been deleted. If you have not loaded any fonts, or if you have cleared them (see Font.clear), the command sets the default font family. If you specify a font family, you can use the style parameter <style_sexp> to change the font s appearance. The parameter value must be one of the style strings shown in the table below. You may use either the full style name or an abbreviation as shown. The parameter is not case-senstive: "BOLD", "bold", "Bold", and "bold" are all the same. If you use any other string, or if you omit the style parameter, the style is set to "NORMAL". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 170 De Re BASIC!

171 Style Name "NORMAL" "BOLD" "ITALIC" "BOLD_ITALIC" Abbreviation "N" "B" "I" "BI" Notes: The "monospace" font family always displays as "normal", regardless of the style parameter. Some devices do not support all of the styles. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.text.typeface {{<font_nexp>} {, <style_nexp>} {,<paint_nexp>}} Set the text typeface and style. Both of these parameters are optional. The default value if you omit either parameter is 1. All valid values and their meanings are shown in this table: The values for <font_nexp> are: The values for <style_nexp> are: 1 Default font 1 Normal (not bold or italic) 2 Monospace font 2 Bold 3 Sans-serif font 3 Italic 4 Serif font 4 Bold and italic This command is similar to the newer Gr.text.setfont, except that it is limited to the four typefaces listed in the table. It cannot specify fonts loaded by the Font.load command. Notes: The "Monospace" font (font 2) always displays as "Normal" (style 1), regardless of the style parameter. Some devices do not support all of the styles. You may use the optional Paint pointer parameter <paint_nexp> to specify a Paint object to modify. Normally this parameter is omitted. See Gr.color, Advanced usage for more information. Gr.text.height {<height_nvar>} {, <up_nvar>} {, <down_nvar>} Returns height information for the current font and text size. All of the parameters are optional; use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). If the height variable <height_nvar> is present, it is set to the height in pixels of the space that will be used to print most text in most languages. This is the value you set with Gr.text.size. In typeface terminology, it is the "ascent" plus the "descent". The space contains the ascenders of letters like "h" and the descenders of letters like "y". Some letters, such as the Polish letter "Ż", may not fit in this space. The position of a line high enough to contain all possible characters is returned in the up variable <up_nvar>, if it is present. If the down variable <down_nvar> is present, it is set to the "descent" value. This position is low enough to contain the lowest part of all possible characters, such as the tail of a "y". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 171 De Re BASIC!

172 Gr.text.draw positions text so the the body of the characters sit on a line called the baseline. The down and up values are reported as offsets from this baseline. The up value is negative, because it defines a position above the baseline. The down value is positive, because its position is below the baseline. The height value is not an offset, so it is always positive. down - up is always larger than height. Sometimes you want to know the real screen positions of the top and bottom of the area where your text will be drawn, independent of the actual text you will draw there. The bottom of this area is the y coordinate of Gr.text.draw plus the down value of Gr.text.height. For most applications, the top of the text area is the bottom position minus the height value of Gr.text.height, so y + down - height. For some applications (such as a Polish text field), you may need the extra height you get with y + up. GR.TEXT.SIZE 40 GR.TEXT.HEIGHT ht, up, dn % ht is 40 GR.TEXT.DRAW t, x, y, "Hello, World!" txtbottom = y + dn txttop = txtbottom - ht % good for most applications txttop = y + up % high enough for all possible text (up is negative) Gr.text.width <nvar>, <exp> Returns the pixel width of a string (from <exp>) in the variable <nvar>. If the parameter <exp> is a string expression, the return value is the width of the string as if it were displayed on the screen using the latest text attribute settings: the typeface, size, and style as set by the Gr.text.* commands (or default values if you did not set them). If the parameter <exp> is a numeric expression, its value must be a text object number from Gr.text.draw, or you will get a run-time error. The return value is the width of the text of the object as it would be displayed on the screen by Gr.render. Advanced usage: To calculate dimensions, both Gr.text.width and Gr.get.textbounds (below) use a text string and a set of text attributes. The text attributes are kept in a Paint object. The source of the string and the Paint depends on the type of the <exp> parameter: If <exp> is a value of <exp> is source of text string is Source of text attributes is string expression the string to measure value of <exp> Current Paint (most recent Gr.text.* settings) numeric expression a text object number from Gr.text.draw string from Gr.text.draw (kept in text object) Paint attached to the text object (see Note, below) Note: Gr.text.draw attaches a Paint to the text object using the text attributes that are current at that time. This is the Paint Gr.render uses to display the text on the screen. If you modify this Paint, the changes are reflected in values returned by Gr.text.width and Gr.get.textbounds, and also shown on the screen with the next Gr.render. Gr.get.textbounds <exp>, left, top, right, bottom Gets the boundary rectangle of a string as it would be drawn on the screen. The returned coordinate values give you the dimensions of the bounding rectangle but not its location. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 172 De Re BASIC!

173 The parameter <exp> follows the same rules as Gr.text.width (see above) to get a text string and the text attributes (typeface, size, and style) used to measure the string. The coordinates of the rectangle are reported as if Gr.text.draw positioned your text at 0,0. You get the actual boundaries of a text object by adding the textbounds offsets to the actual x,y coordinates of the Gr.text.draw command. In typeface terminology, the coordinate values are offsets from the beginning of the baseline of the text (see Gr.text.draw and Gr.text.height for more explanation of the lines that define where text is drawn). This is why the value returned for "top" is always a negative number. If this is confusing, try running this example: GR.OPEN,,,,,-1 GR.COLOR 255,255,0,0,0 GR.TEXT.SIZE 40 GR.TEXT.ALIGN 1 s$ = "This is only a test" GR.GET.TEXTBOUNDS s$,l,t,r,b PRINT l,t,r,b x=10 : y=50 GR.RECT rct,l+x,t+y,r+x,b+y GR.TEXT.DRAW txt,x,y,s$ GR.RENDER PAUSE 5000 Gr.text.draw <object_number_nvar>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp>, <text_object_sexp> Creates and inserts a text object (<text_object_sexp>) into the Display List. The text object will use the latest color and text preparatory commands. The <object_number_nvar> returns the Display List object number for this text. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. Gr.text.draw positions the text so the the bodies of the characters sit on a line called the baseline. The tails of letters like "y" hang below the baseline.the y value <y_nexp> sets the location of this baseline. The Gr.text.height command tells you the locations of the various lines used to draw text. The Gr.text.width command tells you width of the space in which a specific string will be drawn. The Gr.get.textbounds command tells you the locations of the left-, top-, right-, and bottom-most pixels actually drawn for a specific text string. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.text.draw are "x", "y", and "text". The value for "text" is a string representing the new text. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 173 De Re BASIC!

174 Bitmap Commands Overview When a bitmap is created, it is added to a list of bitmaps. Commands that create bitmaps return a pointer to the bitmap. The pointer is an index into the bitmap list. Your program works with the bitmap through the bitmap pointer. If you want to draw the bitmap on the screen, you must add a graphical object to the Object List. The Gr.bitmap.draw command creates a graphical object that holds a pointer to the bitmap. Do not confuse the bitmap with the graphical object. You cannot use the Object Number to access the bitmap, and you cannot use the bitmap pointer to modify the graphical object. Android devices limit the amount of memory available to your program. Bitmaps may use large blocks of memory, and so may exceed the application memory limit. If a command that creates a bitmap exceeds the limit, the bitmap is not created, and the command returns -1, an invalid bitmap pointer. Your program should test the bitmap pointer to find out if the bitmap was created. If the bitmap pointer is -1, you can call the GETERROR$() function to get information about the error. If a command exceeds the memory limit, but BASIC! does not catch the out-of-memory condition, your program terminates with an error message displayed on the Console screen. If you return the Editor, a line will be highlighted near the one that exceeded the memory limit. It may not be exactly the right line. Bitmaps use four bytes of memory for each pixel. The amount of memory used depends only on the width and height of the bitmap. The bitmap is not compressed. When you load a bitmap from a file, the file is usually in a compressed format, so the bitmap will usually be larger than the file. Gr.bitmap.create <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, width, height Creates an empty bitmap of the specified width and height. The specified width and height may be greater than the size of the screen, if needed. Returns a pointer to the created bitmap in the <bitmap_ptr_nvar> variable for use with the other Gr.bitmap commands. If there is not enough memory available to create the bitmap, the returned bitmap pointer is -1. Call GETERROR$() for information about the failure. Gr.bitmap.load <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <file_name_sexp> Creates a bitmap from the file specified in the file_name string expression. Returns a pointer to the created bitmap for use with other Gr.bitmap commands. If no bitmap is created, the returned bitmap pointer is -1. Call GETERROR$() for information about the failure. Some of the possible causes are: The file or resource does not exist. There is not enough memory available to create the bitmap. Bitmap image files are assumed to be located in the "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/" directory. Note: You may include path fields in the file name. For example, "../../Cougar.jpg" would cause BASIC! to look for Cougar.jpg in the top level directory of the base drive, usually the SD card. "images/kitty.png" Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 174 De Re BASIC!

175 would cause BASIC! to look in the images(d) sub-directory of the "/sdcard/rfo-basic/data/" ("/sdcard/rfo-basic/data/images/kitty.png"). Note: Bitmaps loaded with this command cannot be changed with the Gr.bitmap.drawinto command. To draw into an image loaded from a file, first create an empty bitmap then draw the loaded bitmap into the empty bitmap. Gr.bitmap.size <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, width, height Return the pixel width and height of the bitmap pointed to by <bitmap_ptr_nexp> into the width and height variables. Gr.bitmap.scale <new_bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, width, height {, <smoothing_lexp>} Scales a previously loaded bitmap (<bitmap_ptr_nexp>) to the specified width and height and creates a new bitmap <new_bitmap_ptr_nvar>. The old bitmap still exists; it is not deleted. If there is not enough memory available to create the new bitmap, the returned bitmap pointer is -1. Call GETERROR$() for information about the failure. Negative values for width and height will cause the image to be flipped left to right or upside down. Neither the width value nor the height value may be zero. Use the optional smoothing logical expression (<smoothing_lexp>) to request that the scaled image not be smoothed. If the expression is false (zero) then the image will not be smoothed. If the optional parameter is true (not zero) or not specified then the image will be smoothed. Gr.bitmap.delete <bitmap_ptr_nexp> Deletes an existing bitmap. The bitmap's memory is returned to the system. This does not destroy any graphical object that points to the bitmap. If you do not Gr.hide such objects, or remove them from the Display List, you will get a run-time error from the next Gr.render command. Gr.bitmap.crop <new_bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <source_bitmap_ptr_nexp>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp>, <width_nexp>, <height_nexp> Creates a cropped copy of an existing source bitmap specified by <source_bitmap_ptr_nexp>. The source bitmap is unaffected; a rectangular section is copied into a new bitmap. A pointer to the new bitmap is returned in <new_bitmap_nvar>. If there is not enough memory available to create the new bitmap, the returned bitmap pointer is -1. Call GETERROR$() for information about the failure. The <x_nexp>, <y_nexp> pair specifies the point within the source bitmap that the crop is to start at. The <width_nexp>, <height_nexp> pair defines the size of the rectangular region to crop. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 175 De Re BASIC!

176 Gr.bitmap.save <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <filename_sexp>{, <quality_nexp>} Saves the specified bitmap to a file. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The file will be saved as a JPEG file if the filename ends in ".jpg". The file will be saved as a PNG file if the filename ends in anything else (including ".png"). Gr.bitmap.draw <object_ptr_nvar>, <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, x, y Creates a graphical object that contains a bitmap and inserts the object into the Object List. The bitmap is specified by the bitmap pointer <bitmap_ptr_nexp>. The bitmap will be drawn with its upper left corner at the provided (x,y) coordinates. The command returns the Object List object number of the graphical object in the <object_ptr_nvar> variable. This object will not be visible until the Gr.render command is called. The alpha value of the latest Gr.color will determine the transparency of the bitmap. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.bitmap.draw are "bitmap", "x" and "y". Gr.get.bmpixel <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, x, y, alpha, red, green, blue Return the color data for the pixel of the specified bitmap at the specified x, y coordinate. The x and y values must not exceed the length or width of the bitmap. Gr.bitmap.fill <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp> Change all of the points in an area of a bitmap to the current drawing color. The bitmap pointer parameter <bitmap_ptr_nexp> must specify an existing bitmap. The x and y parameters <x_nexp> and <y_nexp> must specify a point (x,y) in the bitmap. The area to color is a set of connected pixels all the same color. The area may be any shape, and the point (x,y) may be any point in the area. This command reads actual bitmap pixel colors, so it is affected by the antialiasing setting. If antialiasing is on, the pixels at the edge of the colored area may not be re-colored correctly. Gr.bitmap.drawinto.start <bitmap_ptr_nexp> Put BASIC! into the draw-into-bitmap mode. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 176 De Re BASIC!

177 All draw commands issued while in this mode draw directly into the bitmap. The objects drawn in this mode are not placed into the display list. The object number returned by the draw commands while in this mode is invalid and should not be used for any purpose including Gr.modify. Note: Bitmaps loaded with the Gr.bitmap.load command cannot be changed with Gr.bitmap.drawinto. To draw into an image loaded from a file, first create an empty bitmap then draw the loaded bitmap into the empty bitmap. Gr.bitmap.drawinto.end End the draw-into-bitmap mode.subsequent draw commands will place the objects into the display list for rendering on the screen. If you wish to display the drawn-into bitmap on the screen, issue a Bitmap.draw command for that bitmap. Paint Commands Gr.paint.copy {{<src_nexp>}{, <dst_nexp>}} Copy the Paint object at the source pointer <src_nexp> to the destination pointer <dst_next>. Both parameters are optional. If you wish to specify a destination, you must include a comma, whether or not you specify a source. If either parameter is omitted, or if its value is -1, the current Paint is used. The Paint already at the destination pointer is replaced. If the destination is the current Paint, a newlycreated paint becomes the current Paint. This command has four forms, depending on which parameters are present: GR.PAINT.COPY % Duplicate the current Paint GR.PAINT.COPY m % Copy Paint m to the current Paint GR.PAINT.COPY, n % Overwrite Paint n so it is the same as the current Paint GR.PAINT.COPY m, n % Overwrite Paint n so it is the same as Paint m Gr.paint.get <object_ptr_nvar> Gets a pointer (<object_ptr_nvar>) to the last created Paint object. For information about Paint objects, see the section Graphics Introduction Paints, above. This pointer can be used to change the Paint object associated with a draw object by means of the Gr.modify command. The Gr.modify parameter is "paint". If you want to modify any of the paint characteristics of an object then you will need to create a current Paint object with those parameters changed. For example: GR.COLOR 255,0,255,0,0 GR.TEXT.SIZE 20 GR.TEXT.ALIGN 2 GR.PAINT.GET the_paint GR.MODIFY shot, "paint", the_paint changes the current text size and alignment as well as the color. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 177 De Re BASIC!

178 Gr.paint.reset {<nexp>} Force the specified Paint to default settings: Color opaque black (255, 0, 0, 0) Antialias ON Style FILL (0) Minimum stroke width (0.0) The parameter is optional. If the parameter is omitted or set to -1, a new current Paint is created with default settings. Rotate Commands These commands put graphics objects on the Display List like the GR drawing commands, but they don t draw anything. Instead they work as markers in the list. When the renderer sees the start marker, it temporarily rotates its coordinate system. The end marker tells the renderer to restore the coordinate system to normal. The effect is to rotate or move any objects drawn after Gr.rotate.start and before Gr.rotate.end. As with any graphics object, the rotate parameters may be changed with Gr.modify. At the next Gr.render, the rotated objects will be redrawn in their new positions. Gr.rotate.start angle, x, y{,<obj_nvar>} Any objects drawn between the Gr.rotate.start and Gr.rotate.end will be rotated at the specified angle, in degrees, around the specified (x,y) point. If the angle is positive, objects are rotated clockwise. The optional <obj_nvar> will contain the Object list object number of the Gr.rotate.start object. If you are going to use rotated objects in the array for Gr.NewDl then you will need to include the Gr.rotate.start and Gr.rotate.end objects. The Gr.modify parameters for Gr.rotate.start are "angle", "x" and "y". Gr.rotate.start must be eventually followed by Gr.rotate.end or you will not get the expected results. Gr.rotate.end {<obj_nvar>} Ends the rotated drawing of objects. Objects created after this command will not be rotated. The optional <obj_nvar> will contain the Object list object number of the Gr.rotate.end object. If you are going to use rotated objects in the array for Gr.NewDl then you will need to include the Gr.rotate.start and Gr.rotate.end objects. Camera Commands There are three ways to use the camera from BASIC!: 1) The device s built in Camera User Interface can be used to capture an image. This method provides access to all the image-capture features that you get when you execute the device s Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 178 De Re BASIC!

179 Camera application. The difference is the image bitmap is returned to BASIC! for manipulation by BASIC! The Gr.camera.shoot command implements this mode. 2) A picture can be taken automatically when the command is executed. This mode allows for untended, time-sequenced image capture. The command provides for the setting the flash to on, off and auto. The Gr.camera.autoshoot command implements this mode. 3) The third mode is the Gr.camera.manualshoot command which is much like the autoshoot mode. The difference is that a live preview is provided and the image is not captured until the screen is touched. All pictures are taken at full camera resolution and stored with 100% jpg quality as "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/image.png". All of these commands also return pointers to bitmaps. The bitmaps produced are scaled down by a factor of 4. You may end up generating several other bitmaps from these returned bitmaps. For example, you many need to scale the returned bitmap to get it to fit onto your screen. Any bitmaps that you are not going to draw and render should be deleted using Gr.bitmap.delete to avoid out-of-memory situations. The Sample Program, f33_camera.bas, demonstrates all the modes of camera operations. It also provides examples of scaling the returned image to fit the screen, writing text on the image and deleting obsolete bitmaps. The Sample Program, f34_remote_camera.bas, demonstrates remote image capture using two different Android devices. Gr.camera.select 1 2 Selects the Back (1) or Front(2) camera in devices with two cameras. The default camera is the back (opposite the screen) camera. If only one exists camera exists, then the default will be that camera. For example, if the device (such as the Nexus 7) only has a Front Camera then it will be the default camera. If the device does not have any installed camera apps, then there will be a run-time error message, "This device does not have a camera." In addition, a run-time error message will be shown if the device does not have the type of camera (front or back) selected. Gr.camera.shoot <bm_ptr_nvar> The command calls the device s built in camera user interface to take a picture. The image is returned to BASIC! as a bitmap pointed to by the bm_ptr numeric variable. If the camera interface does not, for some reason, take a picture, bm_ptr will be returned with a zero value. Many of the device camera interfaces will also store the captured images somewhere else in memory with a date coded filename. These images can be found with the gallery application. BASIC! is not able to prevent these extraneous files from being created. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 179 De Re BASIC!

180 Note: Some devices like the Nexus 7 do not come with a built in camera interface. If you have installed an aftermarket camera application then it will be called when executing this command. You can take pictures with the Nexus 7 (or similar devices) using the other commands even if you do not have camera application installed. If the device does not have any installed camera apps, then there will be a run-time error message, "This device does not have a camera." Gr.camera.autoshoot <bm_ptr_nvar>{, <flash_ mode_nexp> {, focus_mode_nexp} } An image is captured as soon as the command is executed. No user interaction is required. This command can be used for untended, time-sequence image captures. The optional flash_mode numeric expression specifies the flash operation: 0 Auto Flash 1 Flash On 2 Flash Off 3 Torch 4 Red-eye The default, if no parameter is given, is Auto Flash. The optional focus_mode numeric expression specifies the camera focus: 0 Auto Focus 1 Fixed Focus 2 Focus at Infinity 3 Macro Focus (close-up) The default, if no parameter is given, is Auto Focus. If you want to specify a focus mode, you must also specify a flash mode. The command also stores the captured image into the file, "<pref base drive>/rfobasic/data/image.png". Gr.camera.manualShoot <bm_ptr_nvar>{, <flash_ mode_nexp> {, focus_mode_nexp} } This command is much like Gr.camera.autoshoot except that a live preview is shown on the screen. The image will not be captured until the user taps the screen. Other Graphics Commands Gr.screen.to_bitmap <bm_ptr_nvar> The current contents of the screen will be placed into a bitmap. The pointer to the bitmap will be returned in the bm_ptr variable. If there is not enough memory available to create the bitmap, the returned bitmap pointer is -1. Call GETERROR$() for information about the failure. Please note the idiosyncratic underscore in the command. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 180 De Re BASIC!

181 Gr.get.pixel x, y, alpha, red, green, blue Returns the color data for the screen pixel at the specified x, y coordinate. The x and y values must not exceed the width and height of the screen and must not be less than zero. To get a pixel from the screen, BASIC! must first create a bitmap from the screen. If there is not enough memory available to create the bitmap, you will get an "out-of-memory" run-time error. Gr.save <filename_sexp> {,<quality_nexp>} Saves the current screen to a file. The default path is "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/". The file will be saved as a JPEG file if the filename ends in ".jpg". The file will be saved as a PNG file if the filename ends in anything else (including ".png"). The optional <quality_nexp> is used to specify the quality of a saved JPEG file. The value may range from 0 (bad) to 100 (very good). The default value is 50. The quality parameter has no effect on PNG files which are always saved at the highest quality level. Note: The size of the JPEG file depends on the quality. Lower quality values produce smaller files. Gr.get.type <object_ptr_nexp>, <type_svar> Get the type of the specified display list object. The type is a string that matches the name of the command that created the object: "point", "circle", "rect", etc. For a complete list of types, see the table in Gr.Modify. If the <object_ptr_nexp> parameter does not specify a valid display list object, the returned type is the empty string, "". You can call the GETERROR$() function to get information about the error. Gr.get.params <object_ptr_nexp>, <param_array$[]> Get the modifiable parameters of the specified display list object. The parameter strings are returned in the <param_array$[]> in no particular order. The array is specified without an index. If the array exists, it is overwritten. Otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a one-dimensional array. For a complete list of parameters, see the table in Gr.Modify. Gr.get.position <object_ptr_nexp>, x, y Get the current x,y position of the specified display list object. If the object was specified with rectangle parameters (left, top, right, bottom) then left is returned in x and top is returned in y. For Line objects, the x1 and y1 parameters are returned. Gr.move <object_ptr_nexp> {{, dx}{, dy}} Moves the graphics object by the amounts dx and dy. If the object is a group, all of the graphical objects in the group are moved. The dx and dy parameters are optional. If omitted they default to 0. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 181 De Re BASIC!

182 Gr.get.value <object_ptr_nexp> {, <tag_sexp>, <value_nvar value_svar>}... The value of the parameter named <tag_sexp> ("left", "radius", etc.) in the Display List object <object_ptr_nvar> is returned in the variable <value_nvar> or <value_svar>. This command can return values from only one object at a time, but you may list as many tag/variable pairs as you want. Most parameters are numeric. Only the Gr.text.draw "text" parameter is returned in a string var. The parameters for each object are given with descriptions of the commands in this manual. For a complete list of parameters, see the table in Gr.Modify. Gr.modify <object_ptr_nexp> {, <tag_sexp>, <value_nexp value_sexp>}... The value of the parameter named <tag_sexp> in the Display List object <object_ptr_nvar> is changed to the value of the expression <value_nexp> or <value_sexp>. This command can change only one object at a time, but you may list as many tag/value pairs as you want. With this command, you can change any of the parameters of any object in the Display List. The parameters you can change are given with the descriptions of the commands in this manual. In addition there are two general purpose parameters, "paint" and "alpha" (see below for details).you must provide parameter names that are valid for the specified object. The results of Gr.modify commands will not be observed until a Gr.render command executes. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 182 De Re BASIC!

183 SHAPES and OBJECTS TYPE POSITION 1 (numeric) POSITION 2 (numeric) ANGLE/RADIUS (numeric) UNIQUE (various) PAINT (list ptr) ALPHA (num) arc left top right bottom start_angle fill_mode paint alpha sweep_angle bitmap x y bitmap paint alpha circle x y radius paint alpha line x1 y1 x2 y2 paint alpha oval left top right bottom paint alpha pixels x y paint alpha point x y paint alpha poly x y list paint alpha rect left top right bottom paint alpha text x y text paint alpha clip left top right bottom RO paint alpha MODIgroup list paint alpha FIERS rotate x y angle paint alpha TABLE NOTES: The TYPE column shows the string returned by Gr.get.type for each graphical object type. Gr.get.position returns the values in the POSITION 1 columns. All table entries are Gr.modify tags (strings). Values of all the tags are numeric except for "text". The values of tags in the UNIQUE column are either strings ("text") or numbers with special interpretations. "fill_mode" is a logical value. "list" is a pointer to a list of point coordinates. "RO" is a Region Operator as explained in Gr.clip. "alpha" is an integer value from 0 to 256, with 256 interpreted specially. See General Purpose Parameters, below. You can modify the Gr.set.pixels point-coordinates array directly. There is no Gr.modify tag. For example, suppose a bitmap object was created with Gr.bitmap.draw BM_ptr, galaxy_ptr, 400, 120. Executing gr.modify BM_ptr, "x", 420 would move the bitmap from x =400 to x = 420. Executing gr.modify BM_ptr, "y", 200 would move the bitmap from y = 120 to y = 200. Executing gr.modify BM_ptr, "x", 420, "y", 200 would change both x and y at the same time. Executing gr.modify BM_ptr, "bitmap", Saturn_ptr would change the bitmap of an image of a (preloaded) Galaxy to the image of a (preloaded) Saturn. General Purpose Parameters When you create a graphical object, all the graphics settings (color, stroke, text settings, and so forth) are captured in a Paint object. You can use the "paint" parameter to replace the Paint object, changing any graphics setting you want to. See the Gr.paint.get command description (below) for more details. Normally, graphical objects get their alpha channel value (transparency) from the latest Gr.color command. You can change the "alpha" parameter to any value from 0 to 255. Setting alpha to 256 tells BASIC! to use the alpha from the latest color value. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 183 De Re BASIC!

184 For example, you can make an object slowly appear and disappear, just by changing its alpha with Gr.modify. Do For a = 1 to 255 step 10 gr.modify object,"alpha",a gr.render pause 250 next a For a = 255 to 1 step -10 gr.modify object,"alpha",a gr.render pause 250 next a until 0 GR_COLLISION(<object_1_nexp>, <object_2_nexp>) GR_COLLISION() is a function, not a command. The variables <object_1_nvar> and <object_2_nvar> are the object pointers returned when the objects were created. If the boundary boxes of the two objects overlap then the function will return true (not zero). If they do not overlap then the function will return false (zero). Objects that may be tested for collision are: rectangle, bitmap, circle, arc, oval, and text. In the case of a circle, an arc, an oval, or text, the object s rectangular boundary box is used for collision testing, not the actual drawn object. Gr.clip <object_ptr_nexp>, <left_nexp>, <top_nexp>, <right_nexp>, <bottom_nexp>{, <RO_nexp>} Objects that are drawn after this command is issued will be drawn only within the bounds (clipped) of the clip rectangle specified by the "left, top, right, bottom" numeric expressions. The final parameter is the Region Operator, <RO_nexp>. The Region Operator prescribes how this clip will interact with everything else you are drawing on the screen or bitmap. If you issue more than one Gr.clip command, the RO prescribes the interaction between the current Gr.clip rectangle and the previous one. The RO values are: 0 Intersect 1 Difference 2 Replace 3 Reverse Difference 4 Union 5 XOR The Region Operator parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the default action is Intersect. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 184 De Re BASIC!

185 Examples: Original Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 2 applied to Clip 1 with RO parameter on Clip 2 0 = Intersect 1 = Difference 2 = Replace 3 = Reverse Difference 4 = Union 5 = XOR Gr.clip is a display list object. It can be modified with Gr.modify. The modify parameters are "left", "top", "right", "bottom", and "RO". The Gr.show and Gr.hide commands can be used with the Gr.clip object. Gr.newDL <dl_array[{<start>,<length>}]> Replaces the existing display list with a new display list read from a numeric array (dl_array[]) or array segment (dl_array[start,length]) of object numbers. Zero values in the array will be treated as null objects in the display list. Null objects will not be drawn nor will they cause run-time errors. See the Display List subtopic in this chapter for a complete explanation. See the Sample Program file, f24_newdl, for a working example of this command. Gr.getDL <dl_array[]> {, <keep_all_objects_lexp> } Writes the current Display List into the numeric array <dl_array[]>. The array is specified without an index. If the array exists, it is overwritten. Otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a onedimensional array. If the Display List is empty, the array will have one entry that does not display anything. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 185 De Re BASIC!

186 By default, objects hidden with Gr.hide are not included in the returned array. To get all objects, including hidden objects, set the optional keep_all_objects flag to true (any non-zero value). Audio Interface Introduction The Audio Interface BASIC! uses the Android Media Player interface for playing music files. This interface is not the most stable part of Android. It sometimes gets confused about what it is doing. This can lead to random "Forced Close" events. While these events are rare, they do occur. Audio File Types The file types you can play depend on your device and the version of Android it runs. For a current list check the Android documentation. Here is a partial summary: Audio File Type Played by Android Version AAC AMR MIDI MP3 OGG WAV WMA all FLAC 3.1+ AAC-ELD 4.1+ MKV 5.0+ Commands Audio files must be loaded into the Audio File Table (AFT) before they can be played. Each audio file in the AFT has a unique index which is returned by the audio.load command. Audio.load <aft_nvar>, <filename_sexp> Loads a music file or internet stream into the Audio File Table. The AFT index is returned in <aft_nvar>. If the file or stream can t be loaded, the <aft_nvar> is set to 0. Your program should test the AFT index to find out if the audio was loaded. If the AFT index is 0, you can call the GETERROR$() function to get information about the error. If you use index 0 in another Audio command you will get a run-time error. To load a music file, specify an optional path and a filename. For example: "Blue Danube Waltz.mp3" would access "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/blue Danube Waltz.mp3". "../../Music/Blue Danube Waltz.mp3" would access "<pref base drive>/music/blue Danube Waltz.mp3". To load an internet stream, specify a full URL. Audio.play <aft_nexp> Selects the file from the Audio File Table pointed to by <aft_nexp> and begins to play it. There must not be an audio file already playing when this command is executed. If there is a file playing, execute audio.stop first. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 186 De Re BASIC!

187 The music stops playing when the program stops running. To simply start a music file playing and keep it playing, keep the program running. This infinite loop will accomplish that: Audio.load ptr, "my_music.mp3" Audio.play ptr Do Pause 5000 Until 0 Audio.stop Audio.stop terminates the currently-playing music file. The command will ignored is no file is playing. It is best to precede each audio.play command with an audio.stop command. Audio.pause Pause is like stop except that the next audio.play for this file will resume the play at the point where the play was paused. Audio.loop When the currently playing file reaches the end of file, the file will restart playing from the beginning of the file. There must be a currently playing file when this command is executed. Audio.volume <left_nexp>, <right_nexp> Changes the volume of the left and right stereo channels. There must be a currently playing file when this command is executed. The values should range between 0.0 (lowest) to 1.0 (highest). The human ear perceives the level of sound changes on a logarithmic scale. The ear perceives a 10db change as twice as loud. A 20db change would be four times as loud. A 1 db change would be about One way to implement a volume control would be set up a volume table with 1db level changes. The following code creates a 16 step table. dim volume[16] x =1 volume [1] = x for i = 2 to 16 x = x * 0.89 volume [i] = x next i Your code can select volume values from the table for use in the audio.volume command. The loudest volume would be volume[1]. Audio.position.current <nvar> The current position in milliseconds of the currently playing file will be returned in <nvar>. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 187 De Re BASIC!

188 Audio.position.seek <nexp> Moves the playing position of the currently playing file to <nexp> expressed in milliseconds. Audio.length <length_nvar>, <aft_nexp> Returns the total length of the file in the Audio File Table pointed to by <aft_nexp>. The length in milliseconds will be returned in <length_nvar>. Audio.release <aft_nexp> Releases the resources used by the file in the Audio File Table pointed to by <aft_nexp>. The file must not be currently playing. The specified file will no longer be able to be played. Audio.isdone <lvar> If the current playing file is still playing then <lvar> will be set to zero otherwise it will be set to one. This can be used to determine when to start playing the next file in a play list. Audio.play f[x] Do Audio.isdone isdone Pause 1000 Until isdone Audio.record.start <fn_svar> Start audio recording using the microphone as the audio source. The recording will be saved to the specified file. The file must have the extension.3gp. Recording will continue until the audio.record.stop command is issued. Audio.record.stop Stops the previously started audio recording. SoundPool Introduction A SoundPool is a collection of short sound bites that are preloaded and ready for instantaneous play. SoundPool sound bites can be played while other sounds are playing, either while other sound bites are playing or over a currently playing sound file being played my means of Audio.play. In a game, the Audio.play file would be the background music while the SoundPool sound bites would be the game sounds (Bang, Pow, Screech, etc). A SoundPool is opened using the SoundPool.open command. After the SoundPool is opened, sound bites will be loaded into memory from files using the SoundPool.load command. Loaded sound bites can be played over and over again using the SoundPool.play command. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 188 De Re BASIC!

189 A playing sound is called a sound stream. Individual sound streams can be paused (SoundPool.pause), individually or as a group, resumed (SoundPool.resume) and stopped (SoundPool.stop). Other stream parameters (priority, volume and rate) can be changed on the fly. The SoundPool.release command closes the SoundPool. A new SoundPool can then be opened for a different phase of the game. SoundPool.release is automatically called when the program run is terminated. Commands Soundpool.open <MaxStreams_nexp> The MaxStreams expression specifies the number of Soundpool streams that can be played at once. If the number of streams to be played exceeds this value, the lowest priority streams will be terminated. Note: A stream playing via audio.play is not counted as a Soundpool stream. Soundpool.load <soundid_nvar>, <file_path_sexp> The file specified in <file_path_sexp> is loaded. Its sound ID is returned in <soundid_nvar>. The sound ID is used to play the sound and also to unload the sound. The sound ID will be returned as zero if the file was not loaded for some reason. The default file path is "sdcard/rfo-basic/data/" Note: It can take a few hundred milliseconds for the sound to be loaded. Insert a "Pause 500" statement after the load if you want to play the sound immediately following the load command. Soundpool.unload <soundid_nexp> The specified loaded sound is unloaded. Soundpool.play <streamid_nvar>, <soundid_nexp>, <rightvolume_nexp>, <leftvolume_nexp>, <priority_nexp>, <loop_nexp>, <rate_nexp> Starts the specified sound ID playing. The stream ID is returned in <streamid_nvar>. If the stream was not started, the value returned will be zero. The stream ID is used to pause, resume and stop the stream. It is also used in the stream modification commands (Soundpool.setrate, Soundpool.setvolume, Soundpool.setpriority and Soundpool.setloop). The left and right volume values must be in the range of 0 to 0.99 with zero being silent. The priority is a positive value or zero. The lowest priority is zero. The loop value of -1 will loop the playing stream forever. Values other than -1 specify the number of times the stream will be replayed. A value of 1 will play the stream twice. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 189 De Re BASIC!

190 The rate value changes the playback rate of the playing stream. The normal rate is 1. The minimum rate (slow) is 0.5. The maximum rate (fast) is Soundpool.setvolume <streamid_nexp>, <leftvolume_nexp>, <rightvolume_nexp> Changes the volume of a playing stream. The left and right volume values must be in the range of 0 to 0.99 with zero being silent. Soundpool.setrate <streamid_nexp>, <rate_nexp> Changes the playback rate of the playing stream. The normal rate is 1. The minimum rate (slow) is 0.5. The maximum rate (fast) is Soundpool.setpriority <streamid_nexp>, <priority_nexp> Changes the priority of a playing stream. The lowest priority is zero. Soundpool.pause <streamid_nexp> Pauses the playing of the specified stream. If the stream ID is zero, all streams will be paused. Soundpool.resume <streamid_nexp> Resumes the playing of the specified stream. If the stream ID is zero, all streams will be resumed. Soundpool.stop <streamid_nexp> Stops the playing of the specified stream. Soundpool.release Closes the SoundPool and releases all resources. Soundpool.open can be called to open a new SoundPool. GPS These commands provide access to the raw location data reported by an Android device's GPS hardware. Before attempting to use these commands, make sure that you have GPS turned on in the Android Settings Application. The Sample Program file, f15_gps.bas is a running example of the use of the GPS commands. There are two kinds of data reports: GPS status and location data. They are not reported at the same time, so there is no guarantee that overlapping information matches. For example, the location data report includes a count of the satellites used in the most recent location fix. The same information can be derived from the GPS status report. If number of detected satellites changes between reports, the two numbers do not agree. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 190 De Re BASIC!

191 GPS Control commands Gps.open {{<status_nvar>},{<time_nexp>},{<distance_nexp>}} Connects to the GPS hardware and starts it reporting location information. This command must be issued before using any of the other GPS commands. The three parameters are all optional; use commas to indicate missing parameters. The parameters are available for advanced usage. The most common way to use this command is simply GPS.open. If you provide a status return variable <status_nvar>, it is set to 1.0 (TRUE) if the open succeeds, or 0.0 (FALSE) if the open fails. If the open fails, you may get information about the failure from the GETERROR$() function. The time interval expression <time_nexp> sets the minimum time between location updates. The time is in milleseconds. If you do not set an interval, it defaults to the minimum value allowed by your Android device. This is typically one second. Note: to reduce battery usage, Android recommends a minimum interval of five minutes. If you provide a distance parameter <distance_nexp>, it is a numerical expression that sets the minimum distance between location updates, in meters. That is, your program will not be informed of location changes until your device has moved at least as far as the minimum distance setting. If you do not set a distance, any location change that can be detected will be reported. This command attempts to get an initial "last known location". If the GPS hardware does not report a last known location, BASIC! tries to get one from the network location service. If neither source can provide one, the location information is left empty. If you use GPS commands to get location information before the GPS hardware starts reporting current location information, you will get this "last known location" data. The last known location may be stale, hours or days old, and so may not be useful. Gps.close Disconnects from the GPS hardware and stops the location reports. GPS is automatically closed when you stop your BASIC! program. GPS is not turned off if you tap the HOME key while your GPS program is running. Gps.status {{<status_var>}, {<infix_nvar>},{inview_nvar}, {<sat_list_nexp>}} Returns the data from a GPS status report. The parameters are all optional; use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). This kind of report contains the type of the last GPS event and a list of the satellites that were detected by the GPS hardware when that event occurred. As a convenience, this command analyzes the satellite list to report how many satellites were detected ("in view") and how many of those were used in the last location fix ("in fix"). Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 191 De Re BASIC!

192 The GPS status report is not timestamped, and the first event reported to your program may be stale. Do not rely on the data from the first status report alone to determine when the GPS hardware gets a current location fix.. <status_var>: If provided, this variable returns the type of last GPS event that occurred. If you provide a numeric variable, the event type is reported as a number. If it is a string variable, the event type is reported as an English-language event name. Event Number Event Name Meaning 1 Started The GPS system has been started, no location fixed yet 2 Stopped The GPS system has been stopped 3 First Fix The GPS system has received its first location fix since starting 4 Updated The GPS system has updated its location data <infix_nvar>: If provided, this numeric variable returns the number of satellites used in the last location fix. This is the number of satellites in the satellite list describe below whose "infix" value is TRUE (nonzero). If the status report could not get a satellite list the number is unknown, so the variable is set to -1. <inview_nvar>: If provided, this numeric variable returns the number of satellites detected by the GPS hardware. This is the number of satellites in the satellite list described below that have current data. It is not necessarily the size of the list. If the status report could not get a satellite list the number is unknown, so the variable is set to -1. <sat_list_nexp>: If provided, the value of this numeric expression is used as a list pointer. If the value is not a valid numeric list pointer, and the numeric expression is a single numeric variable, then a new list is created and the numeric variable is set to point to the new list. The satellite list is a list of bundle pointers. When the GPS system reports GPS status, it provides data collected from the satellites it can detect. The data from each satellite is put in a bundle. The satellite list has pointers to all of the satellite data bundles. You can use these pointers with any Bundle command, just like any other bundle pointer. If you provide an existing list, any bundles already in the list are cleared, except for the identifying pseudo-random number (PRN). Anything else in the list is discarded. Then the new satellite data is written into the satellite bundle. This is done so that a satellite that is lost and then regained will be remembered in the satellite bundle, but its stale data will not be kept. The number of satellite bundles with complete data matches the value of the <inview_var>. These bundles are listed first. Any cleared bundles for satellites not currently visible are at the end of the list. Each satellite bundle has five key/value pairs. All values are numeric. The value of "infix" is interpreted as logical (Boolean). KEY prn VALUE Pseudo-Random Number assigned to the satellite for identification Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 192 De Re BASIC!

193 elevation Elevation in degrees azimuth Azimuth in degrees snr Signal-to-noise ratio: a measure of signal strength infix TRUE (non-zero) if the satellite s data was used in the last location fix, else FALSE (0.0) This is the only GPS command that returns information from both kinds of GPS data. The satellite count returned in <count_nvar> comes from the location data report, and the satellite list returned in the satellite list comes from the GPS status report. If nothing changes between reports, the number of satellites with infix set TRUE is the same as the satellite count value, but this condition cannot be guaranteed. The satellite count value is also returned by the GPS.location command. The satellite list is also returned or updated by the GPS.status command. This command, GPS.satellites, is retained for backwardcompatibility and for convenience. For example, let s say the most recent GPS status report had data from three satellites with PRNs 4, 7, and 29. GPS.OPEN sts GPS.STATUS,, inview, sats DEBUG.DUMP.LIST sats % may print 7.0, 29.0, 4.0 Assume appropriate delays after the GPS.open and that DEBUG is enabled. Another GPS status report may report data from satellites 4, 7, and 8. Then the list dump might show 7.0, 4.0, 8.0, The order is unpredictable, except that 29.0 will be last, because it is not currently visible. In both cases, the value of inview is 3.0. Debug.dump.bundle of the satellite bundle with PRN 4 might show this: Dumping Bundle 11 prn: 4.0 snr: 17.0 infix: 0.0 elevation: 25.0 azimuth: GPS Location commands These commands report the values returned by the most recent GPS location report. The Gps.satellites command also returns the list of satellites contained in a GPS status report. A location report contains: the location provider the number of satellites used to generate the data in the report the time when the data was reported an estimate of the accuracty of the location components the location components: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 193 De Re BASIC!

194 o o o o o latitude longitude altitude bearing speed There are individual commands available to read each element of a location report. If you use separate GPS commands to read different components of the location data, you don t know if the different components came from the same location report. To be certain of consistent data, get all of the location components from a single Gps.location command. Gps.location {{<time_nvar>}, {<prov_svar>}, {<count_nvar}, {<acc_nvar>}, {<lat_nvar>}, {<long_nvar>}, {<alt_nvar>}, {<bear_nvar>}, {<speed_nvar>}} Returns the data from a single GPS location report. It returns all of the data provided by all of the individual GPS location component commands below, except that it does not return the satellite list of the Gps.satellites command. The parameters are all optional; use commas to indicate missing parameters (see Optional Parameters). All of the parameters are variable names, so if any parameter is not provided, the corresponding data is not returned. The parameters are: <time_nvar>: time of the location fix, in milliseconds since the epoch, as reported by Gps.time. <prov_svar>: the location provider, as reported by Gps.provider. <count_nvar>: the number of satellites used to generate the location fix, as reported by Gps.satellites. <acc_nvar>: an estimate of the accuracy of the location fix, in meters, as reported by Gps.accuracy. <lat_nvar>: current latitude, in decimal degrees, as reported by Gps.latitude. <long_nvar>: current longitude, in decimal degrees, as reported by Gps.longitude. <alt_nvar>: current altitude, in meters, as reported by Gps.altitude. <bear_nvar>: current bearing, in compass degrees, as reported by Gps.bearing. <speed_nvar>: current speed, in meters per second, as reported by Gps.speed. Gps.time <nvar> Returns the time of the last GPS fix in milliseconds since "the epoch", January 1, 1970, UTC. Gps.provider <svar> Returns the name of the location provider in <svar>. Normally this is "gps". The first time you read location data, you get the last known location, which may come from either the GPS hardware or the network location service. If it came from the network, this command returns "network". If neither provider reported a last known location, the provider <svar> is the empty string, "". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 194 De Re BASIC!

195 Gps.satellites {{<count_nvar>}, {<sat_list_nexp>}} Returns the number of satellites used for the last GPS fix and a list of the satellites known to the GPS hardware. Both parameters are optional. If you omit <count_nvar> but use <sat_list_nexp>, keep the comma. If you provide a numeric variable <count_nvar>, it is set to the number of satellites used for the most recent location data. If the location report did not provide a satellite count, <count_nvar> is set to -1. For a description of the satellite list pointer expression <sat_list_nexp>, see the <sat_list_nexp> parameter of the Gps.status command, above. Gps.accuracy <nvar> Returns the accuracy level in <nvar>. If non-zero, this is an estimate of the uncertainty in the reported location, measured in meters. A value of zero means the location is unknown. Gps.latitude <nvar> Returns the latitude in decimal degrees in <nvar>. Gps.longitude <nvar> Returns the longitude in decimal degrees in <nvar>. Gps.altitude <nvar> Returns the altitude in meters in <nvar>. Gps.bearing <nvar> Returns the bearing in compass degrees in <nvar>. Gps.speed <nvar> Returns the speed in meters per second in <nvar>. Sensors Introduction Android devices can have several types of Sensors. Currently, Android's pre-defined Sensors are: Name of Sensor Type Notes Accelerometer 1 As of API 3 (Cupcake) Magnetic Field 2 As of API 3 Orientation 3 As of API 3, deprecated API 8 Gyroscope 4 As of API 3 Light 5 As of API 3 Pressure 6 As of API 3 Temperature 7 As of API 3, deprecated API 14 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 195 De Re BASIC!

196 Proximity 8 As of API 3 Gravity 9 As of API 9 (Gingerbread) Linear Acceleration 10 As of API 9 Rotation Vector 11 As of API 9 Relative Humidity 12 As of API 14 (Ice Cream Sandwich) Ambient Temperature 13 As of API 14 Uncalibrated Magnetic Field 14 As of API 18 (Jellybean MR2) Game Rotation Vector 15 As of API 18 Uncalibrated Gyroscope 16 As of API 18 Significant Motion 17 As of API 18 Step Detector 18 As of API 19 (KitKat) Step Counter 19 As of API 19 Geomagnetic Rotation Vector 20 As of API 19 Some details about (most) of these sensors can be found at Android's Sensor Event ( web page. Not all Android devices have all of these Sensors. Some Android devices may have none of these sensors. The BASIC! command, sensors.list, can be used to provide an inventory of the sensors available on a particular device. Some newer devices may have sensors that are not currently supported by BASIC! Those sensors will be reported as "Unknown, Type = NN" where NN is the sensor type number. Sensor Commands Sensors.list <sensor_array$[]> Writes information about the sensors available on the Android device into the <sensor_array$[]> parameter. If the array exists, it is overwritten. Otherwise a new array is created. The result is always a one-dimensional array. The array elements contain the names and types of the available sensors. For example, one element may be "Gyroscope, Type = 4". The following program snippet prints the elements of the sensor list. SENSORS.LIST sensorarray$[] ARRAY.LENGTH size, sensorarray$[] FOR index = 1 TO size PRINT sensorarray$[ index ] NEXT index END Sensors.open <type_nexp>{:<delay_nexp>}{, <type_nexp>{:<delay_nexp>},...} Opens a list of sensors for reading. The parameter list is the type numbers of the sensors to be opened, followed optionally by a colon (':') and a number (0, 1, 2, or 3) that specifies the delay in sampling the sensor. 3 is the default (slowest). Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 196 De Re BASIC!

197 This table gives a general idea of what the rate values mean. The delay values are only "suggestions" to the sensors, which may alter the real delays, and do not apply to all sensors. Faster settings use more battery. Value Name Typical Delay Typical Usage 3 Normal 200 ms Default: suitable for screen orientation changes 2 UI 60 ms Rate suitable for the user interface 1 Game 20 ms Rate suitable for game play 0 Fastest 0 ms Sample as fast as possible Example: SENSORS.OPEN 1:1, 3 % Monitor the Acceleration sensor at Game rate % and the Orientation sensor at Normal rate. This command must be executed before issuing any Sensors.read commands. You should only open the sensors that you actually want to read. Each sensor opened increases battery drain and the background CPU usage. BASIC! uses the colon character to separate multiple commands on a single line. The use of colon in this command conflicts with that feature, so you must use caution when using both features together. If you put any colons on a line after this command, the preprocessor always assumes the colons are part of the command and not command separators. The Sensors.open command must be either on a line by itself or placed last on a multi-command line. Sensors.read sensor_type_nexp, p1_nvar, p2_nvar, p3_nvar This command returns that latest values from the sensors specified by the "sensor_type" parameters. The values are returned are placed into the p1, p2 and p3 parameters. The meaning of these parameters depends upon the sensor being read. Not all sensors return all three parameter values. In those cases, the unused parameter values will be set to zero. See Android's Sensor Event web page for the meaning of these parameters. Sensors.close Closes the previously opened sensors. The sensors' hardware will be turned off preventing battery drain. Sensors are automatically closed when the program run is stopped via the BACK key or Menu->Stop. System The System commands provide for the execution of System commands on non-rooted devices. The SU commands provide for the execution of Superuser commands on rooted devices. See the Sample Program, f36_superuser.bas, for an example using these commands. The App commands provide for sending messages through the Android system to other applications on your Android device. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 197 De Re BASIC!

198 The App commands are not related to System or SU, but they are typically used to replace commands of the form System.write "am start <parameter-list>" or System.write "am broadcast <parameter-list>". System Commands System.open Opens a shell to execute system commands. The working directory is set to "rfo-basic". If the working directory does not exist, it is created. If you open a command shell with either Su.open or System.open, you can't open another one of either type without first closing the open one. System.write <sexp> Executes a System command. System.read.ready <nvar> Tests for responses from a System.write command. If the result is non-zero, then response lines are available. Not all System commands return a response. If there is no response returned after a few seconds then it should be assumed that there will be no response. System.read.line <svar> Places the next available response line into the string variable. System.close Exits the System Shell mode. Superuser Commands Su.open Requests Superuser permission. If granted, opens a shell to execute system commands. The working directory is set to /. If you open a command shell with either Su.open or System.open, you can't open another one of either type without first closing the open one. Su.write <sexp> Executes a Superuser command. Su.read.ready <nvar> Tests for responses from a Su.write command. If the result is non-zero, then response lines are available. Not all Superuser commands return a response. If there is no response returned after a few seconds then it should be assumed that there will be no response. Su.read.line <svar> Places the next available response line into the string variable. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 198 De Re BASIC!

199 Su.close Exits the Superuser mode. App Commands App.broadcast <action_sexp>, <data_uri_sexp>, <package_sexp>, <component_sexp>, <mime_type_sexp>, <categories_sexp>, <extras_bptr_nexp>, <flags_nexp> Creates a system message and broadcasts it to other applications on your device. The message is called an Intent. The Intent will be received by any application that has the right Intent Filter. All of the parameters are optional; use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). See App.start, below, for parameter definitions. If there is no app that can receive your broadcast, the broadcast is ignored. You can detect this condition only by calling the GETERROR$() function. If an app is available to receive the broadcast, GETERROR$() returns "No error". App.start <action_sexp>, <data_uri_sexp>, <package_sexp>, <component_sexp>, <mime_type_sexp>, <categories_sexp>, <extras_bptr_nexp>, <flags_nexp> Sends a message to the system, called an Intent, requesting a specific application or type of application to start. If more than one app can handle the request, the system puts up a chooser for you. If there is no app that can handle the request, the Intent is ignored. You can detect this condition only by calling the GETERROR$() function. If an app is available to launch, GETERROR$() returns "No error". All of the parameters are optional. Use commas to indicate omitted parameters (see Optional Parameters). You will almost never need to use all of the parameters in one command. The first six parameters are string expressions: action, data URI, package name, component name, MIME type, and a list of categories separated by commas (the commas are part of the string expression). The last two parameters are numeric expressions. One is a pointer to a bundle that contains "extras" that are attached to the message. The other is a single number representing one or more flag values. For parameter values, consult the documentation of the Android system and the app you want to start. Parameter Meaning am Command Equivalent action An Action defined by Android or by the target application -a data URI Data or path to data; BASIC! URI-encodes this string -d package name Name of the target application s package (sometimes called ID) -n [Note 2] component name Name of a component within the target application -n [Note 2] MIME type MIME-type of the data, may be used without a data URI -t categories Comma-separated list of Intent categories -c [Note 3] "extras" bundle ptr Pointer to an existing bundle containing "extras" values -e [Note 4] flags Sum of numeric values of one or more flags -f Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 199 De Re BASIC!

200 Notes: 1. You must use string or numeric values, not Android-defined constants, for actions, types, categories, and flags. For example, you can use the string "android.intent.action.main", but you can not use the Android symbol ACTION_MAIN. 2. If you specify a component name, you must also specify the package name, even though the package name is often part of the component name. For example, these are equivalent: SYSTEM.WRITE "am -n com.android.calculator2.calculator" APP.START,, "com.android.calculator2", "com.android.calculator2.calculator" Usually you can use this pattern: pkg$ = "com.android.calculator2" : comp$ = pkg$ + ".Calculator" APP.START,, pkg$, comp$ 3. A categories parameter may contain several categories separated by commas, for example: cats$ = "android.intent.category.browsable, android.intent.category.monkey" cats$ = cat1$ + "," + cat2$ + "," + cat3$ 4. You must create and populate the "extras" bundle before passing its pointer to an App command. Presently only string extras and float extras are supported (the BASIC! data types). 5. When your program uses an Intent to start another app, the second app can use another Intent to return results. BASIC! does not yet support this return path. Your program can retrieve data that another app leaves in a file or in the clipboard, but it cannot yet retrieve data from a return Intent. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 200 De Re BASIC!

201 Appendix A Command List! - Single Line Comment, 52!! - Block Comment, 52 # - Format Line, 27 % - Middle of Line Comment, 52? {<exp> {, ;}}..., 96 ABS(<nexp>), 56 ACOS(<nexp>), 60 App.broadcast <action_sexp>, <data_uri_sexp>, <package_sexp>, <component_sexp>, <mime_type_sexp>, <categories_sexp>, <extras_bptr_nexp>, <flags_nexp>, 199 App.start <action_sexp>, <data_uri_sexp>, <package_sexp>, <component_sexp>, <mime_type_sexp>, <categories_sexp>, <extras_bptr_nexp>, <flags_nexp>, 199 Array.average <Average_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}], 41 Array.copy SourceArray$[{<start>,<length>}], DestinationArray$[{{-}<start_or_extras>}], 41 Array.copy SourceArray[{<start>,<length>}], DestinationArray[{{-}<start_or_extras>}], 41 Array.delete Array[], Array$[]..., 41 Array.dims Source[]{, {Dims[]}{, NumDims}}, 41 Array.fill Array$[{<start>,<length>}], <sexp>, 42 Array.fill Array[{<start>,<length>}], <nexp>, 42 Array.length n, Array$[{<start>,<length>}], 42 Array.length n, Array[{<start>,<length>}], 42 Array.load Array$[], <sexp>,..., 42 Array.load Array[], <nexp>,..., 42 Array.max <max_nvar> Array[{<start>,<length>}], 42 Array.min <min_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}], 42 Array.reverse Array$[{<start>,<length>}], 43 Array.reverse Array[{<start>,<length>}], 43 Array.search Array$[{<start>,<length>}], <value_sexp>, <result_nvar>{,<start_nexp>}, 43 Array.search Array[{<start>,<length>}], <value_nexp>, <result_nvar>{,<start_nexp>}, 43 Array.shuffle Array[{<start>,<length>}], 43 Array.sort Array[{<start>,<length>}], 43 Array.std_dev <sd_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}], 43 Array.sum <sum_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}], 43 Array.variance <v_nvar>, Array[{<start>,<length>}], 43 ASCII(<sexp>{, <index_nexp>}), 61 ASIN(<nexp>), 60 ATAN(<nexp>), 60 ATAN2(<nexp_y>, <nexp_x>), 60 Audio.isdone <lvar>, 188 Audio.length <length_nvar>, <aft_nexp>, 188 Audio.load <aft_nvar>, <filename_sexp>, 186 Audio.loop, 187 Audio.pause, 187 Audio.play <aft_nexp>, 186 Audio.position.current <nvar>, 187 Audio.position.seek <nexp>, 188 Audio.record.start <fn_svar>, 188 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 201 De Re BASIC!

202 Audio.record.stop, 188 Audio.release <aft_nexp>, 188 Audio.stop, 187 Audio.volume <left_nexp>, <right_nexp>, 187 Back.resume, 90 BACKGROUND(), 62 Background.resume, 145 BAND(<nexp1>, <nexp2>), 56 BIN$(<nexp>), 69 BIN(<sexp>), 61 BNOT(<nexp>, 56 BOR(<nexp1>, <nexp2>), 56 Browse <url_sexp>, 120 Bt.close, 128 Bt.connect {0 1}, 128 Bt.device.name <svar>, 130 Bt.disconnect, 128 Bt.onReadReady.resume, 129 Bt.open {0 1}, 127 Bt.read.bytes <svar>, 130 Bt.read.ready <nvar>, 129 Bt.reconnect, 128 Bt.set.UUID <sexp>, 130 Bt.status {{<connect_var>}{, <name_svar>}{, <address_svar>}}, 128 Bt.write {<exp> {, ;}}..., 129 Bundle.clear <pointer_nexp>, 50 Bundle.contain <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <contains_nvar>, 50 Bundle.create <pointer_nvar>, 48 Bundle.get <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <nvar> <svar>, 49 Bundle.keys <bundle_ptr_nexp>, <list_ptr_nexp>, 49 Bundle.put <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <value_nexp> <value_sexp>, 49 Bundle.remove <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, 50 Bundle.type <pointer_nexp>, <key_sexp>, <type_svar>, 50 BXOR(<nexp1>, <nexp2>), 56 Byte.close <file_table_nexp>, 112 Byte.copy <file_table_nexp>,<output_file_sexp>, 115 Byte.eof <file_table_nexp>, <lvar>, 114 Byte.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp>, 112 Byte.position.get <file_table_nexp>, <position_nexp>, 114 Byte.position.mark {{<file_table_nexp>}{, <marklimit_nexp>}}, 115 Byte.position.set <file_table_nexp>, <position_nexp>, 114 Byte.read.buffer <file_table_nexp>, <count_nexp>, <buffer_svar>, 114 Byte.read.byte <file_table_nexp> {,<nvar>}..., 112 Byte.read.number <file_table_nexp> {,<nvar>...}, 113 Byte.truncate <file_table_nexp>,<length_nexp>, 115 Byte.write.buffer <file_table_nexp>, <sexp>, 114 Byte.write.byte <file_table_nexp> {{,<nexp>}...{,<sexp>}}, 113 Byte.write.number <file_table_nexp> {,<nexp>}..., 113 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 202 De Re BASIC!

203 Call <user_defined_function>, 78 CBRT(<nexp>), 59 CEIL(<nexp>), 57 CHR$(<nexp>,...), 64 Clipboard.get <svar>, 134 Clipboard.put <sexp>, 134 CLOCK(), 63 Cls, 97 Console.front, 97 Console.line.count <count_nvar >, 97 Console.line.text <line_nexp>, <text_svar>, 97 Console.line.touched <line_nvar> {, <press_lvar>}, 98 Console.save <filename_sexp>, 98 Console.title { <title_sexp>}, 98 ConsoleTouch.resume, 90 COS(<nexp>), 59 COSH(<nexp>), 60 D_U.break, 82 D_U.continue, 81 Debug.dump.array Array[], 93 Debug.dump.bundle <bundleptr_nexp>, 93 Debug.dump.list <listptr_nexp>, 93 Debug.dump.scalars, 93 Debug.dump.stack <stackptr_nexp>, 93 Debug.echo.off, 93 Debug.echo.on, 92 Debug.off, 92 Debug.on, 92 Debug.print, 93 Debug.show, 95 Debug.show.array Array[], 94 Debug.show.bundle <bundleptr_nexp>, 94 Debug.show.list <listptr_nexp>, 94 Debug.show.program, 94 Debug.show.scalars, 93 Debug.show.stack <stackptr_nexp>, 94 Debug.show.watch, 94 Debug.watch var,..., 94 DECODE$(<charset_sexp>, <buffer_sexp>), 68 DECODE$(<type_sexp>, {<qualifier_sexp>}, <source_sexp>), 67 Decrypt <pw_sexp>, <encrypted_svar>, <decrypted_svar>, 135 Device <nexp> <nvar>, 141 Device <svar>, 141 Device.Language <svar>, 141 Device.Locale <svar>, 142 Dialog.message {<title_sexp>}, {<message_sexp>}, <sel_nvar> {, <button1_sexp>{, <button2_sexp>{, <button3_sexp>}}}, 98 Dialog.select <sel_nvar>, < Array$[]> <list_nexp>, {,<title_sexp>}, 99 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 203 De Re BASIC!

204 Dim Array [n, n,...], Array$[n, n,...]..., 40 Do / Until <lexp>, 81 Echo.off, 93 Echo.on, 93 .send <recipient_sexp>, <subject_sexp>, <body_sexp>, 130 ENCODE$(<charset_sexp>, <source_sexp>), 68 ENCODE$(<type_sexp>, {<qualifier_sexp>}, <source_sexp>), 66 Encrypt {<pw_sexp>}, <source_sexp>, <encrypted_svar>, 134 End{ <msg_sexp>}, 91 ENDS_WITH(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>), 62 Exit, 91 EXP(<nexp>), 59 F_N.break, 80 F_N.continue, 80 File.delete <lvar>, <path_sexp>, 106 File.dir <path_sexp>, Array$[] {, <dirmark_sexp>}, 107 File.exists <lvar>, <path_sexp>, 107 File.mkdir <path_sexp>, 107 File.rename <old_path_sexp>, <new_path_sexp>, 107 File.root <svar>, 108 File.size <size_nvar>, <path_sexp>, 108 File.type <type_svar>, <path_sexp>, 108 FLOOR(<nexp>), 57 Fn.def name name$( {nvar} {svar} Array[] Array$[],... {nvar} {svar} Array[] Array$[]), 76 Fn.end, 78 Fn.rtn <sexp> <nexp>, 77 Font.clear, 95 Font.delete {<font_ptr_nexp>}, 95 Font.load <font_ptr_nvar>, <filename_sexp>, 95 For <nvar> = <nexp> To <nexp> {Step <nexp>} / Next, 79 FORMAT$(<pattern_sexp>, <nexp>), 74 FORMAT_USING$(<locale_sexp>, <format_sexp> {, <exp>}...), 74 FRAC(<nexp>), 57 Ftp.cd <new_directory_sexp>, 126 Ftp.close, 125 Ftp.delete <filename_sexp>, 126 Ftp.dir <list_nvar>, 126 Ftp.get <source_sexp>, <destination_sexp>, 126 Ftp.mkdir <directory_sexp>, 127 Ftp.open <url_sexp>, <port_nexp>, <user_sexp>, <pw_sexp>, 125 Ftp.put <source_sexp>, <destination_sexp>, 125 Ftp.rename <old_filename_sexp>, <new_filename_sexp>, 126 Ftp.rmdir <directory_sexp>, 126 GETERROR$(), 63 GoSub <index_nexp>, <label>... / Return, 83 GoSub <label> / Return, 83 GoTo <index_nexp>, <label>..., 83 GoTo <label>, 83 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 204 De Re BASIC!

205 Gps.accuracy <nvar>, 195 Gps.altitude <nvar>, 195 Gps.bearing <nvar>, 195 Gps.close, 191 Gps.latitude <nvar>, 195 Gps.location {{<time_nvar>}, {<prov_svar>}, {<count_nvar}, {<acc_nvar>}, {<lat_nvar>}, {<long_nvar>}, {<alt_nvar>}, {<bear_nvar>}, {<speed_nvar>}}, 194 Gps.longitude <nvar>, 195 Gps.open {{<status_nvar>},{<time_nexp>},{<distance_nexp>}}, 191 Gps.provider <svar>, 194 Gps.satellites {{<count_nvar>}, {<sat_list_nexp>}}, 195 Gps.speed <nvar>, 195 Gps.status {{<status_var>}, {<infix_nvar>},{inview_nvar}, {<sat_list_nexp>}}, 191 Gps.time <nvar>, 194 Gr.arc <obj_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom, start_angle, sweep_angle, fill_mode, 163 Gr.bitmap.create <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, width, height, 174 Gr.bitmap.crop <new_bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <source_bitmap_ptr_nexp>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp>, <width_nexp>, <height_nexp>, 175 Gr.bitmap.delete <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, 175 Gr.bitmap.draw <object_ptr_nvar>, <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, x, y, 176 Gr.bitmap.drawinto.end, 177 Gr.bitmap.drawinto.start <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, 176 Gr.bitmap.fill <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp>, 176 Gr.bitmap.load <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <file_name_sexp>, 174 Gr.bitmap.save <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <filename_sexp>{, <quality_nexp>}, 176 Gr.bitmap.scale <new_bitmap_ptr_nvar>, <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, width, height {, <smoothing_lexp> }, 175 Gr.bitmap.size <bitmap_ptr_nexp>, width, height, 175 Gr.bounded.touch touched, left, top, right, bottom, 168 Gr.bounded.touch2 touched, left, top, right, bottom, 168 Gr.brightness <nexp>, 162 Gr.camera.autoshoot <bm_ptr_nvar>{, <flash_ mode_nexp> {, focus_mode_nexp} }, 180 Gr.camera.manualShoot <bm_ptr_nvar>{, <flash_ mode_nexp> {, focus_mode_nexp} }, 180 Gr.camera.select 1 2, 179 Gr.camera.shoot <bm_ptr_nvar>, 179 Gr.circle <obj_nvar>, x, y, radius, 164 Gr.clip <object ptr_nexp>, <left_nexp>,<top_nexp>, <right_nexp>, <bottom_nexp>{, <RO_nexp>}, 184 Gr.close, 162 Gr.cls, 161 Gr.color {{alpha}{, red}{, green}{, blue}{, style}{, paint}}, 158 Gr.front flag, 162 Gr.get.bmpixel <bitmap_ptr_nvar>, x, y, alpha, red, green, blue, 176 Gr.get.params <object_ptr_nexp>, <param_array$[]>, 181 Gr.get.pixel x, y, alpha, red, green, blue, 181 Gr.get.position <object_ptr_nexp>, x, y, 181 Gr.get.textbounds <exp>, left, top, right, bottom, 172 Gr.get.type <object_ptr_nexp>, <type_svar>, 181 Gr.get.value <object_ptr_nexp> {, <tag_sexp>, <value_nvar value_svar>}..., 182 Gr.getDL <dl_array[]> {, <keep_all_objects_lexp> }, 185 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 205 De Re BASIC!

206 Gr.group <object_number_nvar>{, <obj_nexp>}..., 166 Gr.group.getDL <object_number_nvar>, 166 Gr.group.list <object_number_nvar>, <list_ptr_nexp>, 166 Gr.group.newDL <object_number_nvar>, 166 Gr.hide <object_number_nexp>, 167 Gr.line <obj_nvar>, x1, y1, x2, y2, 163 Gr.modify <object_ptr_nexp> {, <tag_sexp>, <value_nexp value_sexp>}..., 182 Gr.move <object_ptr_nexp>{{, dx}{, dy}}, 181 Gr.newDL <dl_array[{<start>,<length>}]>, 185 Gr.onGrTouch.resume, 168 Gr.open {{alpha}{, red}{, green}{, blue}{, <ShowStatusBar_lexp>}{, <Orientation_nexp>}}, 158 Gr.orientation <nexp>, 160 Gr.oval <obj_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom, 163 Gr.paint.copy {{<src_nexp>}{, <dst_nexp>}}, 177 Gr.paint.get <object_ptr_nvar>, 177 Gr.paint.reset {<nexp>}, 178 Gr.point <obj_nvar>, x, y, 162 Gr.poly <obj_nvar>, list_pointer {,x,y}, 164 Gr.rect <obj_nvar>, left, top, right, bottom, 163 Gr.render, 160 Gr.rotate.end {<obj_nvar>}, 178 Gr.rotate.start angle, x, y{,<obj_nvar>}, 178 Gr.save <filename_sexp> {,<quality_nexp>}, 181 Gr.scale x_factor, y_factor, 161 Gr.screen width, height{, density }, 161 Gr.screen.to_bitmap <bm_ptr_nvar>, 180 Gr.set.antialias {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 159 Gr.set.pixels <obj_nvar>, pixels[{<start>,<length>}] {,x,y}, 164 Gr.set.stroke {{<nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 159 Gr.show <object_number_nexp>, 167 Gr.show.toggle <object_number_nexp>, 167 Gr.statusbar {<height_nvar>} {, showing_lvar}, 160 Gr.statusbar.show <nexp>, 160 Gr.text.align {{<type_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 169 Gr.text.bold {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 169 Gr.text.draw <object_number_nvar>, <x_nexp>, <y_nexp>, <text_object_sexp>, 173 Gr.text.height {<height_nvar>} {, <up_nvar>} {, <down_nvar>}, 171 Gr.text.setfont {{<font_ptr_nexp> <font_family_sexp>} {, <style_sexp>} {,<paint_nexp>}}, 170 Gr.text.size {{<size_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 169 Gr.text.skew {{<skew_nexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 169 Gr.text.strike {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 170 Gr.text.typeface {{<nexp>} {, <style_nexp>} {,<paint_nexp>}}, 171 Gr.text.underline {{<lexp>}{,<paint_nexp>}}, 170 Gr.text.width <nvar>, <exp>, 172 Gr.touch touched, x, y, 167 Gr.touch2 touched, x, y, 168 GR_COLLISION( <object_1_nvar>, <object_2_nvar>), 62 GrabFile <result_svar>, <path_sexp>{, <unicode_flag_lexp>}, 111 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 206 De Re BASIC!

207 GrabURL <result_svar>, <url_sexp>{, <timeout_nexp>}, 111 Headset <state_nvar>, <type_svar>, <mic_nvar>, 147 HEX$(<nexp>), 69 HEX(<sexp>), 61 Home, 145 Html.clear.cache, 120 Html.clear.history, 120 Html.close, 120 Html.get.datalink <data_svar>, 119 Html.go.back, 120 Html.go.forward, 120 Html.load.string <html_sexp>, 118 Html.load.url <file_sexp>, 118 Html.open {<ShowStatusBar_lexp> {, <Orientation_nexp>}}, 117 Html.orientation <nexp>, 118 Html.post <url_sexp>, <list_nexp>, 119 Http.post <url_sexp>, <list_nexp>, <result_svar>, 120 HYPOT(<nexp_x>, <nexp_y), 59 If / Then / Else, 79 If / Then / Else / Elseif / Endif, 78 Include FilePath, 84 Inkey$ <svar>, 100 Input {<prompt_sexp>}, <result_var>{, {<default_exp>}{,<canceled_nvar>}}, 100 INT$(<nexp>), 69 INT(<nexp>), 57 IS_IN(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>{, <start_nexp>}, 61 IS_NUMBER(<sexp>), 60 Join <source_array$[]>, <result_svar> {, <separator_sexp>{, <wrapper_sexp}}, 136 Join.all <source_array$[]>, <result_svar> {, <separator_sexp>{, <wrapper_sexp}}, 136 Kb.hide, 102 Kb.resume, 103 Kb.show, 102 Kb.showing <lvar>, 103 Kb.toggle, 103 Key.resume, 91 LEFT$(<sexp>, <count_nexp>), 64 LEN(<sexp>), 61 Let, 55 List.add <pointer_nexp>{, <exp>}..., 45 List.add.array numeric_list_pointer, Array[{<start>,<length>}], 46 List.add.array string_list_pointer, Array$[{<start>,<length>}], 46 List.add.list <destination_list_pointer_nexp>, <source_list_pointer_nexp>, 46 List.clear <pointer_nexp>, 47 List.create N S, <pointer_nvar>, 45 List.get <pointer_nexp>, <index_nexp>, <var>, 47 List.insert <pointer_nexp>, <index_nexp>, <sexp> <nexp>, 46 List.remove <pointer_nexp>,<index_nexp>, 46 List.replace <pointer_nexp>, <index_nexp>, <sexp> <nexp>, 46 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 207 De Re BASIC!

208 List.search <pointer_nexp>, value value$, <result_nvar>{,<start_nexp>}, 47 List.size <pointer_nexp>, <nvar>, 47 List.toArray <pointer_nexp>, Array$[] Array[], 47 List.type <pointer_nexp>, <svar>, 47 LOG(<nexp>), 59 LOG10(<nexp>), 59 LOWER$(<sexp>), 69 LowMemory.resume, 91 MAX(<nexp>, <nexp>), 57 MenuKey.resume, 91 MID$(<sexp>, <start_nexp>{, <count_nexp>}), 64 MIN(<nexp>, <nexp>), 57 mkdir <path_sexp>, 107 MOD(<nexp1>, <nexp2>), 58 MyPhoneNumber <svar>, 130 Notify <title_sexp>, <subtitle_sexp>, <alert_sexp>, <wait_lexp>, 147 OCT$(<nexp>), 69 OCT(<sexp>), 61 OnBackground:, 145 OnBackKey:, 90 OnBtReadReady:, 129 OnConsoleTouch:, 90 OnError:, 89 OnGrTouch:, 168 OnKbChange:, 103 OnKeyPress:, 91 OnLowMemory:, 91 OnMenuKey:, 90 OnTimer:, 133 Pause <ticks_nexp>, 148 Phone.call <sexp>, 130 Phone.dial <sexp>, 131 Phone.info <nexp> <nvar>, 142 Phone.rcv.init, 131 Phone.rcv.next <state_nvar>, <number_svar>, 131 PI(), 59 Popup <message_sexp>{{, <x_nexp>}{, <y_nexp>}{, <duration_lexp>}}, 101 POW(<nexp1>, <nexp2>), 59 Print {<exp> {, ;}}..., 96 Program.info <nexp> <nvar>, 85 RANDOMIZE({<nexp>}), 57 Read.data <number> <string> {,<number> <string>...,<number> <string>}, 91 Read.from <nexp>, 92 Read.next <var>,..., 92 Rem, 52 REPLACE$( <sexp>, <argument_sexp>, <replace_sexp>), 65 RIGHT$(<sexp>, <count_nexp>), 65 Ringer.get.mode <nvar>, 135 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 208 De Re BASIC!

209 Ringer.get.volume <vol_nvar> {, <max_nvar>, 135 Ringer.set.mode <nexp>, 135 Ringer.set.volume <nexp>, 135 RND(), 57 ROUND(<value_nexp>{, <count_nexp>{, <mode_sexp>}}), 58 Run <filename_sexp>{, <data_sexp>}, 85 Screen rotation, size[], realsize[], density, 143 Screen.rotation <nvar>, 144 Screen.size size[], realsize[], density, 144 Select <sel_nvar>, < Array$[]> <list_nexp>, {,<title_sexp> {, <message_sexp> } } {,<press_lvar> }, 101 Sensors.close, 197 Sensors.list <sensor_array$[]>, 196 Sensors.open <type_nexp>{:<delay_nexp>}{, <type_nexp>{:<delay_nexp>},...}, 196 Sensors.read sensor_type, p1, p2, p3, 197 SGN(<nexp>), 56 SHIFT(<value_nexp>, <bits_nexp>), 61 SIN(<nexp>), 59 SINH(<nexp>), 59 Sms.rcv.init, 131 Sms.rcv.next <svar>, 131 Sms.send <number_sexp>, <message_sexp>, 131 Socket.client.close, 123 Socket.client.connect <server_sexp>, <port_nexp> {, <wait_lexp> }, 121 Socket.client.read.file <file_nexp>, 122 Socket.client.read.line <line_svar>, 122 Socket.client.read.ready <nvar>, 122 Socket.client.server.ip <svar>, 122 Socket.client.status <status_nvar>, 122 Socket.client.write.bytes <sexp>, 123 Socket.client.write.file <file_nexp>, 123 Socket.client.write.line <line_sexp>, 122 Socket.myIP <array$[]>{, <nvar>}, 123 Socket.myIP <svar>, 123 Socket.server.client.ip <nvar>, 125 Socket.server.close, 125 Socket.server.connect {<wait_lexp>}, 123 Socket.server.create <port_nexp>, 123 Socket.server.disconnect, 125 Socket.server.read.file <file_nexp>, 125 Socket.server.read.line <svar>, 124 Socket.server.read.ready <nvar>, 124 Socket.server.status <status_nvar>, 124 Socket.server.write.bytes <sexp>, 124 Socket.server.write.file <file_nexp>, 125 Socket.server.write.line <line_sexp>, 124 Soundpool.load <soundid_nvar>, <file_path_sexp>, 189 Soundpool.open <MaxStreams_nexp>, 189 Soundpool.pause <streamid_nexp>, 190 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 209 De Re BASIC!

210 Soundpool.play <streamid_nvar>, <soundid_nexp>, <rightvolume_nexp>, <leftvolume_nexp>, <priority_nexp>, <loop_nexp>, <rate_nexp>, 189 Soundpool.release, 190 Soundpool.resume <streamid_nexp>, 190 Soundpool.setpriority <streamid_nexp>, <priority_nexp>, 190 Soundpool.setrate <streamid_nexp>, <rate_nexp>, 190 Soundpool.setvolume <streamid_nexp>, <leftvolume_nexp>, <rightvolume_nexp>, 190 Soundpool.stop <streamid_nexp>, 190 Soundpool.unload <soundid_nexp>, 189 Split <result_array$[]>, <sexp> {, <test_sexp>}, 136 Split.all <result_array$[]>, <sexp> {, <test_sexp>}, 136 Sql.close <DB_pointer_nvar>, 150 Sql.delete <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>{,<where_sexp>{,<count_nvar>} }, 152 Sql.drop_table <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, 150 Sql.exec <DB_pointer_nvar>, <command_sexp>, 153 Sql.insert <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, V1$, C2$, V2$,...,CN$, VN$, 150 Sql.new_table <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, C2$,...,CN$, 150 Sql.next doneflag, cursorvar {{, svar}...{, array$[]{, ncolvar}}}, 152 Sql.open <DB_pointer_nvar>, <DB_name_sexp>, 150 Sql.query <cursor_nvar>, <DB_pointer_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, <columns_sexp> {, <where_sexp> {, <order_sexp>} }, 151 Sql.query.length <length_nvar>, <cursor_nvar>, 151 Sql.query.position <position_nvar>, <cursor_nvar>, 151 Sql.raw_query <cursor_nvar>, <DB_pointer_nvar>, <query_sexp>, 153 Sql.update <DB_ptr_nvar>, <table_name_sexp>, C1$, V1$, C2$, V2$,...,CN$, VN${: <where_sexp>}, 153 SQR(<nexp>), 59 Stack.clear <ptr_nexp>, 51 Stack.create N S, <ptr_nvar>, 51 Stack.isEmpty <ptr_nexp>, <nvar>, 51 Stack.peek <ptr_nexp>, <nvar> <svar>, 51 Stack.pop <ptr_nexp>, <nvar> <svar>, 51 Stack.push <ptr_nexp>, <nexp> <sexp>, 51 Stack.type <ptr_nexp>, <svar>, 51 STARTS_WITH(<sub_sexp>, <base_sexp>{, <start_nexp>}, 62 STR$(<nexp>), 69 STT.listen, 138 STT.results <string_list_ptr_nexp>, 139 Su.close, 199 Su.open, 198 Su.read.line <svar>, 198 Su.read.ready <nvar>, 198 Su.write <sexp>, 198 Sw.begin <exp>, 87 Sw.break, 88 Sw.case <exp >,..., 88 Sw.case <op><exp >, 88 Sw.default, 88 Sw.end, 88 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 210 De Re BASIC!

211 Swap <nvar_a> <svar_a>, <nvar_b> <svar_b>, 148 System.close, 198 System.open, 198 System.read.line <svar>, 198 System.read.ready <nvar>, 198 System.write <sexp>, 198 TAN(<nexp>), 59 Text.close <file_table_nexp>, 109 Text.eof <file_table_nexp>, <lvar>, 110 Text.input <svar>{, { <text_sexp>}, <title_sexp> }, 101 Text.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp>, 108 Text.position.get <file_table_nexp>, <position_nvar>, 110 Text.position.mark {{<file_table_nexp>}{, <marklimit_nexp>}}, 111 Text.position.set <file_table_nexp>, <position_nexp>, 110 Text.readln <file_table_nexp> {,<svar>}..., 109 Text.writeln <file_table_nexp>, {<exp> {, ;}}..., 110 TGet <result_svar>, <prompt_sexp> {, <title_sexp>}, 102 Time {<time_nexp>,} Year$, Month$, Day$, Hour$, Minute$, Second$, WeekDay, isdst, 132 TIME(), 63 TIME(<year_exp>, <month_exp>, <day_exp>, <hour_exp>, <minute_exp>, <second_exp>), 63 Timer.clear, 134 Timer.resume, 133 Timer.set <interval_nexp>, 133 TimeZone.get <tz_svar>, 133 TimeZone.list <tz_list_pointer_nexp>, 133 TimeZone.set { <tz_sexp> }, 133 TODEGREES(<nexp>), 60 Tone <frequency_nexp>, <duration_nexp>{, <duration_chk_lexp}, 148 TORADIANS(<nexp>), 60 TRIM$(<sexp>{, <test_sexp>}), 65 TTS.init, 138 TTS.speak <sexp> {, <wait_lexp>}, 138 TTS.speak.toFile <sexp> {, <path_sexp>}, 138 TTS.stop, 138 UCODE(<sexp>{, <index_nexp>}), 61 UnDim Array[], Array$[],..., 41 UPPER$(<sexp>), 69 USING$({<locale_sexp>}, <format_sexp> {, <exp>}...), 70 VAL(<sexp>), 60 VERSION$(), 69 Vibrate <pattern_array[{<start>,<length>}]>,<nexp>, 148 VolKeys.off, 149 VolKeys.on, 149 W_R.break, 81 W_R.continue, 81 WakeLock <code_nexp>{, <flags_nexp>, 145 While <lexp> / Repeat, 80 WiFi.info {{<SSID_svar>}{, <BSSID_svar>}{, <MAC_svar>}{, <IP_var>}{, <speed_nvar>}}, 144 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 211 De Re BASIC!

212 WifiLock <code_nexp>, 146 WORD$(<source_sexp>, <n_nexp> {, <test_sexp>}), 66 Zip.close, <file_table_nexp>, 116 Zip.count <path_sexp>, <nvar}, 116 Zip.dir <path_sexp>, Array$[] {,<dirmark_sexp>}, 116 Zip.open {r w a}, <file_table_nvar>, <path_sexp>, 116 Zip.read <file_table_nexp>,<buffer_svar>, <file_name_sexp>, 116, 117 Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 212 De Re BASIC!

213 Appendix B Sample Programs The programs are loaded into "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/source/sample_programs" when a new release of BASIC! is installed. You can access them by selecting Menu->Load. Tap the "Sample_Programs" lines. The sample programs will be listed and can be loaded. If you load and save one of these programs, the program will be saved in "<pref base drive>/rfobasic/source/" not in "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/source/sample_programs" You can force BASIC! to re-load these programs by: Select Menu->Delete Navigate to "rfo-basic/source/sample_programs/" Delete the "f01_vxx.xx_read_me file" Exit BASIC! using Menu->Exit or Menu->More->Exit Re-enter BASIC! Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 213 De Re BASIC!

214 Appendix C Launcher Shortcut Tutorial Introduction This tutorial will "compile" a BASIC! program and create an "application" that resides on your Android device home page. This "application" will have its own Icon and Name. The official Android name for this type of "application" is "Shortcut." The BASIC! application must be installed for this to work. There is also an option to actually build a standalone application.apk file that does not require the BASIC! application to be installed. The process is more difficult but it will result in an application that can be offered on the Google Play Store. See Appendix D. How to Make a Shortcut Application (older versions of Android prior to Android 4.0) 1. Start BASIC! 2. Select Menu->Exit ormenu->more->exit to Exit BASIC! 3. Do a long press on the HOME screen. 4. You should see something like the following: 5. Tap Shortcuts. 6. Scroll down the Select Shortcut page until you see the BASIC! icon with the Launcher Shortcuts Label. 7. Tap the BASIC! Icon. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 214 De Re BASIC!

215 8. This screen will appear: 9. Fill out the Form exactly as shown. The Program File Name is Sample_Programs/f13_animations.bas The Icon File Name is cartman.png The Shortcut Name is Cartman 10. Tap OK. 11. You should see something like this on your HOME screen: 12. Tap the Cartman Shortcut. 13. BASIC! will start and run the Cartman Jumping Demo. How to Make a Shortcut Application (newer versions of Android Android 4.0 and later) 1. Select the Apps Page. 2. At the top of the screen, tap Widgets. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 215 De Re BASIC!

216 3. Scroll horizontally until you see the BASIC! icon that says Launcher Shortcuts. 4. Touch and hold that entry. It will be moved to the Home page. 5. Continue with step 8, above. What you need to know The icon image file must be located in the "<pref base drive>/rfo-basic/data/" directory. The program that you are going to run must be in the "source" directory or one of its sub directories. In this example, the file was located in the Sample_Programs(d) subdirectory of the "source(d)" directory. The icon should be a.png file. A Google search for "icon" will reveal thousands for free icons. Just copy your icon into "rfo-basic/data" on the SD card. Be very careful to correctly spell the names of the program and icon files. BASIC! does not check to see if these files actually exist during the "compile" process. If you enter the name of an icon file that does not exist, your shortcut will have the generic Android icon. If the file name you specified does not exist, when you tap the Shortcut you will see an error message in the form of program file in the Editor. The Shortcut name should be nine (9) characters or less. Android will not show more than nine characters. You can create as many shortcuts as you home screen(s) can handle. Tapping "Cancel" in the Launcher Shortcuts dialog will simply cancel the operation and return to the home screen. If you plan to use a BASIC! Launcher Shortcut, you should always exit BASIC! using Exit-Menu or Menu->More->Exit. If a Launched program is running, tapping BACK once or twice will exit BASIC back to the Home Screen. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 216 De Re BASIC!

217 Appendix D Building a Standalone Application Note: BASIC! collaborator Nicolas Mougin, has created a suite of automated tools for generating standalone applications. These tools can be downloaded from this website: Using Mr. Mougin s tools, you avoid having to do all of the following. If you have any questions or problems with this tool you can contact Mr. Mougin and other users of the tool at the BASIC! forum in this thread: Introduction This document will demonstrate how to create a standalone application from a BASIC! program. The resulting application does not need to have BASIC! installed to run. It will have its own application name and application icon. It may be distributed in the Google Play Store or elsewhere. The process involves setting up the Android development environment and making some simple, directed changes to the BASIC! Java source code. Since Google changes the Development Environment every so often, this procedure does not necessarily reflect the latest version of the ADT. License Information BASIC! is distributed under the terms of the GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE. The license requires that the source code for "derivative works" be made available to anyone who asks. The author of BASIC! interprets this to mean that the license applies only to derivatives of the BASIC! source interpreter code. It does not apply to source code for BASIC! applications, i.e., code that you have written using the BASIC! language. Before You Start Run the sample program, source/my_program.bas. We are going to turn this program into a practice APK. Setting Up the Development Environment These instructions are based on using the Android Developer Tools (ADT) plug-in for the Eclipse Integrated Development Environment (IDE) to build an Android application. This is no longer the recommended toolset. Android Studio is now the official IDE for Android. For information about Android Studio, visit Android s Developer Tools page at These instructions will be updated for the new tools in a future version of this manual. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 217 De Re BASIC!

218 1. Download and install the latest version of the Java Development Kit (JDK). Find this by Googling "java jdk download" and going to the listed oracle.com download site. Do not download from any other site. Note: The JDK download includes the Java Run Time Environment (JRE) which is also needed. 2. Download and install the "Eclipse IDE for Java Developers" from The current version is "Luna". You may prefer to download and install an older version from or because these instructions were written from "Juno". 3. Visit Android s "Installing the Eclipse Plugin" page at From there you can download the Android Developer Tools (ADT) Plugin. Follow the installation instructions found there. The instructions below have been changed over time for different versions, most recently for Eclipse 4.2 (Juno) and ADT 22.2, and you may find differences in the version you have installed. Please visit the BASIC! users forum at to report any problems you find. 4. BASIC! supports most versions of Android, which can lead to spurious build errors. You may need to change API level checking from Error to Warning: a. Select Window->Preferences->Android->Lint Error Checking b. Find NewApi and click on it. c. In the dropdown list, change the Severity from Error to Warning. d. Click Apply Download the BASIC! Source Code from the GitHub Repository 1. Go to: 2. Find the branch/tag selection button: Click the button and the "Tags" tab to select the tagged release version you want. If you do not select a tag, you will get the source for the latest development build. The latest development source is not guaranteed to be stable. 3. Click the "Download ZIP" button: found on the right side of the page. The name of the downloaded ZIP file depends on which tag you selected in the previous step. 4. Put the unzipped source files into a folder. For this exercise, name the folder "Cats". You should use a different folder for each new APK that you create. OR Download the BASIC! Source Code from the Legacy Archive 1. Go to: and select the version number you want. For versions later than v01.77, you must download the source from GitHub. 2. Look for the section heading, "Download BASIC! Source Code." Click on the "here" to download "Basic.zip". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 218 De Re BASIC!

219 3. Older versions of this file contain only the BASIC! source code. More recent versions also contain a copy of the Android-loadable Basic.apk file and a copy of this manual. 4. Put the unzipped source files into a folder. For this exercise, name the folder "Cats". You should use a different folder for each new APK that you create. Note: In the remainder of this tutorial, we assume our application is about cats, thus we are using the name "Cats". For your own APK, you should choose a name that matches your application. Create a New Project in Eclipse Note: to simplify later steps, turn off the automatic build feature of Eclipse before creating the new project: 1. On the menu, click Project. 2. Uncheck Build Automatically. Now you can create the project. 3. Select: File -> New -> Project ->Android->Android Project from Existing Code. 4. In the Import Projects dialog box, browse to the folder where you put the BASIC! source files. 5. Under Projects to Import, click the project you are importing. Make sure it is checked. 6. Under New Project Name, change the project name from "Basic" to "Cats". Click Finish. 7. In the Package Explorer window on the left, right-click on Cats and select Properties (near the bottom of the list). 8. In the Properties dialog box, select Android: 9. Check the highest level of the Android OS available in this list. Do this without regard to the level of OS in your device(s). (Note for KitKat users: BASIC! is currently compiled with API 18. The build works with higher levels, but you may choose to limit the OS level to 4.3, API 18.) 10. Click Apply then OK. The Basic source is now ready for making an APK. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 219 De Re BASIC!

220 Rename the Package The package name is what makes your application different from every other application that runs on Android devices. No matter what you name your application, it is the package name that Android uses to identify your particular application. In Eclipse First, use the search-and-replace dialog to update references to the package name. 1. From the Menu Bar, select: Search->File. 2. Fill in the dialog like this: 3. Click Replace. The Replace Text Matches Dialog Box opens. 4. Enter "com.rfo.cats" in the With: field, and click OK. Next, tell Eclipse about the package change. 5. In the Package Explorer, click and open the Cats -> src hierarchy as shown below. 6. Select the com.rfo.basic package. 7. From the Menu Bar, select File->Rename to open the Rename Package dialog. 8. In the New name: field, enter "com.rfo.cats". Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 220 De Re BASIC!

221 9. Make sure the Update references box is checked and click OK. Your project is ready to build. Restore the automatic build feature of Eclipse: 10. Click Project->Build Automatically. Make sure the checkmark appears. The project should build without errors. Other IDEs Most changes in this Appendix are simply changes in source files, and so they apply to any IDE. Editing the package name is a more complex. Eclipse hides some of the complexity, but it also requires special actions when renaming the package so the IDE knows about the change. A different IDE, it may have its own requirements. This section will describe all of the changes necessary to rename the package. Your IDE may do them, or you may have to do them yourself with a text editor. Some editors can do global search-and-replace across an entire file tree, which can save you a lot of work. 1. The package name is also a path name. If all of your source files are in a directory called "src", and your package name is "com.rfo.basic", then your source files are really in a directory called src/com/rfo/basic. If you change the package, for example, to "com.rfo.cats", then you must also move all of the source files to the new directory, in this case src/com/rfo/cats. 2. Everywhere it occurs, the string "com.rfo.basic" must be changed to your new package name. a. The Android manifest file (AndroidManifest.xml) contains the line package="com.rfo.basic" If you have a bin directory in your project, it may contain a copy of the manifest file. It was generated by the Eclipse build process. You may ignore it or delete it. b. Two layout files, res/layout/editor.xml and res/layout/console.xml, contain class attributes: class="com.rfo.basic.editor$linededittext" class="com.rfo.basic.run$consolelistview" c. Every.java file in the source directory (*.java) contains the line package com.rfo.basic; Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 221 De Re BASIC!

222 d. Several.java files (currently 7) files contain a line that starts like one of these: import com.rfo.basic. import static com.rfo.basic. Some files have more than one such line. e. Two files, Editor.java and LauncherShortcuts.java, contain one of these strings: public static final String EXTRA_LS_FILENAME = "com.rfo.basic.fn"; public static final String EXTRA_LS_FILENAME = "com.rfo.basic.dorestart"; You may safely ignore these, since they are not used in a standalone APK. However, it does not hurt to change these instances of com.rfo.basic along with all the others. Renaming complete At this point the package has been successfully renamed. Next we will create a practice APK that you then use to make your own APK. Modifications to setup.xml You can customize your apk with settings in the resource file setup.xml. Some changes are required for any apk. In the Package Explorer, expand Cats/res/values and then double-click setup.xml. The file opens in the window on the right. There are tabs at the bottom of the window that let you change how the file is displayed. If the Resources tab is selected, you see a special Eclipse Resource Editor. This editor does not know how to modify all of the properties in this file. Click on the setup.xml tab to display the actual XML text, as shown in the image below. In this view, you can also see the comments describing the values you can change for your application. Be sure you change only values, not names. Names are shown as blue text in quotes. Values are shown as black text with no quotation marks. If you change a name, Java can not find the item to get its value. Change the value of "app_name" from BASIC! to Cats!. This is the name of the application as it will appear on your Android device. Change the value of "app_path" to rfo-cats. This will be the directory on the SD card where your files are stored, if you choose to have a directory for files for your application. Make this change even if you do not choose to create directories for your application. It has implications in other parts of the code. Change the value of "is_apk" to true. The items "apk_create_data_dir" and "apk_create_database_dir" are flags that control whether directories are created under "app_path" for your application s files. Since this practice application does not need any directories, change the values of both to false. The item "load_file_names" is a list of files that you want loaded to the SD card. This practice application uses the sound clip meow.wav. Running under standard BASIC!, the program would use the file rfo-basic/data/meow.wav. As a standalone application, it can use a file image built into APK. Since the practice application is not using a real file, you can leave the "load_file_names" list empty. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 222 De Re BASIC!

223 Save the changes to setup.xml. Note: If you do want to load files to the SD card, you must allow the creation of the data directory (set "apk_create_data_dir" to true) and put the file names in the "load_file_names" list like this: The files will be loaded from the assets folder. This will be explained in the next sections. At this point, you have modified the source files of the BASIC! interpreter so it can be packaged into a standalone application. You can build and run it, if you like, but it will display a blank Console. That s result you get when you build BASIC! into an application but you don t give it a program to run. Advanced Customization with setup.xml The setup.xml file allows more customization than the minimum required for Cats. The VERSION$() function gets its value from the item named "version". If your application uses VERSION$(), this is where you set the value you want it to return. The item "my_program" is the name of the BASIC! program you want your application to run. This will be explained in the next section. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 223 De Re BASIC!

224 If the.bas program files in the source subdirectory of your assets are encrypted, you must set the item "apk_programs_encrypted" to true. This tells BASIC! that it must decrypt programs as it loads them. The item "run_name" is the default title of the Console. Your program can set the Console title, but you may want to change the default title here. Similarly, "select_name" and "textinput_name" set the names of the screens for the Select, Text.Input, and TGet commands. If your app uses Console output, you can set the text colors here. The mapping of "color1", "color2", and "color3" to text foreground, background, and underline depend on your Screen Colors setting under Preferences. As mentioned earlier, the "load_file_names" is a list of files that you want loaded to the SD card. Any files listed here will be copied from the assets directory to the SD card every time your app starts. This may be the internal Android file system or a file system mounted on an external SD card. After that, your app will access the files from the SD card file system, not from assets. Any changes your program makes to these files will be overwritten the next time the app starts. To preserve changes, your program must copy or rename the file. The copied/renamed file will not be overwritten when your program runs again. Several items in setup.xml control the splash screen and file-load progress indicator. If you don t change anything, your Cats app will display the default BASIC! splash screen briefly. You may not see it because the apk does not load any files. You can turn off the splash screen by setting "splash_display" to false. The splash screen image is the resource file res/drawable/splash.png. To customize the splash screen, replace this file in your project with an image of your own. Your image file must be named splash.jpg. If you do not use a splash screen, you may remove this file from your project to make your apk a little smaller. Do not remove the file res/drawable/blank.jpg. You can also customize the file-load progress indicator. Progress is shown in a pop-up over the splash screen. The title comes from the string "loading_msg". Each increment of progress is a copy of the string "progress_marker ". The default string is a single period (.). You can turn off the progress indicator by making the "loading_msg" an empty string. The setup.xml file is intended to collect the fields you are most likely to want to change all in one place. There are many other strings and values that can be set to customize your app. Another file with fields you may find interesting is strings.xml, where default values of many strings are set. For example, you can change the default title string for the Speech-to-Text dialog by editing the string named sst_prompt. Later, we will describe how to change the default values of Preference options in the file settings.xml. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 224 De Re BASIC!

225 Files and Resources Standard BASIC! loads its sample programs and the data files they need from the assets folder of the Eclipse project. Android treats the assets folder like a file system. At startup, BASIC! simply copies the entire assets/rfo-basic folder to the SD card. Your application can use the assets folder, too. Most of the BASIC! file-handling commands look in the SD card file system first. If the file does not exist on the SD card, your program compiled into an APK looks in your projects s res folder, and finally in assets. Resources may be built into the APK in either the res or assets folder, but res is not treated as a file system and has more restrictive naming rules. For example, the name of a resource in res must not contain spaces or hyphens. Both Byte.open and Text.open are able to open resources in your APK. However, Zip.open cannot open resources; it looks only in the SD card file system. If you want to read a ZIP that is in assets, you must first copy it from assets to the SD card. Then you can open the SD card file with Zip.Open. File.Exists looks only for files on the SD card, but File.Type works with items in assets as well. You can use them together to determine where an item is. The other File.* commands work with either files or resources. Font.Load can load a resource if it does not find the font file on the SD card. Files in assets are read-only. Your program can create and modify files on the SD card. It cannot create or modify files in assets. If you want BASIC! to copy files from assets to the SD card, list them the "load_file_names" tag of setup.xml as described above in "Advanced Customization with setup.xml". File names in assets are case-sensitive. If your program looks for a file on the SD card, the name is not case-sensitive: "meow.wav" and "Meow.WAV" are the same file. However, to find a file in assets, your program must name the file exactly as you put it in assets. Audio.Load aft, "meow.wav" will not find assets/rfo-cats/data/meow.wav. For this practice APK, make the following changes: 1. In the Package Explorer, expand Cats/assets/rfo-basic and its data and source folders. 2. Right-click assets and select New -> Folder. 3. In the Folder name: field, enter "rfo-cats/data". 4. Click Finish. 5. In the same way, create "rfo-cats/source". 6. Drag assets/rfo-basic/data/meow.wav to assets/rfo-cats/data/. 7. Drag assets/rfo-basic/source/my_program.bas to assets/rfo-cats/source/. Note: the top folder in assets must exactly match what you put in the "app_path" item in res/values/setup.xml. For this practice program, it is rfo-cats. If you expand your new folders, your Package Explorer should look like this: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 225 De Re BASIC!

226 Your APK does not need anything in assets/rfo-basic. Delete the entire folder: 8. In the Package Explorer, right-click Cats/assets/rfo-basic and select Delete. 9. In the confirmation window that appears, click OK. 10. You are done making changes! It wouldn t hurt to do a Project->Clean here. Testing the APK We are now ready to test this practice APK. The first thing you will do is to create a Keystore. The Keystore is used to sign your application. Google Play requires this signing. Android devices will not install unsigned APKs. You will use this one Keystore for all your APKs. Preserve and protect it. You will not be able to update your APK without it. For more information about the Keystore and signing, see: 1. In the Package Explorer, right-click Cats. 2. Select: Android Tools -> Export Signed Application Package. 3. In the Project Checks dialog box click Next. 4. Select Create New Keystore. a. Provide a name and location for the Keystore. b. Provide a password and confirm it. c. Click Next. 5. Fill out the Key Creation dialog. a. Pick any name for an Alias. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 226 De Re BASIC!

227 b. Enter 25 for Validity (Years). c. Click next. 6. In the Destination and Key/Certificate Checks dialog, a. Browse to the folder where you want to put the APK. b. Name the APK "Cats.apk". c. Click next. 7. Now, install and run Cats.apk. The APK will have the BASIC! icon. The name below the icon on your device will be "Cats!". Double click the icon to run your application. If you have reached this point successfully then you are ready to customize the APK for your application. Start over with a new copy of Basic.zip but use names and information particular to your application and then continue below. Installing a BASIC! Program into the Application You must build your BASIC! program into your application my putting it into the assets folder, just as you saw in the practice program. One very simple way is to copy your text into assets/<yourapp>/my_program.bas. <your-app> is the path you named in the setup.xml item "app_path". 1. In the Eclipse Package Explorer, expand the assets folder. 2. Double-click assets/<your-app>/source/my_program.bas. 3. The file will open in the edit window to the right: Now you can edit the file directly in Eclipse. If you prefer, you can open your program outside of Eclipse, copy its contents to the clipboard, and paste it into the Eclipse editor. When you are finished, select File- >Save from the menu bar, or just close the file by clicking the X Save Resource dialog box. on the file tab and Yes in the Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 227 De Re BASIC!

228 For more complex projects, here is another way to do it. 1. In the Eclipse Package Explorer, expand your program s assets folder. 2. If you have a my_program.bas in your assets folder, delete it. 3. In a file browser, browse to the file containing your program. 4. Drag your program from your file browser to your assets/<your-app>/source folder in Eclipse. 5. If your program uses INCLUDE files, drag them to the source folder, too. With either method, you now have a program to run. If your program uses graphics, audio files, or other resources, you must put them in your Android assets folder, too. If your program uses data files, drag them to your assets/<your-app>/data folder. If your program uses data base files with the ".db" extension, create a new folder for them called assets/<your-app>/databases and drag your file into the new folder. The result might look something like this: Notice that the top folder in assets matches the "app_path" value, and there is a program in its source folder named the same as the "my_program" value. Application Icons Android specifies that Application icons must be provided in specific sizes: low dpi (36x36 pixels), medium dpi (48x48 pixels), high dpi (72x72), x-high dpi (96x96), and so on. The icons must be.png files. There are tens of thousands of free icons available on the web. Most image editing programs can be Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 228 De Re BASIC!

229 used to re-sample the icons to the proper sizes and to save them as.png files. If you are not going to put your application on the Google Play Store then you do not really need to worry about getting this exactly right. To get your icon into your application, in res, open drawable-ldpi, drawable-mdpi, drawable-hdpi. For each of the icon sizes: 1. Outside of Eclipse, copy the icon file 2. In Eclipse, right click on the appropriate drawable- for the copied icon's size 3. Select Paste 4. Right click on the icon.png file and delete it 5. Select the newly pasted icon and rename it to "icon.png" by selecting File -> Rename. Yes, it is tedious work. Modifications to the AndroidManifest.xml File The AndroidManifest.xml file defines many aspects of how your application is built, and how it is presented to the Android system. For example, when you changed the package name, Eclipse wrote the change into the Android manifest. You can build and run your application with no further changes to AndroidManifest.xml. However, the manifest carries information that your application may not need. You should customize it to suit your application. In the Package Explorer, find the AndroidManifest.xml file. Double-click to open it: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 229 De Re BASIC!

230 Eclipse has special editors to display different views of the Manifest. If you don t see the actual XML text as shown here, click on the rightmost tab at the bottom of the window, labeled AndroidManifest.xml. Setting the Version Number and Version Name If you are going to put the application on the Google Play Store, you will need to change the version number and name for each new release. Make the appropriate changes to the android:versioncode and android:versionname items of the <manifest> tag at the top of AndroidManifest.xml. If you want to use the BASIC! VERSION$() function to have your program read your version number, you will also have to change the version number in res->values->strings. Permissions BASIC! uses many features about which the APK user is warned and must approve. Your particular APK may not need all or any of these permissions. The permission notifications are contained in the <usespermission> tags of the AndroidManiest.xml. They look like this: <uses-permission android:name=" android.permission. " /> Look them over. If you feel that your APK does not need them then delete or comment them out. If your application uses the SD card, do not comment out: <uses-permission android:name="android.permission.write_external_storage" /> Note: your application does not need WRITE_EXTERNAL_STORAGE permission if you use only the private storage named in the SysPath key of the Program.info command. If you want your application to run when the device boots (see "Launch at device boot", below), do not comment out: <uses-permission android:name="android.permission.receive_boot_completed" /> Be sure to test your APK after changing permissions. Disable the Shortcut Launcher Each Activity screen that BASIC! can present to a user is declared in an <activity> tag in the AndroidManifest.xml file. Your application may not use every Activity BASIC! offers. You may remove the unsed <activity> tags if you wish, but they don t hurt anything if you leave them in. However, the <activity> tags also tell the Android system what events should start your application. You probably do not want your application to respond to these two events: 1) A user can launch BASIC! by tapping a file with a ".bas" extension 2) A user can use the Shortcut Launcher to create a shortcut for a BASIC! program Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 230 De Re BASIC!

231 You remove these by deleting their tags from the Manifest: 1) Find the <activity> tag that contains android:name="basic". a) In it, find the <intent-filter> tag that contains <data android:pathpattern=".*\\.bas" />. b) Remove all of the <intent-filter> tag, from <intent-filter> to </intent_filter>. Do not remove the <activity> tag. 2) There are two shortcut tags: a) Find and remove the <activity> tag that contains android:name="launchershortcuts". b) Find and remove the <activity-alias> tag that contains android:name="createshortcuts". Launch at device boot Your APK can be set up to automatically launch just after the Android device has booted. This is accomplished by changing another item in AndroidManifest.xml. Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 231 De Re BASIC!

232 Find the <receiver> tag with android:name=".bootupreceiver". Change android:enabled="false" to android:enabled="true". You must also make sure your app has "RECEIVE_BOOT_COMPLETED" permission. See the "Permissions" section, above. Preferences There are certain preferences such as screen colors and font sizes that you have set for your application. The preferences that you will get with an APK will be BASIC! s default preferences. You can change the default preferences if you wish. Some preferences are simple check boxes. To change these, open the res/xml hierarchy and double click on the settings.xml file as shown below: For example, to change the default Console Lines preference from lined console to unlined console, change the value on the indicated line from "true" to "false". If your app uses graphics mode, and you have determined it works correctly with hardware-accelerated graphics, you may want to change the default setting of the CheckBoxPreference named "gr_accel". The default is normally "false", but to enable graphics acceleration in an APK you must change it to "true". Other preferences are multiple-choice lists. To see the list values, open the res/values hierarchy and double click on arrays.xml. Each preference has two blocks. The top block lists the words that will be seen on the Android screen. The second block lists the internal names that correspond to the displayed words. In the image below: Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 232 De Re BASIC!

233 The section marked contains the names and values for the Screen Orientation preference. The top block is the display names. The bottom block is the internal values that correspond to the display name. For example the internal value of Fixed Reverse Landscape is 2. To set a default value for Screen Orientation, we need to go back to settings.xml: Find the <ListPreference> tag with android:title"="screen Orientation". The title is the preference name that you see on the Android screen. The default value is in the android:defaultvalue ="0" line. Here we see the default value for the screen orientation is "0". Looking at the Array.xml file we can see the "0" is the internal name for Variable By Sensors. To change the default value to Fixed Reverse Landscape, change the "0" to "2". The other list preferences follow the same logic. Note: Be sure to test your application with your chosen preferences before burning them into an APK. Finished Create your finished APK in the same way we created the practice APK. Now that was not too bad, was it? Original Author Paul Laughton, 2011 Page 233 De Re BASIC!